.oj off .pm1 .lm5 .pm1 .lm 5 .oj off Abbot, I. 1982. Biota of Hawaii. Science 216:47. Abbot, I. and P. R. Grant. 1976. Nonequilibrial bird faunas on islands. Am. Nat. 110(974):507-528. Abbott, I. 1981. The composition of landbird faunas of islands round southwestern Australia: is there evidence for competitive exclusion? J. of Biogeography 8:135-144. |community assembly Abbott, I. Theories dealing with the ecology of landbirds on islands. 329-371. |equilibrium model Abele, L.G. Biogeography, colonization and experimental community structure of coral-associated crustaceans. Chapter 9. |island experiments |non-mammals Abele, L.G. and E.F. Connor. Application of Island Biogeography theory to refuge design: Making the right decision for the wrong reasons. Abelson, P. H. 1983. Large-scale extinctions. Science 220(4592):9. Ableson, P. H. 1982. Creationism and the age of the Earth. Science 215(4529):editorial. | creationism Ableson, P. H. 1983. Acid rain. Science 221(4606):---. Ableson, P. H. 1986. The international Geosphere-Biosphere program. Science 234(4777):657. Abrahamson, W.G. 1975. Reproduction of Rubus hispidus L. in different habitats. The American Midland Naturalist 93(2):471-478. Abrahamson, W.G. 1975. Reproductive strategies in dewberries. Ecology 56(3):721-726. Abrahmson, W. G. and H. Caswell. 1982. On the comparative allocation of biomass, energy, and nutrients in plants. Ecol. 63(4):982-991. | calorimetry -- mineral element allocation -- nutrients | resource allocation -- Solidago -- Verbascum thapsus Abrams, P. 1980. Are competition coefficients constant? Inductive versus deductive approaches. The American Naturalist 116:730- 735. |competition |dabate |evidence |reviews Abrams, P.A. 1984. Recruitment, lotteries and coexistence in coral reef fish. Am. Nat. 123(1):44-55. Abramsky, Z. and C. Sellah. 1982. Competition and the role of habitat selection in Gerbillus allenbyi and Meriones tristrami: a removal experiment. Ecology 63(5):1242-1247. Abramsky, Z., M.I. Dyer, and P.D. Harrison. 1979. Competitiion among small mammals in experimentally perturbed areas of the shortgrass prairie. Ecology 60(3):530-536. Abramsky, Z., S. Brand and M. Rosenzweig. Geographical ecology of gerbilline rodents in sand dune habitats of Israel. Manuscript. Adams, C. E. 1976. Measurement and characteristics of fox squirrel, Sciurus niger rufiventer , home ranges. Am Mid. J. 95(1):211-215. Adams, J. and R. H. Ward. 1973. Admixture studies and the detection of selection. Science 180:1137-1143. Adams, L. 1959. An analysis of population of snowshoe hares in northwestern Montana. Ecol. Mono. 29(2):141-169. Adams, L., R. E. Wetmore and R. L. Limes. 1971. Automated analysis of heart rate in ground squirrels using radio telemetry and computers. BioSci. 21(20):1040-1042. Adkisson, C.S. and R.N. Conner. Principal component analysis of woodpecker nesting habitat. Adkisson, P. L., G. A. Niles, J. K. Walker, L. S. Bird and H. B. Scott. Controlling cotton's insect pests: a new system. Science 216:19-22. | pest management -- biocontrol Adler, G.H. Influence of island area and isolation on population characteristics of Peromyscus leocopus. Manuscript. Adler, G.H. and M.L. Wilson. 1985. Small mammals on Massachusetts islands: the use of probability functions in clarifying biogeographic relationships. Oecologia. Adler, G.H. and M.L. Wilson. Insular distribution of Blarina and Microtus: Implications for species co-occurrence patterns. Manuscript |Mammal Populations Coastal Insular Adler, G.H. and R.H. Tamarin. 1984. Demography and reproduction in island and mainland white-footed mice (Peromyscus leucopus) in southeastern Massachusetts. Can. J. Zool. 62(1):58-64. Adler, G.H. and R.H. Tamarin. Dispersal of White-footed Mice, Peromyscus leucopus, in low-density island and mainland populations. Adler, G.H., L.M. Reich and R.H. Tamarin. 1984. Characteristics of white-footed mice in woodland and grassland in eastern Massachusetts. Acta Theriologica 29(5):57-62. Adler, G.H., L.M. Reich and R.H. Tamarin. 1984. Demography of the Meadow jumping mouse (Zapus hudsonius) in Eastern Massachusetts. The American Midland Naturalist 112(2):387- 391. |UVA publications Adler, G.H., M.L. Wilson and M.J. Derosa. 1985. Influence of island area and isolation on population characteristics of Peromyscus leucopus. Manuscript submitted 6/10/85. |Mammal Populations Coastal Insular Ahamadjian, V. 1963. The fungi of lichens. Sci. Amer. 208(2):123- 132. Ahlen, I. 1983. The bat fauna of some isolated islands in Scandanavia. Oikos 41:352-358. |equilibrium model Aiken, R.C. and L. Lapidus. 1973. The stability of interacting populations. Int. J. Systems Sci. 4(4):691-695. Alatalo, R.V. 1982. Bird species distributions in the Galapagos and other archipelagoes: Competition or chance? Ecology 63(4):881-887. |assembly rules Albert, D. A., S. R. Denton and B. V. Barnes. 1987. Regional landscape ecosystems of Michigan: new research in landscape ecology. U. of Mich. Net. Res. News 37:1-9. Albertson, B.D., E.L. Bradley and C.R. Terman. 1975. Plasma Progesterone Concentrations on Prairie Deermice from Experimental Laboratory populations. J. Reprod. Fert. 42:407- 414. Aldon, E.F. and J.F. Barstad. 1987. Escudilla mountain research natural area: a study of an undisturbed montane grassland on Arizona. Natural Areas Journal 107. Aldous., C. M. and S. E. Aldous. 1944. The snowshoe hare - a serious enemy of forest plantations. J. For. 42(2):88-94. Aldrich, S. R. 1972. Some effcts of crop-production technology on environmental quality. BioSci. 22(2):90-95. Alexander, B.G., E.L. Fitzhugh, F. Ronco, and J.A. Ludwig. A classification of forest habitat types of the northern portion of the cibola national Forest, New Mexico. USDA FS General Technical Report RM-143. Alexander, R. R. 1985. Major habitat types, community types and plant communities in the Rocky Mountains. USDA Forest Service General Technical Report RM-123. Alexander, R.D. and P.W. Sherman. 1977. Local Mate Competition and Parental Investment in Social Insects. Science 196:494- 500. Alexander, R.R. 1987. Classification of the forest vegetation of Colorado by habitat type and community type. USDA FS Research Note RM-478. Alexander, R.R. and F. Ronco, Jr. 1987. Classification of the forest vegetation on the National Forests of Arizona and New Mexico. USDAFS Research Note RM-469, June. Allen, T.F.H., R.V. O'Neill and T.W. Hoekstra. 1984. Interlevel relations in ecological research and management: some working principles from hierarchy theory. USDAFS general technical report RM-110. Allison, A.C. 1955. Aspects of polymorphism in man. Cold Spring Harbor Symposia on Quantitative Biology XX:239-255. Allison, A.C. 1956. Sickle Cells and Evolution. Scientific American 195(2):87-94. Alston, R.E., T.J. Mabry, and B.L. Turner. 1963. Perspectives in Chemotaxonomy. Science 142(3592):545-552. Altieri, M.A. 1983. The questions of small farm development: who teaches whom? Agriculture, Ecosystems and Environment 9:401- 405. Altmann, J. 1983. Costs of reproduction in Baboons. Behavioral Energetics: The cost of sruvival in vertebrates. Alvarez, W. 1986. Toward a theory of impact crisis. Eos Sept. 2, 1986:648-655. Amant, J.L.S. 1970. The determination of regulation in animal populations. Ecology 51:823-828. Ambrose, H. W. 1969. A comparison of Microtus pennsylvanicus home ranges as determined by isotope and live trap methods. Am. Mid. Nat. 81(2):535-555. Amerson, A. B., Jr. 1975. Species richness on the nondisturbed northwestern Hawaiian Islands. Ecol. 56:435-444. Anderson, B.W., R.D. Ohmart, and S.D. Fretwell. 1982. Evidence for social regulation in some riparian bird populations. Am. Nat. 120:340-352. Anderson, D. J. 1965. Classification and ordination in vegetation science: controversy over a non-existant problem? J. Ecol. 1965:521-526. Anderson, D. R., K. P. Burnham, G. C. White and D. L. Otis. 1983. Density estimation of small-mammal populations using a trapping web and distance sampling methods. Ecology 64(4):674-680. | capture-recapture -- density estimation -- distance sampling | removal sampling -- small mammals -- trapping -- web design Anderson, D.W. 1976. Brown Pelican reproduction. Science 193:96- 97. Anderson, D.W., J.R. Jehl, R.W. Risebrough, L.A. Woods, and L.R. Deweese, and W.G. Edgecomb. Brown Pelicans: Improved reproduction off the southern California Coast. Science 190:806-808. Anderson, G. R. V., A. H. Ehrlich, P. R. Ehrlic, J. D. Roughgarden, B. C. Russel and F. H. Talbot. 1981. The community structure of coral reef fishes. Am. Nat. 117:476- 495. Anderson, P. K. 1980. Evolutionary implications of microtine behavioral systems on the ecological stage. The Biologist 62(1-4):70-88. Anderson, P.K. 1978. The serendipitous Mouse. Natural Hist. 38- 43. |Mammal Populations Coastal Insular Anderson, R.M. The influence of parasitic infection on the dynamics of host population growth. 245-246. Anderson, S.H. and H.H. Shugart. 1974. Habitat selection of breeding birds in an east tennessee deciduous forest. Ecology 55:828-837. Andre, J. B. 1981. Habitat use and relative abundance of the small mammals of a South Carolina barrier island. Brimleyana 5:129-134. Andre, J.B. 1981. Habitat use and relative abundance of the small mammals of a South Carolina barrier island. Brimleyana 5:129- 134. |Mammal Populations Coastal Insular Andrewartha, H.G. 1963. Density dependence in the Australian thrips. Ecology 44:218-220. Andrewartha, H.G. and Birch. 1954. Of four natural populations in which the numbers are determined largely by weather. Andrzejewski, R. and H. Wroclawek. 1961. Mortality of small rodents in traps as an indication of the diminished resistence of the migrating part of a population. Angelis, D. L. 1976. Application of stochastic models to a wildlife population. Mathematical Biosciences 31:227-236. Angerbjorn, A. 1985. The evolution of body size in mammals on islands: some comments. Am. Nat. 125:304-309. Angerbjorn, A. 1985. The evolution of body size in mammals on islands: some comments. The American Naturalist 125(2):304- 309. |community assembly Antonovics, J. 1976. The input from population genetics: The New England genetics. Systematic Botany 1:233-245. Aquadro, C. F. and C. W. Kilpatrick. 1981. Morphological and biochemical variation and differentiation in insular and mainland deer mice ( Peromyscus maniculatus ). in Mammalian population genetics. Eds. M. H. Smith and J. Joule. U. of GA Press, Athens. 214-230. Aquadro, C. F. and C. W. Kilpatrick. 1981. Morphological and biochemical variation and differentiation in insular and mainland deer mice ( Peromyscus maniculatus ). in Mammalian population genetics. Eds. M. H. Smith and J. Joule. U. of GA Press, Athens. 214-230. Aquadro, C.F. and C.W. LKilpatrick. 1981. Morphological and biochemical variation and differation in insular and mainland deer mice (Peromyscus maniculatus). in, Mammalian Population Genetics, M.H. Smith and J. Joule (eds.). Aquadro, C.F., C.W. Kilpatrick and K.L. Crowell. 1980. Colonization of suitable habitat by Peromyscus leucopus in coastal Maine. Journal of Mammology. 61(4):727-730. |Mammal Populations Coastal Insular Arms, K., P. Feeny and R. C. Lederhouse. 1974. Sodium: stimulus for puddling behavior by tiger swallowtail butterflies, Papilio glaucus. Science 185:372-374. Armstrong, E. 1983. Relative brain size and metabolism in mammals. Science 220:1302-1304. Armstrong, R. A. 1982. A Quantatative theory of reproductive effort in rhizomatous perennial plants. Ecol. 63(3):679-686. | energy partitioning -- life history strategy | reproductive effort -- rhizomatous plants Armstrong, R. A. 1982. A Quantatative theory of reproductive effort in rhizomatous perennial plants. Ecol. 63(3):679-686. | energy partitioning -- life history strategy | reproductive effort -- rhizomatous Armstrong, R. A. 1983. On the quantitative theory of resource partitioning in rhizomatous perennial plants: the influences of canopy structure, rhizome branching pattern, and self- thinning. Ecol. 64(4):703-709. | branching pattern -- energy partitioning | life history strategy -- plant architecture | reproductive effort -- rhizomatous plants -- self-thinning Armstrong, R. A. and T. McGehee. 1980. Competitive exclusion. Am. Nat. 115(2):151-170. Arno, S. F., D. G. Simmerman and R. E. Keane. 1986. Characterizing succession within a forest habitat type - an approach designed for resource managers. U. S. Dept. Agri. For. Serv. Res. Note INT-357. Aron, W. I. and S. H. Smith. 1971. Ship canals and aquatic ecosystems. Science 174:13-20. Art, H. W., F. H. Bormann, G. K. Voigt amd G. M. Woodwell. 1974. Barrier island forest ecosystem: role of meteorologic nutrient inputs. Sci. 184:60-62. Ascher, R. and M. Ascher. 1965. Recognizing the emergence of man. Science 147(3655):243-248. Ashmole, N.P. 1063. The regulation of numbers of tropical oceanic birds. August, P. V. 1983. The role of habitat complexity and heterogeneity in structuring tropical mammal communities. Ecol. 64(6):1495-1507. August, P. V. and T. H. Fleming. 1984. Competition in neotropical small mammals. Acta Zool. Fennica 172:33-36. August, P.V. 1983. The role of habitat complexity and heterogeneity in structuring tropical mammal communities. Ecology 64(6): 1495-1507. August, P.V. 1984. Population ecology of small mammals in the llanos of Venezuela. Contributions in Mammalogy in Honor of Robert L. Packard. Spec. Pub. Mus. Texas Tech Univ. 22:1-234. Aumann, G. D. 1965. Microtine abundance and soil sodium levels. J. Mamm. 46(4):594-604. Avise, J. C., M. H. Smith and R. K. Selander. 1974. Biochemical polymorphism and systematics in the genus Peromyscus . VI. The Boylii species group. J. Mamm. 55(4):751-763. Ayala F. J. 1971. Competition between species: frequency dependance. Sci. 171:L820-824. Ayala F.J. 1974. Biological Evolution: Natural Selection or Random Walk? American Scientist 62:692-702. |Mammal Populations Coastal Insular Ayala, F.J. 1968. Genotype, Environment and population numbers. Science 162:1453-1460. |Mammal Populations Coastal Insular Ayala, F.J. 1983. The origin of species. Carolina Biology Reader. Babbage, C. 1837. On the age of strata, as inferred from the rings of trees embedded in them. Baily, H. H. 1920. A new fox squirrel from the eastern shore of Maryland. Bulletin No. 1, The Baily Museum and Library of Natural History. Baker, A.E.M. and M.L. Petras. 1986. The fate of Mus musculus demes after destruction of their habitats. Ecological J. of the Linnean Society. 29:81-88. Baker, C.E. 1974. Measurement of Small Mammal Metabolism by Infrared Gas Analysis. Journal of Mammalogy 55(3):664-670. Baker, R.H. 1971. Nutritional Strategies of Myomorph Rodents in North American Grasslands. Journal of Mammalogy 52(4):800- 805. Baker, R.J., J. H. Bowers and M.H. Smith. Reply to comments on "Chromosomal evolution in Peromyscus". Evolution 29(1):189 Bakker, K. 1964. Backgrounds of controversies about population theories and their terminologies. Z. angew. Ent. 53:187-208 Baldwin I. T. and J. C. Schultz. 1983. Rapid changes in leaf chemistry induced by damage: evidence for communication between plants. Science 221:277-279. Balph, D. M. and D. F. Balph. 1966. Sound communication of Uinta ground squirrels. J. Mamm. 47(3):440-450. Balph, D.F. 1968. Behavioral Responses of Unconfined Uinta Ground Squirrels to Trapping. The Journal of Wildlife Management 32(4):778-794. Balph, D.F. 1971. Sampling small mammal populations in curlew valley. Desert Biome Progress Report. Barkalow, F. S., Jr. Sciurus niger cinereus linne neotype designation. Proc. Biol. Soc. Wash., 69:13-17. Barnett, R. J. 1977. The effect of burial by squirrels on germination and survival of oak and hickory nuts. Am. Mid. Nat. 98(2):319-330. Barnett, R.J. 1976. The Effect of Burial by Squirrels on Germination and Survival of Oak and Hickory Nuts. The American Midland Naturalist. 98 (2):319-330. Barrett, G.W., G.M. Van Dyne and E.P. Odum. 1976. Stress Ecology. BioScience 26(3):192-194. Barry, R.E., M.A. Botje, and L.B. Grantham. 1984. Vertical stratification of Peromyscus leucopus and P. maniculatus in southwestern Virginia. J. Mamm. 65(1):145-148. Bartholomew, G.A. 1986. The role of natural history in contemporary biology. BioScience 36(5):324-328. Bartholomew, G.A. and J.W. Hudson. 1961. Desert Ground Squirrels. Scientific American 205(5):107-116. Bartlein, P. J., I. C. Prentice and T. Webb, III. 1986. Climatic response surfaces from pollen data for some eastern North American taxa. J. Biogeo. 13:35-57. Bartlett, M.S. Multivariate Statistics. Batra, S. W. T. 1982. Biological control in agroecosystems. Science 215:134-139. | pest management -- biocontrol Batzli, G. O. 1977. Population dynamics of the white footed mouse in floodplain and upland forests. Am. Mid. Nat. 97(1):18-32. Batzli, G. O. 1977. Population dynamics of the white footed mouse in floodplain and upland forests. Am. Mid. Nat. 97(1):18-32. Batzli, G.O. 1968. Dispersion Patterns of Mice in California Annual Grassland. Journal of Mammalogy 49(2):239-250. Baumgartner, L.L. and A.C. Martin. 1939. Plant Histology as an Aid in Squirrel Food-Habit Studies. Journal of Wildlife Management 3(3):266-268. Bazzaz, F. A. and S. T. A. Pickett. 1980. Physiological ecology of tropical succession: a comparative review. Ann. Rev. Ecol. Syst. 11:287-310. Bazzaz, F.A. 1968. Succession on Abandoned Fields in the Shawnee Hills, Southern Illinois. Ecology 49(5):924-936. Beals, E. W. 1969. Vegetational change along altitudinal gradients. Science 165:981-985. Beauchamp, J.J. and Hoel, D.G. 1973. Some Investigations and Simulation Studies of Canonical Analysis. J. Statist. Simul. 2:197-209. Beaver, R.A. 1979. Non-equilibrium "island" communities. A guild of tropical bark beetles. J. of Animal Ecology 48:987-1002. |equilibrium theory |density compensation Becker, G.S. Altruism, Egoism, and Genetic Fitness: Economics and Sociobiology. Journal of Economic Literature 817-826. Becker, H.F. 1969. Some living plant fossils. American Forests 75(7):12- Beddall, B. G. 1973. Late pleistocene extinctions. (Response to J. W. Corbett) Science 180:905. (Filed with J. W. Corbett) Beddington, J. R. amd R. M. May. 1977. Harvesting natural populations in a randomly fluctuating environment. Sci. 197:463-465. Beecher, M.D. and I.M. Beecher. 1979. Sociobiology of bank swallows: reproductive strategy of the male. Science 205:1282-1285. Beer, J.R., P. Lukens and D. Olson. 1954. Small mammal populations on the islands of Basswood Lake, Minnesota. Ecology 35(4):437-445. Bekoff, M. 1974. Social Play in Coyote, Wolves, and Dogs. BioScience 24:225-230. Bekoff, M. 1977. Mammalian dispersal and the ontogeny of individual behavioral phenotypes. Am. Nat. 111:715-732. Bekoff, M. Coyote damage assessment in the west: Review of a report. BioScience 29(12):754. Bell, D.T. 1974. Studies on the Ecology of a Streamside Forest: Composition and Distribution of Vegetation Beneath the Tree Canopy. Bulletin of the Torrey Botanical Club 101:14-20. Belmont, L. and F.A. Marolla. 1973. Birth Order, Family Size, and Intelligence. Bender, E.A., T.C. Case, and M.E. Gilpin. 1984. Perturbation experiments in community ecology: theory and practice. Bender, E.A., T.J. Case and M.E. Gilpin. 1984. Perturbation experiments in community ecology: theory and practice. Ecology 65(1):1-13. Benedict, J.B. 1984. Rates of tree-island migration, Colorado Rocky Mountains, USA. Ecology 65(3):820-823. Bengtson, S. and D. Bloch. 1983. Island land bird population densities in relation to island size and habitat quality on the Faroe Islands. Oikos 41:507-522. |community assembly Benke, A.C. 1976. Dragonfly production and prey turnover. Ecology 57(5):915-927 Benke, A.C. and S.S. Benke. 1975. Comparative dynamics and life histories of coexisting dragonfly populations. Ecology 56(2):302-317. Benson, J.F. 1973. Some problems of testing for density- dependence in animal populations. Oecologia 13:183-190. Berenbaum, M.R. 1983. Effects of tannins on growth and digestion in two species of papilionids. Ent. exp. and appl. 34:245- 250. Berger, J. 1983. Ecology and catastrophic mortality in wild horses: implications for interpreting fossil assemblages. Science 220:1403-1404. Berger, P.J., E.H. Sanders, P.D. Gardner and N.C. Negus. 1977. Phenolic Plant Compounds Functioning as Reproductive Inhibitors in Microtus montanus. Science 195:575-577. Bergstrom, B. J. 1986. An analysis of multiploe captures in Permoyscus with a critique on methodology. Can. J. Zool. 64:1407-1411. Bergstrom, B.J. 1988. Home ranges of three species of chipmunks (Tamias) as assessed by radiotelemetry and grid trapping. J. Mamm. 69(1):190-193. Bergstrom, J. B. and J. R. Sauer. 1986. Social traqveling inferred from multiple captures: testing assumptions. Am. Mid. Nat. 115(1):201-203. Berman, C.M. 1988. Maternal condition and offspring sex ratio in a group of free-ranging rhesus monkeys: an eleven year study. Am. Nat. 131(3):307-328. Berry, R. J. 1986. Genetics of insular population of mammals, with particular reference to differentiation and founder effects in British small mammals. Biol. J. Linnean Soc. 28:205-230. | evolution -- islands -- natural selection -- small mammals Berry, R. J. and J. Peters. 1981. Allozymic variation in house mouse populations. in Mammalian population genetics. Eds. M. H. Smith and J. Joule. U. of GA Press, Athens. 242-253. Berry, R. J. and J. Peters. 1981. Allozymic variation in house mouse populations. in Mammalian population genetics. Eds. M. H. Smith and J. Joule. U. of GA Press, Athens. 242-253. Berry, R.J. 1973. Chance and change in British Long-tailed field mice (Apodemus sylvaticus). J. Zool. Lond. 170:351-366. Berry, R.J. 1978. Genetic variation in wild house mice: where natural selection and history meet. Amer. Sci. 66:50-60. |Species of interest Berry, R.J. 1981. Population dynamics of the House Mouse. Symp. zool Soc. Lond. 47:395-425. |Mammal Populations Coastal Insular Berry, R.J. 1983. Diversity and differentiation: the importance of island biology for general theory. Oikos 41:523-529. |scientific method Berry, R.J. and B.J.K. Tricker. 1969. Competition and extinction: the mice, of Foula, with notes on those of Fair Isle and St. Kilda. J. Zool. Lond. 158:247-265. |Mammal Populations Coastal Insular Berry, R.J. and J. Peters. 1981. Allozymic variation in house mouse populations. in, Mammalian Population Genetics, M.H. Smith and J. Joule (eds.). Berry, R.J., I.M. Evans, and B.F.C. Sennitt. 1967. The relationships and ecology of Apodemus sylvaticus from the Small Isles of the Inner Hebrides, Scotland. J. Zool. Lond. 152:333-346. Bertram, B.C.R. 1975. The Social System of Lions. Scientific American 232(5):54-65. Bevenm S., E.F. Connor and K. Beven. 1984. Avian biogeography in the Amazon basin and the biological model of diversification. J. of Biogeography 11:383-399. |equilibrium theory |density compensation Bibliography: |UVA publications Biehl, C.C. and W.J. Matthews. 1984. Small fish community structure in Ozark streams: improvements in the statisticla analysis of presence-absence data. Amer. Midland Naturalist 111(2):371-382. Bierzychudek, P. 1984. Assessing "optimal" life histories in a fluctuation environment: the evolution of sex-changing by Jack-in-the-pulpit. Am. Nat. 123(6):829-840. Bigger, M. An investigation by Fourier analysis into the interaction between coffee leaf-miners and their larval parasites. Birch, L.C. 1957. The Meanings of Competition. The American Naturalist 41(856):5-17. Birch, L.C. 1960. The genetic factor in population ecology. Am. Nat. 94:5-24. Birks, H. J. B. 1986. Late-Quaternary biotic changes in terrestrial and lucastrine environments, with particular reference to north-west Europe. in Handbook of holocene paleology and paleohydrololgy. Ed. B. E. Berglund. John Wiley & Sons Ltd.:3-65. Bishop, G.F. and A.J. Davy. 1984. Significance of rabbits for the population regulation of Hieracium pilosella in Brackland. J. Ecology 72:273-284. Bishop, G.F. and A.J. Davy. 1985. Density and the commitment of apical meristems to clonal growth and reproduction in Hieracium pilosella. Oecologia 66:417-422. Bishop, I.R. and M.J. Delany. Life histories of small mammals in the channel islands in 1960-61. Bissonette, J.A. 1978. The Influence of extremes of temperature on activity patterns of peccaries. The Southwestern Naturalist 23(3):339-346. Biswell, H.H., H. Buchanan and R.P. Gibbens. 1966. Ecology of the Vegetation of a Second-Growth Sequoia Forest. Ecology 47(4):630-634. Blacksmith, R. E. 1958. Nearest-neighbor distance measurements for the estimation of animal populations. Ecol. 39(1):150. Blair, F. W. 1953. Factors afecting gene exchange between populations in the Peromyscus maniculatus group. Tex. J. Sci. 1:17-33. Blair, W. F. 1937. The burrows and food of the praire pocket mouse. J. Mamm. 18(2):188-191. Blair, W. F. 1938. Ecological relationships of the mammals of the Bird Creek region, northeastern Oklahoma. Am. Mid. Nat. 20(3):473-526. Blair, W. F. 1939. Faunal relationships and geographic distribution of mammals in Oklahoma. Am. Mid. Nat. 22(1):85- 133. Blair, W. F. 1939. New mammals from Texas and Oklahoma, with remarks on the status of Thomomys Texensis Baily. Occasional Papers of the Museum of Zoology, U. of Mich., Ann Arbor, # 403. Blair, W. F. 1940. Techniques for the study of mammal populations. J. Mamm. 22:148-157. Blair, W. F. 1941. A simple and effective live trap for small mammals. J. Wildl. Man. 5(2):191-193. Blair, W. F. 1941. Annotated list of mammals of the Tularosa Basin, New Mexico. Am. Mid. Nat. 26(1):218-229. Blair, W. F. 1941. Color variation in the spotted ground squirrels of the Tularosa Basin, New Mexico. Contributions from the laboratory of vertabrate genetics, U. of Mich., Ann Arbor, # 16. Blair, W. F. 1941. Some data on the home ranges and general life history of the short-tailed shrew, red-backed vole, and woodland jumping mouse in northern Michigan. Am. Mid. Nat. 25(3):681-685. Blair, W. F. 1941. The small population of a hardwood forest in northern Michigan. Contributions rom the loboratory of vertabrate genetics, U. of Mich., Ann Arbor, # 17. Blair, W. F. 1942. Rate of developement of young spotted ground squirrels. J. Mamm. 23(3):342-343. Blair, W. F. 1943. Activities of the chihuahua deer-mouse in relation to light intensity. J. Wildl. Man. 7(1):92-97. Blair, W. F. 1943. Biological and morphological distinctness of a previously undescribed species of the Peromyscus truei group from Texas. Contributions from the laboratory of vertabrate biology, U. of Mich., Ann Arbor, # 24. Blair, W. F. 1943. Ecological distribution of mammals in the Tularosa Basin, New Mexico. Contributions from the laboratory of vertabrate biology, U. of Mich., Ann Arbor, # 20. Blair, W. F. 1943. Populations of the deer-mouse and associated small mammals in the Mesquite association of southern New Mexico. Contributions from the laboratory of vertabrate biology, U. of Mich., Ann Arbor, # 21. Blair, W. F. 1944. Inheritance of the white-cheek character in mice of the genus Peromyscus . Contributions from the laboratory of vertabrate biology, U. of Mich., Ann Arbor, # 25. Blair, W. F. 1946. An estimate of the total number of beach-mice of the subspecies Peromyscus polionotus leucocephalus , occupying Santa Rosa Island, Florida. Am. Nat. 80:665-668. Blair, W. F. 1947. An analysis of certain genetic variations in pelage color of the chihuahua deer-mouse ( Peromyscus maniculatus blandus ). Contributions from the laboratory of vertabrate biology, U. of Mich., Ann Arbor, # 35. Blair, W. F. 1947. Variation in shade of pelage color of local population of the cactus-mouse ( Peromyscus eremicus ) in the Tularosa Basin and adjacent areas of southwestern New Mexico. Contributions from the laboratory of vertabrate biology, U. of Mich., Ann Arbor, # 37. Blair, W. F. 1949. Extensions of the known ranges of three species of Texas mammals. J. Mamm. 30(2):201-202. Blair, W. F. 1949. Shade of pelage color in two populations of kangaroo rats and remarks on the status of Dipodomys merriami ambiguus Merriam. J. Mamm. 30(4):388-390. Blair, W. F. 1950. (Abstract by McCarley) The biotic provinces of Texas. Tex. J. Sci. 2(1):93-117. Blair, W. F. 1951. Population structure, social behavior, and environmental relations in a natural population of the beach mouse ( Peromyscus polionotus leucocephalus ). Contributions from the laboratory of vertabrate biology, U. of Mich., Ann Arbor, # 48. Blair, W. F. 1952. Bats of the Edwards Plateau in central Texas. Tex. J. Sci. 4(1):95-98. Blair, W. F. 1954. Mammals of the Mesquite Plains biotic district in Texas and Oklahoa, and speciation in the central grasslands. Tex. J. Sci. 3:235-264. Blair, W. F. 1954. Tests for discrimination between four subspecies of deer-mice ( Peromyscus maniculatus ). Tex. J. Sci. 2:201-210. Blair, W. F. 1956. Call difference as an isolation mechanism in southwestern toads (genus Bufo ). Tex. J. Sci. 8(1):87-106. Blair, W. F. 1957. Changes in vertabrate population under conditions of drought. Cold Spring Harbor Symposia on Quant. Bio., Vol. XXII:273-275. Blair, W. F. 1958. Call difference is an isolation mechanism in Florida species of hylid frogs. Quart. J. Flor. Acad. Sci. 21(1):32-48. Blair, W. F. 1958. Effects of X-irradiation on a natural population of the deer-mouse ( Peromyscus maniculatus ). Ecol. 39(1):113-118. Blair, W. F. 1958. Mating call and stage of speciation of two allotropic populations of spadefoots ( Scaphiopus ). Tex. J. Sci. 10(4):484-488. Blair, W. F. 1961. Biological species and phlogenetic taxonomy. Syst. Zool. 10(1):42-43. Blair, W. F. 1961. Effects of radiations of natural populations of vertabrates. in Recent Advances in Botany. U. of Toronto Press:1377-1381. Blair, W. F. 1964. Evolution at populational and interpopulational levels: isolating mechanisms and interspecies interactions in anuran amphibians. Quart. Rev. Bio. 39(4):333-344. Blair, W. F. 1964. The case for ecology. BioSci. 14(7):17-19. Blair, W. F. 1965. Amphibian speciation. in The Quaternary of the United States: Rev. for the VII congress Int. Assoc. Quat. Res. Eds. H. E. Wright, Jr. and D. G. Frey. Princeton U. Press:543-556. Blair, W. F. 1965. Amphibian speciation. in The Quaternary of the United States: Rev. for the VII Congress of Int. Assoc. for Quat. Res. Eds. H. E. Wright, Jr. and G. Frey. Princeton University Press. Blair, W. F. 1968. U. S. Participation in the international biological program. J. Wash. Acad. Sci. 58:45-52. Blair, W. F. 1969. The environmental crises and the international biological program. Scool of Sci. and Math., Nov. 1969:689- 694. Blair, W. F. and A. P. Blair. 1941. Foodmhabits of ths Collared lizard in northeastern Oklahoma. Am. Mid. Nat. 26(1):230-232. Blair, W. F. and D. Pettus. 1954. The mating call and its significance in the Colorado River Toad ( Bufo alvarius Girard). Tex. J. Sci. 6(1):72-77. Blair, W. F. and M. J. Littlejohn. 1960. Stage of speciation of two allotropic populations of chorus frogs ( Pseudacris ). Evol. 14(1):82-87. Blair, W. F. and P. M. Blossom. 1948. Variation in the pygmy- mouse ( Baiomys taylori ) from Texas and Arizona. Contributions from the laboratory of vertabrate biology, U. of Mich.,Ann Arbor, # 40. Blair, W. F. and R. H. Hubbell. 1938. The biotic districts of Oklahoma. Am. Mid. Nat. 425-454. Blair, W. F. and T. E. Kennerly Jr. 1959. Effects of X- irradiation on a natural population of the wood-mouse ( Peromyscus leucopus ). Tex. J. Sci. 11(2):137-149. Blair, W.F. 1968. The importance of ecology and the study of ecosystems. Publication No. 239. Joint House-Senate Colloquium to Discuss a National Policy for the Environment. Blair, W.F., A.C. Hulse and M.A. Mares. 1976. Origins and affinities of vertebrates of the North American Sonoran desert and the Monte desert of northwestern Argentina. J. of Biogeography 3:1-18. Blair. W. F. 1938. Two new pocket-mice from western Texas. Occasional papers of the Museum of Zoology, U. of Mich., Ann Arbor, # 381. Blaustein, A. R. 1983. The situation of sociobiology. (Book Review) Science 220:188-189. Blaustein, A.R. 1980. Behavioral aspects of competition in a three-species rodent guild of coastal southern california. Behavior. Ecol. Sociobiol. 6:247-255. Blaustein, A.R. 1981. Population fluctuations and extinctions of small rodents in coastal southern California. Oecologia 48:71-78. |Mammal Populations Coastal Insular Blaylock, B.G. 1972. The Effect of Radiation-Induced Mutations on the Fitness of Drosophila Populations. Genetics 72:469-474. Bliss, J. C., T. M. Bonnicksen, and T. H. Mace. 1980. Computer- aided classification of forest cover types from small scale aerial photography. Envi. Manage. 4(6):499-510. | forest cover types -- small scale aerial photography | vegetation reconstruction -- computer-aided classification | computer- aided mapping Blois, C. and A. Cloarec. 1983. Density-dependent prey selection in the water stick insect, Ranatra linearis (Heteropter). J. Animal Ecology 52:849-866. Blouin, M.S. and E.F. Connor. 1985. Is there a best shape for Nature Preserves? Biological Conservation 32:277-288. Blumberg, L. 1982. Microhabitat Selection of Peromyscus Leucopus Noveboracensis (The White-Footed Mouse) in an Isolated Oak- Hickory Woodlot. Master of Science Thesis. Bowling Green State University. pp.42. Blumberg, L. 1982. Microhabitat selection of Peromyscus leucopus noveboracensis (the white-footed mouse) in an isolated oak- hickory woodlot. M. S. thesis, Bowling Green State University. Boag, P. T. and P. R. Grant. 1984. Darwins finches ( Geospiza ) on Isla Daphne Major, Galapagos: Breeding and feeding ecology in a climatically variable environment. Ecological Monographs 54(4):463-489. Boag, P.T. and P.R. Grant. 1984. Darwin's finches (Geospiza) on isla daphne major, Galapagos: breeding and feeding ecology in a climatically variable environment. Ecological Monographs 54(4):463-489. |community assembly Boake, C. R. B. 1985. Genetic consequences of mate choice: a quantitative genetic method for testing sexual selection theory. Science 227:1061-1063. Boaz, N. T. 1979. Early hominid population densities: new estimates. Science 206:592-595. Boaz, N.T. 1979. Early Hominoid Population Densitites: New Estimates. Science 206:592-595. Bock, C.E. and R.E. Ricklefs. 1983. Range size and local abundance of some North American songbirds: a positive correlation. Am. Nat. 122:295-299. Boecklen, W. J. and D. Simberloff. 1986. Area-based extinction models in conservation. in Dynamics of Extinction. Ed. Dr. D. K. Elliott. John Wiley & Sons, Inc. pp. 247-276. Boecklen, W.J. and N.J. Gotelli. 1984. Island biogeographic theory and conservation practice: species-area or specious- area relationships? Biological Conservation 29:63-80. |conservation Boecklen, W.J. and P.W. Price. Size and Shape of Sawfly Assemblages on Arroyo Willow. Boer, A.H. 1988. Mortality rates of moose in New Brunswick: a life table analysis. J. Wildl. Mgmt. 52(1):21-25. Bole, B.P. 1939. The quadrat method of studying small mammal populations. Scientific publications of the Cleveland Museum of Natural History, Vol. V, No. 4, pp. 15-77. Bongaarts, J. 1980. Does Malnutrition Affect Fecundity? A Summary of the Evidence. Science 208 :564-569. Bongaarts, J. 1980. Does malnutrition affect fecundity? A summary of evidence. Science 208:564-569. Bonnicksen, T. M. and E. C. Stone. 1982. Reconstruction of presettlement giant sequoia-mixed conifer forest community using the aggregation approach. Ecol. 63(4):134-1148. | aggregations -- fire management -- forest ecology | forest succession -- presettlement forest community | vegetation mosaic -- vegetation reconstruction Bonnicksen, T.M. and E.C. Stone. 1982. Managing vegetation within U.S. National Parks: A policy analysis. Environ. Mgmt. 6(2):109-122. Boonstra, R. 1977. Predation on Microtus townsendii populations: impact and vulnerability. Can. J. Zool. 55(10):1631-1643. Boonstra, R. and C.J. Krebs. 1976. The effect of odour on trap response in Microtus townsendii. J. Zool. Lond. 180:467-476. Boonstra, R. and F.H. Rodd. 1983. Regulation of breeding intensity in Microtus pennsylvanicus. J. Animal Ecology 52:757-780. Borlaug, N. E. 1972. Mankind and civilization at another crossroad : in balance with nature - a biological myth. BioSci. 22(1):41-44. Bormann, F.H. Unlimited Growth: Growing, Growing, Gone? BioScience 22(12):706-710. Botkin, D.B. and R.S. Miller. 1974. Mortality Rates and Survival of Birds. The American Naturalist 108(960):181-192. Boughey, A.S. Organizing into communities. Bova Notes. Occasional Notes BIOTA of Virginia. Bowden, W. B. and F. H. Bormann. 1986. Transport and loss of nitrous oxide in soil water after forest clear-cutting. Science 233:867-869. Bowers, M. A. and J. H. Brown. 1982. Body size and coexistence in desert rodents: chance or community structure? Ecol. 63(2):391-400. Bowers, M.A. 1982. Foraging behavior of heteromyid rodents field evidence of resource partitioning. J. of Mamm. 63(3):361-367. Bowers, M.A. 1982. Insular biogeography of mammals in the Great Salt Lake. Great Basin Naturalist 42(4):589-596. Bowers, M.A. 1985. Bumble bee colonization, extinction and reproduction in subalpine meadows in northeastern Utah. Ecology 66(3):914-927. Bowers, M.A. 1985. Experimental analyses of competition between two species of bumble bees (Hymenoptera: apidae). Oecologia 67:224-230. Bowers, M.A. 1985. Plant-form gradients on Sonoran Desert bajadas. Oikos 46:284-291. Bowers, M.A. 1986. Density dynamics of bumblebees in subalpine meadows: competition and resource limitation. Holarctic Ecology 9:175-184. Bowers, M.A. 1986. Geographic comparison of microhabitats used by three heteromyids in response to rarefaction. J. Mamm. 67(1):46-52. Bowers, M.A. 1987. Precipitation and the relative abundances of desert winter annuals: a 6-year study in the northern Mohave Desert. J. of Arid Environments 12:141-149. Bowers, M.A. 1987. Use of early goldenrod (Solidago) patches by a stem-boring dipteran. The American Midland Naturalist 118(1):139-144. Bowers, M.A. and J.H. Brown. 1982. Body Size and Coexistence in desert rodents: Chance or community structure? Ecology 63(2):391-400. Bowers, M.A., D.B. Thompson, and J.H. Brown. Spatial organization of a desert rodent community: food addition and species removal Oecologia 72:77-82. Bowler, P. J. 1982. Darwin's thinking reexamined. Science 215:1385. Bowler, P.J. 1982. Darwin's Thinking Re-examined. Science 215 :1385. Boyd, C.E. and C. P. Goodyear. 1971. Nutritive quality of food in ecological systems. Arch. Hydrobiol. 69(2):256-270. Brace C.L. 1968. Ridiculed, Rejected, But still our Ancestor. Natural History 77(5):38-45. Bradley, W. G. 1967. Home range, activity patterns, and ecology of the antelope ground squirrel in southern Nevada. S.W. Nat. 12(3):231-252. Bradley, W.G. 1967. Home Range, Activity Patterns and Ecology of the Antelope Ground Squirrel in Southern Nevada. The Southwestern Naturalist 12(3):231-252. Bradley, W.G. 1968. Homing in the Antelope and Round-Tailed Ground Squirrels. Journal of the Arizona Academy of Sciences 5(1):22-26. Braidwood, R.J. and C.A. Reed. The achievement and early consequences of food production: A consideration of the archaeological and natural-historical evidence. Cold Springs Harbor Symposia on Quantitative Biology 22:19-31 Bramlette, M.N. 1965. Massive extinctions in biota at the end of mesozoic time. Science 148:1696-1699. Brand, C.J., L.B. Keith, and C.A. Fischer. 1976. Lynx responses to changing snowshoe hare densities in Central Alberta. J. Wildl. Manage. 40(3):416-428. Branham, J.M. 1973. The Crown of Thorns on Coral Reefs. BioScience 23:219-226. Branscomb, L. M. 1986. Science in 2006. Am. Sci. 74:650-658. Branscomb, L.M. 1986. Science in 2006. American Scientist 74 :650- 658. Braun, J.K. 1988. Systematics and biogeography of the southern flying squirrel, Glaucomys volans. J. Mamm. 69(2):422-426. Braun, J.K. and M.L. Kennedy. 1983. Systematics of the genus Blarina in Tennessee and adjacent areas. J. Mamm. 64(3):414- 425. Brenchley, G. A. 1978. Community matrix models: inconsistent results using Vandermeer's data. Am. Nat. 1978:456-459. Brenchley, G. A. 1981. A reply to Thomas and Pomerantz with a note on diffuse competition. Am. Nat. 117:386-389. Brenchley, G.A. 1979. Community matrix models: inconsistent results using vandermeer's data. Am. Nat. 113:456-459. Brennan, L.A., W.M. Block, and R.J. Gutierrez. The use of multivariate statistics for developing habitat suitability index models. Chapter 27. Bridgewater, D.D. 1966. Laboratory Breeding, Early Growth Development and Behavior of Citellus Tridecemlineatus (Rodentia). The Southwestern Naturalist 11(3):325-337. Brisben, I.L. and M.S. Lenarz. 1984. Morphological comparisons of insular and mainland populations of southeastern white-tailed deer. J. Mamm. 65(1):44-50. Brisbin, I. Jr. 1979. The Principles of Ecology as a Frame of Reference for Ethical Challenges: Towards the Development of an Ecological Theology. Georgia Journal of Science 37:21-34. Brisbin, I. L., Jr. 1979. The principles of ecology as a frame of reference for ethical challenges: towards the developement of an ecological theology. Georgia J. Sci. 37:21-34. Broad, W. J. 1981. Creationists limit scope of evolution case. Science 211:1331-1332. | creationism Broad, W. J. 1981. Louisiana puts God into biology lessons. Science 213:628-629. | creationism Brodhead, J. M. and P. J. Godfrey. 1977. Off road vehicle impact in Cape Cod National Seashore: Disruption and recovery of dune vegetation. Int. J. Biometeor. 21(3):299-306. Bromenshenk, J. J., S. R. Carlson, J. C. Simpson and J. M. Thomas. 1985. Pollution monitering of Puget Sound with honey bees. Sci. 227:632-634. Bromenshenk, J.J., S.R. Carlson, J.C. Simpson, and J.M. Thomas. 1985. Science 227 :632-634. Bronowski, J. 1973. Late pleistocene extinctions. (Response to J. W. Corbett) Science 180:905-906. (Filed with J. W. Corbett) Bronson, F.H. 1963. Density, subordination and social timidity in Peromyscus and C57BL/10J Mice. Animal Behavior 11(4):475-479. Bronson, F.H. 1963. Some Correlates of Interaction Rate in Natural Populations of Woodchucks. Ecology 44(4):637-643. Brown, B. W. and G. O. Batzli. 1984. Field manipulations of fox and gray squirrel populations: how important is interspecific competition? Can. J. Zool. 63:2134-2140. Brown, J. C. 1979. Genetic improvement and nutrient uptake in plants. BioSci. 29(5):289-292. Brown, J. H. 1983. Interactions among species. Science 220:1043. Brown, J. H. 1986. Two decades of interaction between the MacArthur-Wilson model and the complexities of mammalian distribution. Biol. J. Linnean Soc. 28:231-251. | colonization -- conservation -- continental biogeography | equilibrium biogeography -- extinction -- island biogeography | mammals -- natural reserves -- speciation Brown, J. H. and A. Kiodric-Brown. 1981. Reply to Williamson and Black's comment. Ecol. 62(2):497-498. Brown, J. H. and D. W. Davidson. 1977. Competition between seed- eating rodents and ants in desert ecosystems. Science 196:880-882. Brown, J. H. and D. W. Davidson. 1977. Competition between seed- eating rodents and ants in desert ecosystems. Sci. 196:880- 882. Brown, J. H., J. J. Grover, D. W. Davidson and G. A. Lieberman. 1975. A preliminary study of seed predation in desert and mountain habitats. Ecol. 56:987-992. Brown, J.C. 1979. Genetic improvement and nutrient uptake in plants. BioScience 29(5):289-292. Brown, J.H. 1971. Mammals on mountaintops: nonequilibrium insular biogeography. The Amer. Nat. 105(945):467-478. |equilibrium model Brown, J.H. 1973. Species Diversity of seed-eating desert rodents in sand dune habitats. Ecology 54(4):775-787. Brown, J.H. 1978. The theory of insular biogeography and the distribution of boreal birds and mammals. Intermountain biogeography: a symposium. Great Basin Naturalist Memoirs. |equilibrium model Brown, J.H. Competition for resources. |competition |dabate |evidence |reviews Brown, J.H. and A. Kodric-Brown. 1977. Turnover rates in insular biogeography: effect of immigration on extinction. Ecology 58:445-449. |island experiments |non-mammals Brown, J.H. and A. Kodric-Brown. 1979. Convergence, Competition, and Mimicry on a Temperate Community of Hummingbird- Pollinated Flowers. Ecology 60(5):1022-1035. Brown, J.H. and A. Kodric-Brown. 1981. Reply to Williamson and Black's Comment. Ecology 62 (2):497-498. Brown, J.H. and D.D. Davidson. 1977. Competition Between Seed- Eating Rodents and Ants in Desert Ecosystems. Science 196 :880-882. Brown, J.H. and D.W. Davidson. 1977. Competition between seed- eating rodents and ants in desert ecosystems. Science 196:880-882.Brown, J.H. and J.C. Munger. 1985. Experimental manipulation of a desert rodent community: Food addition and species removal. Ecology 66(5):1545-1563. Brown, J.H. and G.A. Lieberman. 1972. Woodrats and Cholla: Dependence of a Small Mammal Population on the Density of Cacti. Ecology 53(2):310-313. Brown, J.H. and G.A.. Lieberman. 1973. Resource Utilization and coexistence of seed-eating desert rodents in sand dune habitats. Ecology 54(4):788-797. Brown, J.H. and J.C. Munger. 1985. Experimental manipulations of a desert rodent community: food addition and species removal. Ecology 66(5):1545-1563. Brown, J.H. and M.A. Bowers. 1985. Community organization in hummingbirds: relationships between morphology and ecology. The Auk 102:251-269. Brown, J.H. and M.A. Bowers. Patterns and Processes in Three Guilds of Terrestrial Vertebrates. Guilds of Terrestrial Vertebrates. Chapter 16. pp. 283-296. Brown, J.H., A.K. Brown, T.G. Whitham and H.W. Bond. 1981. Competition between hummingbirds and insects for the nectar of two species of shrubs. The Southwestern Naturalist 26(2):133-145. |community assembly Brown, J.H., J.J. Grover and D.W. Davidson. 1975. A Preliminary Study of Seed Predation in Desert and Montane Habitats. Ecology 56 :987-992. Brown, J.H., O.J. Reichman and D.D. Davidson. 1979. An Experimental Study of Competition Between Seed-Eating Desert Rodents and Ants. American Zoology 19 :1129-1143. Brown, J.L. 1964. The Evolution of Diversity in Avian Territorial Systems. The Wilson Bulletin 76(2):161-169. Brown, J.L. The buffer effect and productivity in tit populations. The American Naturalist 103(932):347-354. Brown, K.M. 1983. Do life history tactics exist at the intraspecific level? Data from freshwater snails. Am. Nat. 121:871-879. Brown, L.N. 1964. Dynamics in an Ecologically isolated population of the Brush Mouse. Journal of Mammalogy 45(3):436-442. Brown, L.N. and C.H. Conaway. 1961. Dye Excretion as a Method for Determination of Small Mammal Home Ranges. The American Midland Naturalist 66(1):128-137. Brown, M.J. 1985. Forest statistics for the Southern Piedmont of Virginia, 1985. USDAFS SE-81. Brown, M.J. 1986. Forest statistics for the Northern Mountains of Virginia, 1986. USDAFS SE-85. Brown, M.J. 1986. Forest statistics for the Northern Piedmont of Virginia, 1986. USDAFS SE-84. Brown, M.J. 1986. Forest statistics for the Southern Mountains of Virginia, 1986. USDAFS Resource Bulletin SE-86. Brown, S. 1984. Biomass of tropical forests: a new estimate based on forest volumes. Science223:1290-1293. Brown, V. K. and T. R. E. Southwood. 1983. Trophic diversity, niche bredth and generation times of exopterygote insects in a secondary succession. Oecologia 1983, 221-225. Browne, R.A. 1981. Lakes as islands: biogeographic distribution, turnover rates, and species composition in the lakes of central New York. J. of Biogeography 8:75-83. |equilibrium theory |density compensation Bruce, R.C. 1982. Size displacement in salamanders: a criticism of the concept of a developmental constant. Am. Nat. 119:872- 874. Brusven, M.A. and G.B. Mulkern. 1960. The Use of Epidermal Characteristics for the Identification of Plants Recovered in Fragmentary Condition from the Crops of Grasshoppers. North Dakota Research, Report No. 3. Bryant, M.D. 1945. Phylogeny of Nearctic Sciuridae. The American Midland Naturalist 33(2):257-387. Bryant, V.M. and R.K. Holz. 1965. A Guide to the Drafting of Archaeological Maps. Bulletin of the Texas Archaeological Society 36:269-285. Bryson, R.A. 1974. A Perspective on Climatic Change. Science 184(4138):753-760. Buechner, H.K., F.C. Craighead, Jr., J.J. Craighead, and C.E. Cote. 1971. Satellites for Research on Free-Roaming Animals. BioScience 21(24):1201-1212. Buffington, J.D. 1971. Predation, competition, and Pleistocene megafauna extinction. BioScience 21:167-170. Bullock, D. and K. W. Fischer. 1986. The equilibrium of cognitive structures. (Book review) Am. Sci. 74:660. Bullock, D. and K.W. Fischer. 1986. The Equilibration of Cognitive Structures. American Scientist 74 :660. Bullough, V. L. 1981. Age at menarche: a misunderstanding. Science 213:365-366. Bulmer, M.G. A statistical analysis of the 10-year cycle in Canada. Bumpass, L. and C.F. Westoff. 1970. The "Perfect Contraceptive" Population. Science 169:1177-1182. Burdon, J.J. and D.R. Marshall. 1981. Biological control and the reproductive mode of weeds. J. Applied Ecology 18:649-658. Burge, J.R. and C.D. Jorgensen. 1973. Home range of small mammals: A reliable estimate. Journal of Mammalogy 54(2):483- 488. Burger, J. 1981. Super territories: a comment. Am. Nat. 118:578- 580. Burgess, R.L. 1977. The ecological society of America historical data and some preliminary analyses. History of American Ecology. Burk, C.J. 1973. The Kaibab deer incident: a long persisting myth. BioScience 23(2):113-114. Burt, W. H. 1943. Territoriality and home range concepts as applied to mammals. J. Mamm. 24(3):346-352. Bush, G.L., R.W. Neck and G.B. Kitto. 1976. Screwworm Eradication: Inadvertent Selection for Noncompetitive Ecotypes During Mass Rearing. Science 193:491-494. Bushland, R.C. 1974. Screwworm Eradication Program. Science 184:1010-1011. Butler, L. 1953. The nature of cycles in populations of Canadian mammals. Can. J. Zool. 31:242-262. Byers, R.E. 1976. New Compound (RH 787) for Use in Control of Orchard Voles. The Journal of Wildlife Management 40(1):169- 171. Byers, R.E. 1976. Review of Pine Vole Control Methods. Virginia Fruit Proceedings, 8th Annual Meeting of Virginia State Horticultural Society 64(3):20-32. Byers, R.E. and R.S Young. 1975. Pine Vole Control with Anticoagulant Baits. Journal of the American Society for Horticultural Science 100(6):691-694. Byers, R.E. and R.S. Young. 1974. Cultural Management of Pine Voles in Apple Orchards. HortScience 9(5):445-446. Byers, R.E., R.S. Young, and R.D. Neely. 1976. Review of Cultural and Other Control Methods for Reducing Pine Vole Populations in Apple Orchards. 7th Vert. Pest Control Conference, Monterey, CA, March 9-11. Byrne, R. Field brief on Eastern Shore barrier island trip. 1972. C.M. Tate, J.F. Pagels and C.O. Handley. 1980. Distribution and Systematic Relationship of Two Kinds of Short-Tailed Shrews (Soricidae: Blarina) in South-Central Virginia. Proc Biol. Soc. Wash. 93(1):50-60. Caldwell, L.D. An investigation of competition in natural populations of mice. J. of Mamm 45(1):12-30. Caldwell, L.D. and J.B. Gentry. 1965. Interactions of Peromyscus and Mus in a one-acre field enclosure. Ecology 46(1 & 2):189- 987. Caldwell, R. L. 1972. A comparison of the migratory strategies of two milkweed bugs, Oncopeltus fasciatus and Lygaeus kalmii . in Experimental analysis of insect behaviour. Ed. L. Barton- Browne. pp. 304-316. Calhoun, J. B. 1952. The social aspects of population dynamics. J. Mamm. 33(2):139-159. Callahan, J.T. 1984. Long-Term Ecological Research. BioScience 34(6):363-367. |UVA publications Calvert, W.H., L.E. Hedrick, and L.P. Brower. 1979. Mortality of the monarch butterfly (Danaus plexippus L.): Avian predation at five overwintering sites in Mexico. Science 204:847-851. Cameron, A.W. 1964. Competitive exclusion between the rodent genera Microtus and Clethrionomys. Evolution 18:630-634. Cameron, G.N. 1977. Experimental species removal: demographic responses by Sigmodon hispidus and Reithrodontomys fulvescens. J. of Mamm. 58(4):488-506. Cameron, G.N. and S.R. Spencer. 1983. Field growth rates and dynamics of body mass for rodents on the Texas coastal prairie. J. Mamm 64(4):656-665. Cameron, G.N. and W. B. Kincaid. 1982. Species removal effects on movements of Sigmodon hispidus and Reithrodontomys fulvescens. The American Midland Naturalist 108(1):61-67. Cameron, G.N., W.B. Kincaid, and B.A. Carnes. 1979. Experimental species removal: Temporal activity patterns of Sigmodon hispidus and Reithrodontomys fulvescens. J. of Mamm. 60(1):195-197. Canfield, R.H. Application of the line interception method in sampling range vegetation. Journal of Forestry. Capen, D.E. 1981. The Use of Multivariate Statistics in Studies of Wildlife Habitats. USDAFS General technical report RM-87. Carey, A. B. 1982. The ecology of red foxes, gray foxes, and rabies in the eastern United States. Wildl. Soc. Bull. 10:18- 26. Carey, A. B. Multi-soecies rabies in the eastern U. S. A. Ch. 2 in Mathematical aspects of rabies epizootica. Ed. P. J. Bacon. Academic Press Inc., London, Limited. Carey, A. B. and R. G. McLean. 1978. Rabies antibody prevelance and virus tissue tropism in wild carnivores in Virginia. J. Wildl. Diseaeses 14:487-491. Carey, A. B., R. H. Giles, Jr and R. G. McLean. 1978. The landscape epidemiology of rabies in Virginia. Am. J. Tropical Medicine and Hygiene 27(3):573-580. Carey, A.B. Multi-Species Rabies in the Eastern USA. Chapter 2, Mathematical Aspects of Rabies Epizootics. Carey, A.B. and R.G. McLean. 1983. The ecology of rabies: Evidence of co-adaptation. Journal of Applied Ecology 20:777- 800. Carey, A.B. and R.G. McLean. 1983. The ecology of rabies: evidence of co-adaptation. J. Applied Ecology 20:777-800. Carleton, M.D. 1984. Introduction to Rodents. Orders and Families of Recent Mammals of the World. John Wiley and Sons. Carleton, M.D. and G.G. Musser. 1984. Muroid Rodents. Orders and Families of Recent Mammals of the World. John Wiley and Sons. Carlson, A. 1983. Maximizing energy delivery to dependent young: A field experiment with red-backed shrikes. Journal of Animal Ecology 52:697-704. Carpenter, C.R. Territorality: A Review of Concepts and Problems. Chapter 11, pp 224-250. Carpenter, J. and D. Deloria. 1984. Statistical software for Microcomputers. Byte, April. Carpenter, S.R. and J.F. Kitchell. 1984. Plankton community structure and limnetic primary production. Am. Nat. 124(2):159-172. Carson, H. L. 1972. Evolutionary biology: its value to society. BioSci. 22(6):349-352. Carson, H.L. 1970. Chromosome Tracers of the Origin of Species. Science 168:1414-1418. Carson, H.L. 1976. Genetic differences between newly formed species. BioScience 26(11):700-702. Carter, J.L. and J.F. Merritt. 1981. Evaluation of swimming ability as a means of island invasion by small mammals in coastal Virginia. Annals of Carnegie Museum 50(2):31-46. |Mammal Populations Coastal Insular Carter, L. 1974. Eradicating the Boll Weevil: Would it be a No- Win War? Science 183:494-500. Carter, L. J. 1980. Organic farming becomes "legitimate." Science 209:254-256. Carvell, K.L. and E.H. Tyron. The effect of environmental factors on the abundance of oak regeneration beneath mature oak stands. Forest Science7(2):98-105. Case, T. and M. Cody. Synthesis: Pattern and processes in island biogeography. Chapter 12. |equilibrium model Case, T.J. 1975. Species numbers, density compensations, and colonizing ability of lizards on islands in the gulf of California. Ecology 56:3-18. |equilibrium theory |density compensation Case, T.J. 1981. Niche separation and resource scaling. The American Naturalist. 118:554-560. Case, T.J. 1983. Niche overlap and the assembly of island lizard communities. Oikos 41:427-433. |assembly rules Case, T.J. 1983. Niche overlay and the assembly of island lizard communities. Oikos 41:427-433. |community assembly Case, T.J. and M.E. Gilpin. 1974. Interference competition and niche theory. Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. 71(8):3073-3077. |community assembly Case, T.J. and R. Sidell. 1983. Pattern and chance in the structure of model and natural communities. Evolution 37(4);832-849. |assembly rules Case, T.J., M.E. Gilpin and J.M. Diamond. 1979. Overexploitation, interference competition and excess density compensation in insular faunas. The American Naturalist 113(6):843-854. |community assembly Caswell, H. 1982. Life history theory and the equilibrium status of the populations. Am. Nat. 120:317-339. Caswell, H. 1982. Optimal life histories and the age-specific costs of reproduction. J. theoret. Biol. 98:519-529. Caswell, H. The Validation Problem. Chapter 12. Cates, R.G. 1975. The interface between slugs and wild ginger: some evolutionary aspects. Ecology 56:391-400. Caughley, G. 1967. Calculation of population mortality rate and life expectancy for thar and kangaroos from the ratio of juveniles to adults. New Zealand Journal of Science 10(2):578-584. Caughley, G. 1970. Eruption of ungulate populations, with emphasis on Himalayan tat in New Zealand. Ecology 51(1):53- 72. Caughley, G. 1970. Fat reserves of Himalayan thar in New Zealand by season, sex, area and age. New Zealand Journal of Science 13(2):209-219. Caughley, G. 1970. Liberation, Dispersal and Distribution of Himalayan Thar in New Zealand. New Zealand Forest Service Reprint No. 405. New Zealand Journal of Science Caughley, G. 1970. Population statistics of Chamois. Mammalia 34(2):194-199. Caughley, G. 1971. Demography, Fat reserves and body size of a population of red deer in New Zealand. Mammalia 35(3):369- 383. Caughley, G. 1971. Rate of Increase. J. Wildlife Management 35(4):658-663. Caughley, G. 1971. The season of births for northern-hemisphere ungulates in New Zealand. Mammalia 35(2):204-219. Caughley, G. and J. Goddard. 1972. Improving the estimates from inaccurate guesses. Journal of Wildlife Management 36(1):135- 140. Caughly, G. and C.J. Krebs. 1983. Are big animals simply little animals writ large? Oecologia 59:7-17. Cavalli-Sforza, L.L. 1969. Genetic Drift in an Italian Population. Scientific American 221(2):30-38. Cerri, R. D. and D. F. Fraser. 1983. Predation and risk in foraging minnows: balancing conflicting demands. Am. Nat. 121(4):552-561. Chagnon, N.A. 1967. Yanomamo - The Fierce People. Natural History 76(1):22-31. Chagnon, N.A. 1967. Yanomamo - The Fierce People. Natural History 77(4):34-41. Chamberlin, T.C. 1965. The method of multiple working hypotheses. Science 148:754-760. Chambers, J.C. 1983. Measuring species diversity on revegetated surface mines: an evaluation of technique. USDAFS INT-322. Chambers, J.C. and R.W. Brown. 1983. Methods for vegetation sampling and analysis on revegetated mined lands. USDAFS INT- 151. Chapin, F.S. 1980. The mineral nutrition of wild plants. Ann. Rev. Ecol. Syst. 11:233-60. Chapman, J.A., K.R. Dixon, W. Lopez-Forment and D.E. Wilson. 1983. The New World jackrabbit and hares (genus Lepus.) - 1. Taxonomic history and population status. Acta Zool. Fennica 174:49-51. Chappell, M.A. 1978. Behavioral factors in the altitudinal zonation of chipmunks. Ecology 59(3):565-579. Charlson, R.J. and B.R. Kowalski. 1985. Acid rain: statistical analysis of ionic correlations questioned. Science 228:1552- 1553. Charnov, E., B.D. Frazer, N. Gilbert and D. Raworth. Fishing for Aphids: The Exploitation of a Natural Population. J. Applied Ecology 13:379-389. Chesapeake Bay Agreement. 1987. Chesson, P.L. Environmental variation and the coexistence of species. Chapter 14. Chesson, P.L. and R.R. Warner. 1981. Environmental variability promotes coexistence in lottery competitive systems. The American Naturalist 117(6):923-943. |community assembly Chesson, P.L. and T.J. Case. Overview: Nonequilibrium community theories: chance, variability, history and coexistence. Chapter 13. Chew, V. 1976. Comparing treatment means: a compendium. HortSci. 11(4):348-357. Chew, V. 1976. Comparing treatment means: a compendium. HortSci. 11(4):348-357. Chiariello, N., J. C. Hickman and H. A. Mooney. 1982. Endomycorrhiza role for interspecific transfer of Phosphorus in a community of annual plants. Science 217:941-943. Chisholm, B.S., D.E. Nelson and H.P. Schwarcz. 1982. Stable- carbon isotope ratios as a measure of marine versus terrestrial protein in ancient diets. Science 216:1131-1132. Chitty, D. 1954. Tuberculosis among wild voles: with a discussion of other pathological conditions among certain mammals and birds. Ecology 35(2):227-237. Chitty, D. 1960. Population processes in the vole and their relevence to general theory. Can. J. Zool. 38:99-113. Chitty, D. 1977. Natural selection and the regulation of density in cyclic and non-cyclic populations. Chapter 4, Evolutionary Ecology. Christensen, N. L. 1977. Changes in structure, pattern and diversity associated with climax forest maturation in Piedmont, North Carolina. Am. Mid. Nat. 97(1):176-188. Christensen, N.L. 1977. Changes in structure, pattern and diversity associated with climax forest maturation in piedmont, NC. The American Midland Naturalist. Christian, J.J. and D.E. Davis. Endocrins, Behavior and population. Christian, R.R. 1984. A life-table approach to decomposition studies. Ecology 65(5):1693-1697. Cifelli, R.L. Chapter 9. South American Ungulate Evolution and Extinction. Clark, C.W. Mathematical BioEconomics: The Optimal Management of Renewable Resources. John Wiley & Sons, New York Clark, C.W. and M. Mangel. 1984. Foraging and flocking strategies: information in an uncertain environment. Am. Nat. 123:626-641. Clark, D. A. and S. Ware. 1980. Upland hardwood forests of Pittsylvania County, Virginia. VA J. Sci. 31(1 & 2):28-32. Clark, D. L., Wang Chang-Yuan, C. J. Orth and J. S. Gilmore. 1986. Conodont survival and low iridium abundances across the Permian-Triassic boundary in south China. Science 233:984- 986. Clark, F.H. 1936. The estrous cycle of the deer-mouse, Peromyscus maniculatus. Contributions from the laboratory of vertebrate genetics, University of Michigan, Number 1. |Species of interest Clark, J. W., Jr. 1976. Alvar nunez and the snail Rabdotus in Texas. The Nautilus 90(1):13-14. Clark, J.W. 1969. Implications of land and fresh-water gastropods in archaeological sites. Arkansas Academy of Science Proceedings, Vol 23. Clark, J.W. 1976. The sugar industry at Mission San Jose Y San Miguel de Aguayo. Texas Archaeological Society. Clark, J.W. Rock Art of the Guadalupe Mountains National Park Area. Bulletin of the Texas Archeological Society. Vol 45. Clark, J.W., Jr. 1967. Three Pictograph sites in the Central Pecos Valley of Texas. The Texas Journal of Science 19(3):245-257. Clark, P. J. and F. C. Evans. 1954. Distance to nearest neighbor as a measure of spatial relationships in populations. Ecology 35(4):445-453. Clark, P. J. and F. C. Evans. 1955. On some aspects of spatial pattern in biological populations. Science 121(3142):397-398. Clark, T. W. 1982. Strategies in endangered species conservation: a research view of the ongoing black-footed ferret conservation program. Thorne Ecological Institute Technical Publication 145-155. | mustela nigripes -- black-footed ferret -- endangered species | recovery -- conservation Clark, T. W. 1986. Case studies in wildlife policy education. Renewable Resources J. Autumn 1986:11-17. Clark, T. W. 1986. Professional excellence in wildlife and natural resource organizations. Renewable Resources J. 4:8- 13. Clark, T. W. and R. Westrum. 1987. Paradigms and ferrets. Social Studies of Science. 17(1):3-33. Clark, T. W., J. Grensten, M. Gorges, R. Crete and J. Gill. 1987. Analysis of black-footed ferret translocation sites in Montana. Prarie Nat. 19(1):43-56. Clark, T. W., J. Grensten, M. Gorges, R. Crete and J. Gill. 1987. Analysis oftory biomass in Ponderosa Pine follwing Mountain Pine Beetle infestation. Forest Ecology and Management 13:53- 67. Clark, T.W.. 1987. Black-footed ferret recovery: a progress report. Conservation Biology 1(1):8-9. Clayton, John. John Clayton's Account of Virginia, vol 18, number 210. May, 1694. Clemens, W. A., J. D. Archibald, and L. J. Hickey. 1981. Out with a whimper not a bang. Paleobio. 7(3):293-298. Cloud, P. and M. F. Glaessner. 1982. The Ediacarian period and system: Metazoa inherit the Earth. Science 217(4562):783-792. Coale, A.J. 1957. How the age distribution of a human population is determined. Cold Springs Harbor Symposia on Quantitative Biology, Vol. 23. Cockburn, A., M.P. Scott, and C.R. Dickman. 1985. Sex ratio and intrasexual kin competition in mammals. Oecologia 66:427-429. Cody, M. L. 1981. Habitat selection in birds: the roles of vegetation structure, competitors, and productivity. BioSci. 31(2):107-113. Cody, M.L. 1968. On the Methods of Resource Division in Grassland Bird Communities. The American Naturalist. 102:107-147. Cody, M.L. 1974. Optimization in Ecology. Science 183:1156-1164. Cody, M.L. 1981. Habitat selection in birds: the roles of vegetation structure, competitors and productivity. BioScience 31(2):107-114. |scientific method Cody, M.L. Parallel and Convergent evolution, and bird diversity in mediterranean habitats. Cohen, J.E. 1985. Can fitness be aggregated? Am. Nat. 125(5):716- 729. Cole, B.J. 1981. Colonizing abilities, island size, and the number of species on archipelagoes. The American Naturalist 117(5):629-638. Cole, B.J. 1983. Assembly of mangrove ant communities: patterns of geographical distribution. J. Anim. Ecol. 52:339-347. |community assembly Cole, K. 1985. Past Rates of Change, Species Richness, and a Model of Vegetational Inertia in the Grand Canyon, Arizona. American Naturalist 125 :289-303. Cole, L. 1954. The population consequences of life history phenomena. The Quarterly Review of Biology 29(2):104-137. Cole, L.C. 1957. Sketches of general and comparative demography. Cold Springs Harbor Symp. Quant. Biol. 22:1-15. Cole, W. E., G. D. Amman and C. E. Jensen. 1985. Mountain pine beetle dynamics in lodgepole pine forests part III: sampling and modeling of mountain pine beetle populations. U. S. Dept Agri. For. Serv. Gen. Tech. Rep. INT-188. Cole, W.E., G.D. Amman, C.E. Jensen. 1985. Mountain pine beetle dynamics in lodgepole pine forests Pt. III: Sampling and modeling of mountain pine beetle populations. US Dept. of Agriculture Report INT-188. Coleman, B.D., M.A. Mares, M.R. Willig, and Y.H. Hsieh. 1982. Randomness, Area and species richness. Ecology 63(4):1121- 1133. |equilibrium theory |density compensation Collins, V.R. and M.H. Smith. 1976. Field Determination of Energy Flow in a Small Nocturnal Mammal. J. of Mammalogy 57(1):149- 158. Colwell, R. K. 1973. Competition and coexistence in a simple tropical community. Am. Nat. 107(958):737-759. Colwell, R. K. 1973. Competition and coexistence in a simple tropical community. Am. Nat. 1985. Effects of treatment and seed source on germination of eastern redcedar seed. USDA Forest Service Research Paper RM-263. Colwell, R.K. 1975. Experimental Studies of the Niche. Congdon, J. D., J. L. Greene and W. Gibbons. 1986. Biomass of freshwater turtles: a geographic comparison. The American Midland Naturalist 115(1):165-173. Congdon, J. D., J. W. Gibbons and J. L. Greene. 1983. Parental investment in the chicken turtle ( Deirochelys reticularia ). Ecol. 64(3):419-425. | Body size -- Deirochelys -- egg size - - incubation | life history -- lipids -- parental investment+ | South Carolina -- turtle Conley, W. and J.D. Nichols. The use of models in small mammal population studies. Pymatuning Laboratory of Ecology, Special Publication No. 5 - Small Mammal Populations. Connel J. H. and W. P. Sousa. 1983. On the evidence needed to judge ecological stability or persistence. Am. Nat. 121(6):789-824. Connel, J. H. Connel, J. H. 1975. Some mechanisms producing structure in natural communities: a model and evidence from field experiments. in Ecology and evolution of communities . Eds. M. Cody, J. M. Diamond. Belknap Press. pp. 460-484. Connel, J.H. 1983. On the prevalence and relative importance of interspecific competition: Evidence from field experiments. The American Naturalist 122(5):661-696. Connell, J.H. 1978. Diversity in tropical forests and coral reefs. Science 199:1302-1310. |equilibrium model Connell, J.H. 1980. Diversity and the coevolution of competitors, or the ghost of competition past. Oikos 35:131-138. |competition |dabate |evidence |reviews Connell, J.H. 1985. On testing models of competitive coevolution. Oikos 45(2):298-300. Connell, J.H. Some Mechanisms Producing Structure in Natural Communities: a Model and Evidence from Field Experiments. Connell, J.H. Some mechanisms producing structure in natural communities: a model and evidence from field experiments. Chapter 16. |competition |dabate |evidence |reviews Connell, J.H. Some mechanisms producing structure in natural communities: a model and evidence from field experiments. Chapter 16. Connell, J.H. and E. Orias. 1964. The Ecological regulation of species diversity. The American Naturalist 48:399-413. Connell, J.H. and E. Orias. 1964. The Ecological regulation of species diversity. The American Naturalist 48:399-413. Connell, J.H. and E. Orias. 1964. The ecological regulation of species diversity. Am. Nat. 98:399-414. Conner, R. N., R. G. Hooper, H. S. Crawford and H. S. Mosby. 1975. Woodpecker nesting habitat in cut and uncut woodlands in Virginia. J. Wildl. Manage. 39(1):144-150. Conner, R.N. 1975. Orientation of entrances to woodpecker nest cavities. The Auk 92(2):371-374. Conner, R.N. 1976. Nesting Habitat for Red-Haired Woodpeckers in Southwestern Virginia. Bird-Banding 47(1):40-43 Conner, R.N. and C.S. Adkisson. 1975. Effects of clearcutting on the diversity of breeding birds. J. of Forestry, December. Conner, R.N. and H.S. Crawford. 1971. Woodpecker foraging in Appalachian clearcuts. J. of Forestry, September. Connor, E. F. and D. Simerloff. 1986. Competition, scientific method, and null models in ecology. Am. Sci. 74:155-162. Connor, E.F. 1984. The causes of overwintering mortality of Phyllonorycter on Quercus robur. Ecological Entomology. 9:23- 28. Connor, E.F. and D. Simberloff 1983. Interspecific Competition and Species Co-occurrence patterns on islands: Null models and the evaluation of evidence. Connor, E.F. and D. Simberloff. 1979. The assembly of species communities: Chance or competition? Ecology 60(6):1132-1140. |assembly rules Connor, E.F. and D. Simberloff. 1979. The assembly of species communities: chance or competition. Ecology 60(6):1132-1140. |assembly rules Connor, E.F. and D. Simberloff. 1983. Interspecific competition and species co-occurence patterns on islands: null models and the evaluation of evidence. Oikos 41:455-465. |assembly rules Connor, E.F. and D. Simberloff. 1983. Interspecific competition and species co-occurrence patterns on islands: null models and the evaluation of evidence. Oikos 41:455-465. |community assembly Connor, E.F. and D. Simberloff. 1984. Competition, Scientific method and null models in ecology. Manuscript. Connor, E.F. and D. Simberloff. 1985. Competition, Scientific method and null models in ecology. Manuscript. |scientific method Connor, E.F. and D. Simberloff. 1986. Competition, Scientific Method and Null Models in Ecology. American Scientist 74:155- 162. Connor, E.F. and D. Simberloff. 1986. Competition, Scientific Method, and Null Models in Ecology. American Scientist 74:155-162. Connor, E.F. and M.A. Bowers. The spatial consequences of interspecific competition. Ann. Zool. Fennici 24:213-226. Connor, E.F., S.H. Faeth, and D. Simberloff. 1983. Leafminers on oak: the role of immigration and in situ reproductive recruitment. Ecology 64(1):191-204. |island experiments |non-mammals Conway, G.R., N. Glass, and J.C. Wilcox. 1970. Fitting nonlinear models to biological data by marquardt's algorithm. Ecology 51(3):503-507. Cook, D.B. A Useful Nestbox Design. Journal of Wildlife Management 2(2):185-188. Corbet, G.B. Origin of the british insular races of small mammals and of the "Lusitanian" fauna. Nature 191:1037-1040. Corbett, J. W. 1973. Late pliestocene extinctions. Science 180:905. Cornell, H. 1974. Parasitism and distributional gaps between allopatric species. Am. Nat. --:880-883. Costain, D.B. and B.J. Verts. 1982. Age determination and age- specific reproduction in Belding's ground squirrels. Northwest Science 56(3):230-235. Cottam, G. and J. T. Curtis. 1956. The use of distance measurements in phytosociological sampling. Ecol. 37(3):451- 460. Cottam, G. and J.T. Curtis. 1956. The Use of Distance Measures in Phytosociological Sampling. Ecology 37(3):451-460. Coulman, G.A., S.R. Reice, and R.L. Tummala. 1972. Population modeling: a systems approach. Science 175:518-521. Coulter, M. C. 1986. Assorted mating and sexual dimorphism in the common tern. Wilson Bull., 98(1):93-100. Cowgill, D.O. 1949. The theory of population growth cycles. The American Journal of Sociology 105:164-170. Cowles, T.J. and R.T. Barber. 1977 Biological consequences of the 1975 El Nino. Science 195:285-287. Cox, G.W. and R.E. Ricklefs. 1977. Species diversity and ecological release in Caribbean land bird faunas. Oikos 28:113-122. |equilibrium theory |density compensation Cox, P.A. 1981. Niche partitioning between sexes of dioecious plants. Am. Nat. 117:295-307. Craighead, J.J. and F.C. Craighead, Jr. 1971. Grizzly Bear - Man Relationships in Yellowstone National Park BioScience 21(16):845-864. Crawford, HS. and W.M. Harrison 1971. Wildlife food on three ozark hardwood sites after regeneration cutting. Journal of Wildlife Management 35(3):533-537. Crawford, M. 1985. The last days of the wild condor? Science 229:844-846. Crick, F.H. 1963. On the Genetic Code. Science 139(3554):461-464. Crick, F.H.C., L. Barnett, S. Brenner and R.J. Watts-Tobin. 1961. General nature of the genetic code for protiens. Nature 192(4809):1227-1232. Cronin, W.B. 1985. Islands of the Chesapeake. Chesapeake Bay Magazine, July. |Mammal Populations Coastal Insular Crook, J.H. The nature and function of Territorial Agression. Crouch, G. L. 1986. Effects of thinning pole-sized lodgepole pine on understory vegetation and large herbivore activity in central Colorado. U. S. Dept. Agri. For. Serv. Res. Pap. RM- 268. Crouch, G.L. Effects of thinning pole-sized lodgepole pine on understory vegetation and large herbivore activity in central Colorado. Research Paper RM-268. US Dept. of Agriculture. Crow, J.F. and M. Kimura. 1965. Evolution in sexual and asexual populations. The American Naturalist. 49(909):439-450. Crowder, L.B. and W.E. Cooper. 1982. Habitat structural complexity and the interaction between bluegills and their prey. Ecology 63(6):1802-1813. Crowell, K. L. 1986. A comparison of relict versus equilibrium models for insular mammals of the Gulf of Maine. Biol. J. Linnean Soc. 28:37-64. | biogegraphy -- equilibrium -- Gulf of Maine -- island | landbridge -- mammals -- relaxation -- relict -- turnover Crowell, K.L. 1962. Reduced interspecific competition among the birds of Bermuda. Ecology 43(1):75-88. |UVA publications Crowell, K.L. 1973. Experimental Zoogeography: Introductions of Mice to Small Islands. The American Naturalist 107(956):535- 558. |Mammal Populations Coastal Insular Crowell, K.L. 1973. Experimental zoogeography: introduction of mice to small islands. The American Naturalist 107(956):535- 558. |Mammal Populations Coastal Insular Crowell, K.L. 1983. Islands - insight or artifact? Population dynamics and habitat utilization in insular rodents. Oikos 41:442-454. |UVA publications Crowell, K.L. 1983. Islands - insight or artifact?: Population dynamics and habitat utilization in insular rodents. Oikos 41:442-454. |Mammal Populations Coastal Insular Crowell, K.L. 1986. A comparison of relict versus equilibrium models for insular mammals of the Gulf of Maine. Biological J. of the Linnean Society 28:37-64. |UVA publications Crowell, K.L. Islands - insight or artifact?: Population dynamics and habitat utilization in insular rodents. Oikos 41:442-454. |mammal experiments Crowell, Lomolino Crowell, K.L. and S.L. Pimm. 1976. Competition and niche shifts of mice introduced onto small islands. Oikos 27:251-258. |Mammal Populations Coastal Insular Crowell, K.L. and S.L. Pimm. 1976. Competition and niche shifts of mice introduced onto small islands. Oikos 27:251-258. |mammal experiments Crowell, Lomolino Crowly, P. H. 1981. Dispersal and the stability of predator-prey interactions. Am. Nat. 118(5):673-701. Croziat, L., G. Nelson and D. E. Rosen. 1974. Centers of origin and related concepts. Syst. Zool. 23(2):265-287. Culver, D.C. and A.J. Beattie. 1983. Effects of ant mounds on soil chemistry and vegetation patterns in a Colorado montane meadow. Ecology 64(3):485-492. Czaplewski, R. L. and P. W. Snook. 1985. Evaluating use of an ultrasound device to measure distances to foliar and woody targets. USDA Forest Service Research Note RM-461. | ultrasound measurements -- vegetation structure -- shrub cover Danielson, B.J. An Analysis of a Method for Comparing Residents and Colonists in a Natural Population of Microtus Ochrogaster. Danielson, B.J. and M.S. Gaines. 1986. The Influence of Conspecific and Heterospecific Residents on Colonization. manuscript submitted to Ecology. Danielson, B.J. and R.K. Swihart. 1987. Home range dynamics and activity patterns of Microtus ochrogaster and Synaptomys cooperi in syntopy. J. Mamm. 68(1):160-165. Dapson, R.W. 1979. Phenologic Influences on Cohort-Specific Reproductive Strategies in Mice (Peromyscus Polionotus). Ecology 60(6):1125-1131. Dapson, R.W. Age Structure of Six populations of old-filed mice, Peromyscus Polionotus. Darlington, P.J. 1938. The Origin of the Fauna of the Greater Antilles, With Discussion of Dispersal of Animals over Water and Through the Air. Quarterly Review of Biology 13:275-300. Daubenmire, R. 1966. Stratification of samples and attention to population structure reveal the existence of discontinuities. Sci. 151:291-298. Davenport, L.B. 1964. Structure of Two Peromyscus Polionotus Popluations in Old-Field Ecosystems at the AEC Savannah River Plant. Journal of Mammalogy 45(1):95-113. Davic, R.D. 1985. In search of the ghost of competition past. Oikos 45(2):296-298. Davidson, D.W. 1981. Competition for Dispersal in Ant-Dispersed Plants. Science 213 :1259-1261. Davidson, D.W. 1985. An experimental study of diffuse competition in harvester ants. Am. Nat. 125(4):500-506. Davidson, D.W. Some Consequences of Diffuse Competition in a Desert Ant Community. American Naturalist 116 :92-105. Davidson, W.D., J.H. Brown and R.S. Inouye. 1980. Competition and the Structure of Granivore Communities. BioScience 30 (4):233- 238. Davis, D.E. Manual for Analysis of Rodent Populations. 1956. Davis, M.B. Quaternary history and the stability of forest communities. Chapter 10. Davy, A.J. and G.F. Bishop. 1984. Response of Hieracium pilosella in breckland grass-heath to inorganic nutrients. J. Ecology 72:319-330. Day, M.H. 1977. The fossil history of man. Carolina Biology Readers. Day, P. R. 1977. Plant genetics: increasing crop yield. Science 197:1334-1339. Day, P.R. 1977. Plant genetics: Increasing Crop Yields. Science 197:1334-1340. Dayton, P.K. 1971. Competition, Disturbance, and Community Organization: The Provision and Subsequent Utilization of Space in a Rocky Intertidal Community. Ecological Monographs 41:351-389. Dayton, P.K. 1972. Toward an Understanding of Community Resilience and the Potential Effects of Enrichments to the Benthos at McMurdo Sound, Antarctica. Proceedings of the Colloquium on Conservation Problems in Antarctica. Dayton, P.K. 1975. Experimental Studies of Algal Canopy Interactions in a Sea Otter-Dominated Kelp Community at Amchitka Island, Alaska. Fishery Bulletin 73(2):230-237. Dayton, P.K. 1984. Catastrophic Storms, El Nino, and Patch Stability in a Southern California Kelp Community. Science 224:283-285. Dayton, P.K. 1984. Processes Structuring Some Marine Communities: Are They General? Ecological Communities: Conceptual issues and the evidence. Princeton University Press. Dayton, P.K. 1984. Processes structuring some marine communities: are they general? Chapter 12, in, Ecological Communities. Princeton University Press. Dayton, P.K. Experimental Evaluation of Ecological Dominance in a Rocky Intertidal Algal Community. Ecological Monographs 45(2):137-159. Dayton, P.K. and M.J. Tegner. 1984. The Importance of Scale in Community Ecology: A Kelp Forest Example with Terrestrial Analogs. A New Ecology; Novel Approaches to Interactive Systems. Dayton, P.K. and M.J. Tegner. 1984. The importance of scale in community ecology: a kelp forest example with terrestrial analogs. in, A New Ecology: Novel Approaches to Interactive Systems. John Wiley and Sons. Dayton, P.K. and Mia J. Tegner. 1977. Sea Urchin Recruitment Patterns and Implications of Commercial Fishing. Science 196:324-326. Dayton, P.K. and R.R Hessler. 1972. Role of biological disturbance in maintaining diversity in the deep sea. Deep- Sea Research 19:199-208. Dayton, P.K., G.A. Robilliard, R.T. Paine, and L.B. Dayton. Biological Accomodation in the Benthic Community at McMurdo Sound, Antarctica. Ecological Monographs 44(1):105-128. Dayton, P.K., R.J. Rosenthal, L.C. Mahen, and T. Antezana. 1977. Population Structure and Foraging Biology of the Predaceous Chilean Asteroid Meyenaster gelatinosus and the Escape Biology of its Prey. Marine Biology 39:361-370. Dayton, P.K., V. Currie, T Gerrodette, B.D. Keller, R. Rosenthal, and D. Van Tresca. 1984. Patch Dynamics and Stability of Some California Kelp Communities. Ecological Monographs 54(3):253- 289. Dayton, P.K., V. Currie, T. Gerrodette, B.D. Keller, R. Rosenthal, and D.V. Tresca. 1984. Patch dynamics and stability of some California kelp communities. Ecol. Monog. 54(3):253-289. De Angelis, D.L. 1976. Application of Stochastic Models to a Wildlife Population. Mathematical Biosciences 31:227-236. De Vita, J. 1982. The broken-stick model: a response to Pielou's critique and some general comments. Am. Nat. 119:576-578. DeBry, R. W. and N. A. Slade. 1985. Cladistic analysis of restriction endonuclease cleavage maps within a maximum liklihood framework. Syst. Zool. 34:21-34. DeLong, K.T. 1966. Population ecology of feral house mice: interference by Microtus. Ecology 47(3):481-484. DeNiro, M. J. and S. Epstein. 1981. Hydrogen isotope ratios of mouse tissues are influenced by a variety of factors other than diet. Science 214:1374-1375. DeVelice, R. L., J. A. Ludwig, W. H. Moir and F. Ronco, Jr. 1986. A classification of forest habitat types of northern New Mexico and southern Colorado. U. S. Dept. Agri. For. Serv. Gen. Tech. Rep. RM-131. DeVelice, R.L., J.A. Ludwig, W.H. Moir, F. Ronco, Jr. A Classification of Forest Habitat Types of Northern New Mexico and Southern Colorado. Forest Service: General Technical Report RM-131. Deevey, E.S. 1952. Radiocarbon Dating. Scientific American, February. Deevey, E.S. 1960. The Human Population. Scientific American, September. Deevey, E.S. 1960. The Human Population. Scientific American, September: Delany, M.J. 1970. Variation and Ecology of Island Populations of the Long-Tailed Field Mouse (Apodemus Sylvaticus). Symp Zool Soc. Lond. 26:283-295. Demment, M.W. and P.J. Van Soest. 1985. A nutritional explanation for body-size patterns of ruminant and nonruminant herbivores. The American Naturalist 125(5):641-672. Denno, R.F. and M.S. McClure. 1983. Variable plants and herbivores in natural and managed systems. Chapter One. Academic Press, New York. Department of Environmental Sciences, Envirodays Program. 1986. February 27 & 28. Despain, D.G. Habitat type and cover type a a base for grizzly bear habitat mapping and evaluation. Dethier, M.N. 1984. Disturbance and recovery in intertidal pools: maintenance of mosaic patterns. Ecological Monographs 54(1):99-118. Diamond, J. M. 1982. Rediscovery of the Yellow-fronted Gardener Bowerbird. Science 216:431-434. Diamond, J. Overview: Laboratory Experiments, Field experiments, and natural experiments. Chapter 1. Diamond, J. and T.J. Case. Overview: Introductions, Extinctions, Exterminations, and Invasions. Chapter 4. Diamond, J.M. 1969. Avifaunal Equilibrium and Species Turnover Rates on the Channel Islands of California. Diamond, J.M. 1970. Ecological Consequences of Island Colonization by Southwest Pacific Birds, II. The Effect of Species Diversity on Total Population Density. Proceedings of the National Academy of Science 67(4):1715-1721. Diamond, J.M. 1971. Comparison of Faunal Equilibrium Turnover Rates on a Tropical Island and a Temperate Island. Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. 68(11):2742-2745. Diamond, J.M. 1973. Distributional Ecology of New Guinea Birds. Science 179:759-770. Diamond, J.M. 1974. Colonization of Exploded Volcanic Islands by Birds: The Supertramp Strategy. Science 184. Diamond, J.M. 1975. The island dilemma: Lessons of modern biogeographic studies for the design of natural reserves. Biol Conserv 7:129-146. Diamond, J.M. 1977. Species Turnover Rates on Islands: Dependence on Census Interval. Science 197:264-270 Diamond, J.M. 1978. Niche shifts and the rediscovery of interspecific competition. Amer. Sci. 66:322-331. |competition |dabate |evidence |reviews Diamond, J.M. Assembly of Species communities. Chapter 14. |assembly rules Diamond, J.M. Chapter 14: Assembly of Species Communities. Diamond, J.M. Island biogeography and conservation: strategy and limitations. Diamond, J.M. Niche shifts and the rediscovery of interspecific competition. Am. Sci. 66:322-331. Diamond, J.M. and A.G. Marshall. 1977. Distributional ecology of new hebridean birds: a species kaleidoscope. J. Animal Ecol. 46:703-727. |equilibrium theory |density compensation Diamond, J.M. and E. Mayr. 1976. Species-area relation for birds of the Solomon Archipelago. Proc. Nat. Acad, Sci. 73:262-266. Diamond, J.M. and E. Mayr. 1976. Species-area relation for birds of the Solomon Archipelago. Proc. Nat. Acad, Sci. 73:262-266. Diamond, J.M. and M.E. Gilpin. 1982. Examination of the "null" model of Connor and Simberloff for species co_occurrences on islands. Oecologia 52:64-74. |assembly rules Dice, L.R. 1937. Fertility Relations in the Peromyscus Leucopus Group of Mice. Contributions from the Laboratory of Vertebrate Genetics 4:1-3. Dice, L.R. 1939. An Estimate of the Population of Deer-Mice in the Black Hills of South Dakota and Wyoming. Contributions from the Laboratory of Vertebrate Genetics 10:1-5. Dice, L.R. 1939. Variation in the Wood-Mouse, Peromyscus Leucopus, from Several Localities in New England and Nova Scotia. Contributions from the Laboratory of Vertebrate Genetics. Dice, L.R. 1940. Interdradation between Two Subspecies of Deer- Mouse (Peromyscus maniculatus) Across North Dakota. Contributions from the Laboratory of Vertebrate Genetics 13:1-14. Dice, L.R. 1952. Measure of the Spacing Between Individuals within a Population. Contributions from the Laboratory of Vertebrate Biology 55:1-23. Dice, L.R. 1952. Measure of the spacing between individuals within a population. Contributions from the Laboratory of Vertebrate Biology, University of Michigan, Ann Arbor, Michigan, Number 55. Dice, L.R. and P.J. Clark. 1953. The Statistical Concept of Home Range as Applied to the Recapture Radius of the Deermouse (Peromyscus). Contributions from the Laboratory of Vertebrate Ecology 62:1-15. Dice, L.R. and P.J. Clark. 1953. The statistical concept of home range as applied to the recapture radius of the deermouse (Peromyscus). Contributions from the laboratory of vertebrate biology, University of Michigan, Ann Arbor Michigan. Number 62. Dickerson, J.E., and J.V. Robinson. 1985. Microcosms as islands: a test of the Macarthur-Wilson equilibrium theory. Ecology 66(3):966-980. Dingle, H. 1981. Geographic variation and behavioral flexibility in milkweed bug life histories. in Insect life history patterns: habitat and geographic variation. Eds. R. F. Denno and H. Dingle. Springer-Verlag New York Inc. pp. 57-73. Dix, R.L. An Application of the Point-Centered Quarter Method to the Sampling of Grassland Vegetation. Dixon, K.R. and G.W. Cornwell. 1970. A Mathematical Model for Predator and Prey Populations. Researches on Population Ecology. Dixon, K.R., J.A. Chapman, G.R. Willner, D.E. Wilson and W. Lopez-Forment. 1983. The New World jackrabbits and hares - 2. Numerical taxonomic analysis. Acta Zool. Fennica 174:53-56. Dobzhansky, T. 1063. Evolutionary and Population Gentics. Science 142:1131-1136. Dobzhansky, T. 1950. The Genetic Basis of Evolution. Scientific American, January. Dobzhansky, T. 1960. The Present Evolution of Man. Scientific American. Dodson, S.I. 1972. Mortality in a Population of Daphinia Rosea. Ecology 53(6):1011-1023. Dolan, R. and B. Hayden. 1982. Barrier island revisited. Science 218:814. |UVA publications Dolan, R., B. Hayden, C. Rea, and J.E. Heywood. 1980. Erosion at Cape Lookout: Will the Lighthouse Fall? Shore and Beach. Dolby, G.R. 1982. The role of statistics in the Methodology of the life sciences. Biometrics 38:1069-1083. Don, B. A. C. 1983. Home range characteristics and correlates in tree squirrels. Mammal Rev. 13(2/3/4):123-132. Donnelly, D. M. and L. J. Nelson. 1986. Net economic value of deer hunting in Idaho. U. S. Dept. Agri. For. Serv. Res. Bull. RM-13. Donnelly, D.M. and L.J. Nelson. Net Economic Value of Deer Hunting in Idaho. Forest Service Publication: Resource Bulletin RM-13. Donnelly, T.W. Geologic restraint on Caribbean Biogeography. manuscript. Dooley, J. 1983. Community evolution. Manuscript. Dorf, E. 1960. Climatic Changes of the Past and Present. American Scientist. 48(3):342-364. Doughton, R.D. 1972. Shrub Age Structures on a Mule Deer Winter Range in Colorado. Ecology 53(4):615-625. Douglass, R. J. 1976. Spatial interactions and microhabitat selections of two locally sympatric voles, Microtus montanus and Microtus pennsylvanicus . Ecology 57:346-352. | behavior - - interaction -- microtus -- Montana -- voles | niche segregation Downs, A.A. and W.E. McQuilkin. 1944. Seed Production of Douthern Appalachian Oaks. Journal of Forestry 42(12):913-920. Downs, A.A. and W.E. McQuilkin. Seed Production of Southern Appalachian Oaks. Journal of Forestry. pp. 913-920. Dozier, H. L. and H. E. Hall. 1944. Observations on the Bryant fox squirrel. Maryland Conservationist, Winter 1944:2-7. Dritschillo, W., H. Cornell, D. Nafus and B. O'Connor. 1975. Insular Biogeography: Of Mice and Mites. Science 190:467-469. Dritschilo, W. and T.L. Erwin. 1982. Responses in abundance and diversity of cornfield carabis communities to differences in farm practices. Ecology 63(4):900-904. Driver B. L. 1985. Specifying what is produced by management of wildlife by public agencies. Lit. Sci. 7(3):281-295. | wildlife outputs -- products and preferences Dueser, R. D. and H. H. Shugart, Jr. 1979. Niche pattern in a forest-floor small-mammal fauna. Eol. 60(1):108-118. Dueser, R. D. and J. G. Hallett. 1980. Competition and habitat selection in a forest-floor small mammal fauna. Oikos 35:293-297. Dueser, R. D. and W. C. Brown. 1980. Ecological correlates of insular rodent diversity. Ecol. 61(1):50-56. Dueser, R. D., W. C. Brown G. S. Hogue, C. McCaffrey, S. A. McCuskey and G. J. Hennessey. 1979. Mammals on the Virginia barrier islands. J. Mamm. 60(2):425-429. Dueser, R.D. 1969. The Use of Space. Manuscript. Dueser, R.D. 1985. Population Status and Habitat Requirements of the Delmarva Fox Squirrel in Virginia. Preliminary proposal submitted to Nongame Research Program Game Division, Va. Comm. Game and Inland Fisheries. Dueser, R.D. 1986. Identification of Suitable Habitats for Reintroducing the Delmarva Fox Squirrel to the Eastern Shore of Virginia. Proposal submitted to Nongame Research Program Game Division, Va. Comm. of Game and Inland Fisheries. January 31, 1986. Dueser, R.D. and H.H. 1978. Microhabitats in a Forest-Floor Small Mammal Fauna. Ecology 59(1):89-98. Dueser, R.D. and H.H. Shugart. 1978. Microhabitats in a forest- floor small mammal fauna. Ecology 59(1):89-98. |UVA publications Dueser, R.D. and H.H. Shugart. 1979. Niche Pattern in a Forest- Floor Small-Mammal Fauna. Ecology 60(1):108-118. Dueser, R.D. and H.H. Shugart. 1979. Niche pattern in a forest- floor small-mammal fauna. Ecology 60(1):108-118. |UVA publications Dueser, R.D. and J.G. Hallett. 1980. Competition and habitat selection in a forest-floor small mammal fauna. Oikos 35:293- 297. |UVA publications Dueser, R.D. and J.H. Porter. 1981. Species Diversity, Habitat Complexity and Competition: Predictions and Tests for an Insular Small Mammal Fauna. Dueser, R.D. and W.C. Brown. 1980. Ecological Correlates of Insular Rodent Diversity. Ecology 61(1):50-56. Dueser, R.D. and W.C. Brown. 1980. Ecological correlates of insular rodent diversity. Ecology 61(1):50-56. |UVA publications Dueser, R.D. and W.C. Brown. 1980. Ecological correlates of insular rodent diversity. Ecology 61(1):50-56. |assembly rules Dueser, R.D. and W.C. Brown. Habitat expansion and density compensation by insular populations of small mammals. Manuscript. |UVA publications Dueser, R.D., M.L. Wilson and R.K. Rose. 1981. Attributes of Dispersing Meadow Voles in Open-Grid Populations. Acta Theriologica 26(8):139-162. Dueser, R.D., W.C. Brown, G.S. Hogue, C. McCaffrey, S.A. McCLuskey, and G.J. Hennessey. 1979. Mammals on the Virginia barrier islands. J. of Mamm. 60(2):425-429. |UVA publications Dueser, R.D., W.C. Brown, G.S. Hogue, C. McCaffrey, S.A. McCuskey and G.J. Hennessey. 1979. Mammals on the Virginia Barrier Islands. J. of Mamm. 60(2):425-429. |Mammal Populations Coastal Insular Duff, J.H., F.J. Triska, and R.S. Oremland. 1984. Dentrification associated with stream periphyton: chamber estimates from undisrupted communities. J. Environ. Quality 13:514-518. Duff, J.H., K.C. Stanley, F.J. Triska, and R.J. Avanzino. 1984. The use of photosynthesis-respiration chambers to measure nitrogen flux in epilithic algal communities. Verh. Internat. Verein. Limnol. 22:1436-1443. Dunaway, P.B. 1968. Life History and Populational Aspects of the Eastern Harvest Mouse. The American Midland Naturalist 79(1):48-67. Dunbar, M. J. 1980. The blunting of Occam's razor, or to hell with parsimony. Can. J. Zool. 58:123-128. Dunbar, M.J. The Evolution of Stability in Marine Environments Natural Selection at the Level of the Ecosystem. The American Naturalist. 44(875):129-136. Dunham, A. E. 1980. An experimental study of interspecific competition between the iguanid lizards Sceloporus merriami and Urosaurus ornatus . Ecol. Monographs 50(3):309-330. Dunham, A.E., D.W. Tinkle and J.W. Gibbons. 1978. Body size in island lizards: a cautionary tale. Ecology 59(6):1230-1238. |equilibrium theory |density compensation Dunning, J.B. and J.H. Brown. 1982. Summer rainfall and winter sparrow densities: a test of the food limitation hypothesis. The Auk 99:123-129. Dusi, J.L. 1949. Methods for the determination of food habits by plant microtechniques and histology and their application to cottontail rabbit food habits. The Journal of Wildlife Management 13(3):295-298. Dusi, J.L. 1952. The Food habits of several populations of cottontail rabbits in Ohio. J. of WIldlife Management 16(2):180-186. Dyer, M.I. The role of herbivores in forest ecosystems: the case for Biosphere Reserves. Ebenman, B. and S. G. Nilsson. 1982. Components of niche width in a territorial bird species: habitat utilization in males and females of the chaffinch ( Fringilla coelebs ) on islands and mainland. Am. Nat. 119:331-344. Eberhardt, L.L. 1970. Correlation, regression and density dependence. Ecology 51:306-310. Edge, W.D. Multivariate statistical methods used in mammalian habitat studies: A review. manuscript. Edmonds, R.L. 1982. Analysis of coniferous forest ecosystems in the western United States. US/IBP Synthesis Series. Edwards, N. T. and W. F. Harris. 1977. Carbon cycling in a mixed deciduous forest floor. Ecol. 58(2):431-437. | carbon -- groundwater -- litter -- litterfall -- respiration | Roots -- Tennessee Edwards, R. L. 1946. Some notes on the history of the Mexican ground squirrel in Texas. J. Mamm. 27(2):105-115. Efron, B. 1979. Computers and the theory of statistics: thinking the unthinkable. Siam Rev. 21(4):460-480. Efron, B. 1979. Computers and the theory of statistics: thinking the unthinkable. Siam Rev. 21(4):460-480. Egerton, F.N. Ecological studies and observations before 1900. Ehrlich, P.R. and D.D. Murphy. 1988. Conservation lessons from Long-term studies of checkerspot butterflies. Conservation Biology. Eldredge, N. 1981. Evolution and prediction. Science 212:737. Eldredge, N., A. B. Way, F. J. Sonleitner and B. R. Gross. 1981. Evolution and prediction. Science 212:738-739. | creationism Elias, T. S. 1983. Rare and endangered species of plants - the Soviet side. Science 219:19-23. Elton, C. and M. Nicholson. The ten-year cycle in numbers of the lynx in Canada. Emanuel, W.R., G.G. Killough. 1984. Modeling terrestrial ecosystems in the global carbon cycle with shifts in carbon storage capacity by land-use change. Ecology 65(3):970-983. Emlen, J. T. 1971. Population densities of birds derived from transect counts. The Auk 88:323-342. Endler, J. A. 1973. Gene flow and population differentiation. Science 179:243-250. Errington, P.L. Of population cycles and unknowns. Evans, F. C. 1969. Space relations in ecology: an overview. Michigan Academician 2(1):69-76. Evans, G.C. 1976. A sack of uncut diamonds: the study of ecosystems and the future resources of mankind. J. Ecol. 64:1-39. Evans, L.T. 1980. The natural history of crop yield. Am. Sci. 68:388-397. Fahrig, L. and G. Merriam. 1985. Habitat patch connectivity and population survival. Ecology 66(6):1762-1768. | connectivity -- dispersal -- extinction -- habitat patch | patch dynamics -- Peromyscus leucopus -- population dynamics | survival -- white-footed mouse Fairbairn, D. J. 1977. The spring decline in deer mice: death or dispersal? Can. J. Zool. 55:84-92. Fall, M.W., W.B. Jackson, and M.L. Carpenter. 1968. The occurrence and origin of small mammals on the islands and peninsulas of western Lake Erie. The Ohio J. of Science 68(2):109-116. Farb, P. The Exploiters. Farnum, P., R. Timmis and J. L. Kulp. 1983. Biotechnology of forest yield. Science 219:694-701. Faust, B.F., M.H. Smith and W.B. Wray. 1971. Distances Moved by Small Mammals as an Apparent Function of Grid Size. Acta Theriologica 16(11):161-177. Feener, D.H. 1981. Competition between ant species: outcome controlled by parasitic flies. Science 214:815-817. Feinsinger, P., R.J. Whelan, R.A. Kiltie. Some notes on community composition: assembly by rules or by dartboards? |assembly rules Feldhamer, A., J. E. Gates and J. H. Howard. 1983. Field identification of Peromyscus maniculatus and P. leucopus in Maryland: reliability of morphological characteristics. Acta Theriologica 28(27):417-423. Ferguson, R.H. The Timber Resources of Maryland. Findlay, J.S. and H. Black. 1983. Morphological and dietary structuring of a Zambian insectivorous bat community. Ecology 64(4):625-630. Findley, J.S. 1954. Competition as a Possible Limiting Factor in the Distribution of Microtus. Ecology 35(3):418-420. Findley, J.S. 1973. Phenetic Packing as a Measure of Faunal Diversity. The American Naturalist 107(956):580-584. Finerty, J. P. 1979. Cycles in Canadian lynx. Am. Nat. 114(3):453-455. Fisher, R.A. 1941. Average Excess and Average Effect of a Gene Substition. Annals of Eugenics 11(1):53-63. Fisher, R.A. 1958. Polymorphism and Natural Selection. J. of Ecology 46:289-293. Fisher, R.A., et al. The relation between the number of species and the number of individuals in a random sample of an animal population. Fisser, H.G. and G.M. Van Dyne. 1966. Influence of Number and Spacing of Points on Accuracy and Precision of Basal Cover Estimates. Journal of Range Management 19(4):205-211. Fisser, H.G. and G.M. Van Dyne. 1966. Influence of number and spacing of points on accuracy and precision of basal cover estimates. J. of Range Management 19(4):205-211. Fitch, H. S. and E. R. Hall. 1978. A 20-year record of succession on reseeded fields of tallgrassmprairie on the Rockefeller experimental tract. U. KS Pub. Mus. Nat. Hist. Spec. Pub. No. 4:1-15. Fitch, H.S. and E.R. Hall. 1978. A 20-year record of succession on reseeded fields of tallgrass prairie on the Rockefeller Experimental Tract. Special Publication No. 4, University of Kansas Printing Service: Lawrence, KS. Flake, L.D. 1973. Food Habits of Four Species of Rodents on a Short-Grass Prairie in Colorado. Journal of Mammalogy 54(3):636-647. Fleharty, E.D. and K.W. Navo. 1983. Irrigated cornfields as habitat for small mammals in the sandsage prairie of western Kansas. J. Mamm. 64(3):367-379. Fleharty, E.D., J.R. Choate, and M.A. Mares. 1972. Fluctuations in population density of the Hispid cotton rat: factors influencing a "crash". Bulletin of the Southern California Academy of Sciences 71(3):132-138. Fleming, T.H. 1985. Coexistence of five sympatric Piper (Piperaceae) species in a tropical dry forest. Ecology 66(3):688-700. Flessa, K.W. 1980. Biological Effects of Plate Tectonics and Continental Drift. BioScience 30(8):518-523. Fontaine, T.D. and S.M. Bartell. 1983. Dynamics of lotic ecosystems. Fonteyn, P.J. and B.E. Mahall. 1978. Competition among desert perennials. Nature 275:544-545. Forbes, S.A. 1887. Article IX. The Lake as a Microcosm. Bulletin of the Illinois Natural Survey 15(9):537-550. Force, D.C. 1974. Ecology of Insect Host-Parasitoid Communities. Science 184:624-632. Forcier, L. K. 1975. Reproductive strategies and the co- occurrence of climax tree species. Science 189:808-810. Forcier, L.K. 1975. Reproductive Strategies and the Co-occurrence of Climax Tree Species. Science 189:807-809. Fosterm J.B. 1964. Evolution of mammals on islands. Nature 202:234-235. Fowler, C.W. and J.A. McMahon. 1982. Selective extinction and speciation: their influence on the structure and functioning of communities and ecosystems. Am. Nat. 119(4):480-498. Fox, B. J. 1981. Niche parameters and species richness. Ecol. 62(6):1415-1425. Fox, B. J. 1982. Ecological separation and coexistence of Sminthopsis murina and Antechinus stuartii (Dasyuridae, Marsupialia): a regeneration niche? in Carniovorus marsupials. Ed. M. Archer. Roy. Zool. Soc. New South Wales: Sydney, Australia. pp. 187-197. | Antechinus stuartii -- coexistence -- Dasyuridae | ecological separation -- habitat shift | interspecific competition -- regeneration niche | Sminthopsis Murina -- succession Fox, B. J. and M. D. Fox. 1982. A comparison of vegetation classifications as descriptors of small mammal habitat preference. in Vegetation classification in Australia. Commonwealth Sci. and Ind. Res. Org. and Australian Nat. Univ. Press, Australia. pp. 166-180. Fox, B.J. 1982. Fire and mammalian secondary succession in an Australian coastal heath. Ecology 63(5):1332-1341. Fox, B.J. Small Mammal Community Pattern in Australian Heathland: A Taxonomically-Based Rule for Species Assembly. Fox, B.J. and M.D. Fox. 1978. Recolonization of coastal heath by Pseudomys novaehollandiae (Muridae) following sand mining. Australian J. Ecol. 3:447-465. Fox, D.G., J.C. Bernabo and B. Hood. 1987. Guidelines for measuring the physical, chemical and biological condition of wilderness ecosystems. USDA FS RM-146. Fox, L.R. and P.A. Morrow. 1981. Specialization: Species Property or Local Phenomenon? Science 211:887-893. Fox, S.F. 1975. Natural Selection on Morphological Phenotypes of the Lizard Uta Stansburiana. Evolution 29(1):95-107. Fox, S.F. 1978 Natural Selection on Behavioral Phenotypes of the Lizard Uta Stansburiana. Ecology 59(4):834-847. Fox, S.F. and M.C. Baker. 1978. Differential Survival in Common Grackels Sprayed with Turgitol. The American Naturalist 112(986):675-682. Fraleigh, P.C. and R.G. Wiegert. 1975. A model explaining successional change in standing crop of thermal blue-green algae. Ecology 56(3):656-664. Fraleigh, P.C. and R.G. Wiegert. 1975. A model explaining successional change in standing crop of thermal blue-green algae. Scientific American 56(3):656-664. Frame, J.S. 1974. Explicit solutions in two species Volterra systems. J. theor. Biol. 43:73-81. Frank, P.W. 1964. On Home Range of Limpets. The American Naturalist. 48(899):99-104. Frank, P.W. 1965. The Biodemography of an Intertidal Snail Population. Ecology 46(6):832-844. Frank, P.W. 1965. The biodemography of an intertidal snail population. Ecology 46:831-844. Frasco, B.R. and R.E. Good. 1975. Cone, Seed and Germination Characteristics of Pitch Pine (Pinus Rigida Mill) from the Pine Barrens of New Jersey. Bartonia 44:50-57. Freeland, W.J. 1981. Parasitism and Behavioral Dominance Among Male Mice. Science 213:461-462. Freeland, W.J. Vole cycles: another hypothesis. Freeman, D.C., L.G. Klikoff and K.T. Harper. 1976. Differential Resource Utilization by the Sexes of Dioecious Plants. Science 193:597-599. French, N.R., B.G. Maza, H.O. Hill, A.P. Aschwanden and H.W. Kaaz 1974. A Population Study of Irradiated Desert Rodents. Ecological Monographs 44(1):45-72. Frey, D. F. and R. A. Pimentel. 1978. Principal component analysis and factor analysis. Pp. 219-245 in Quantitative ethology. Colgon, P. W. (ed.) Wiley, New York. Fritz, R.S. C.F. Sacchi, and P.W. Price. 1986. Competition versus host plant phenotype in species composition: Willow sawflies. Ecology 67(6):1608-1618. Fujii, K. 1969. Numerical Taxonomy of Ecological Characteristics and the Niche Concept. Systematic Zoology 18(2):151-153. Full, W. E. and R. Ehrlich. 1986. Fundamental problems associated with "eigenshape analysis" and similar "factor" analysis procedures. Mathematical Geology 18(5):451-463. Fullagar, P.J., P.A. Jewell, R.M. Lockley, I.W. Rowlands. 1963. The skomer vole (Clethrionomys glareolus skomerensis) and long-tailed field mouse (Apodemus sylvaticus) on Skomer Island, Pembrokeshire in 1960. Futuyma, D. G. 1983. Speciation. (Book Review) Science 219:1059- 1060. Futuyma, D. J. 1982. A synthetic history of biology. (Book Review) Science 216:842-844. Gadgil, M. and O.T. Solbrig. 1972. The concept of r- and K- selection: evidence from wildflowers and some theoretical comsiderations. Am. Nat. 106:14-31. Gaines, E.P. and M.R. Ryan. 1988. Pipin plover habitat use and reproductive success in North Dakota. J. Wildl. Mgmt. 52(2):266-273. Gaines, M.S., A.M. Vivas and C. Baker. An Experimental Analysis of Dispersal in FLuctuating Vole Populations: Demographic Parameters. Galbraith, J.K. 1964. Economics and the Quality of Life. Science 145(3628):117-122. Galindo, C. and C.J. Krebs. 1985. Habitat use and abundance of deer mice: interactions with meadow voles and red-backed voles. Can. J. Zool. 63:1870-1879. Galindo, C. and C.J. Krebs. 1985. Habitat use by singing voles and tundra voles in the southern Yukon. Oecologia 66:430-436. Galindo, C. and C.J. Krebs. 1986. Evidence for competition in small rodents. Oikos 46(1):116-121. Garbutt, K. and A.R. Zangerl. 1983. Application of genotype- environment interaction analysis to niche quantification. Ecology 64(5):1292-1296. Garcia, E.F.J. 1983. An experimental test of competition for space between blackcaps Sylvia atricapilla and garden warblers Sylvia borin in the breeding season. J. Animal Ecol. 52:795-805. Gardner, R.H. and C.R. Terman. 1970. The relationship between age grouping and weight of selected organs of prairie deermice. Res. Popul. Ecol. 12:1-18. Garrels, R. M., A. Lerman and F. T. Mackenzie. 1976. Controls of atmospheric O2 and CO2: past, present, and future. Am. Sci. 64:306-315. Garrels, R.M., A.Lerman, and F.T. Mackenzie. 1976. Controls of Atmospheric O 2 and CO 2 : Past, Present and Future. American Scientist 64:306-315. Garrett, M.G. and W.L. Franklin. 1988. Behavioral ecology of dispersal in the black-tailed prairie dog. J. Mamm. 69(2):236-250. Gates, D.M. 1965. Heat Transfers in Plants. ******* 213(6):76-84. Gates, D.M. 1968. Energy Exchange and Ecology. Bioscience 18(2):90-95. Gates, D.M. 1968. Energy Exchange in the Biosphere. Functioning of Terrestrial Ecosystems at the Primary Production Level. Proceedings of the Copenhagen Symposium (UNESCO). Gates, D.M. 1968. Toward Understanding Ecosystems. Advances in Ecological Research 5:1-35. Gates, D.M. 1969. Animal Climates (Where Animals Must Live). Environmental Research 3(2):132-144. Gates, D.M. 1969. Infrared Measurement f Plant and Animal Surface Temperature and Their Interpretation. in, Remote Sensing in Ecology: Athens, University of Georgia Press. Gates, D.M. 1970. Synergisms of Life and Climate. A Century of Weather Progress 120-129. Gates, D.M. and W.P. Porter. 1969. Thermodynamic Equilibria of ANimals with Environment. Ecological Monographs 39:245-270. Gauch H.G. and G.B. Chase. Fitting the Gaussian Curve to Ecological Data. Ecology 55(6):1377-1381. Gauch, H.G. 1973. A Quantitative Evaluation of the Bray-Curtis Ordination. Ecology 54(4):829-836. Gauch, H.G. abd R.H. Whittaker. 1972. Coenocline Simulation. Ecology 53(3):445-451. Gauch, H.G. and R.H. Whittaker. 1972. Comparison of Ordination Techniques. Ecology 53(5):868-875. Gauch, H.G. and R.H. Whittaker. 1972. Comparisons of Ordination Techniques. Ecology 53(5):868-875. Gauch, H.G., G.B. Chase and R.H. Whittaker 1974. Ordination of Vegetation Samples by Gaussian Species Distributions. Ecology 55(6):1382-1390. Gaulin, S.J. and R.W. Fitzgerald. 1988. Home-range size as a predictor of mating systems in Microtus. J. Mamm. 69(2):311- 319. Gaulin, S.J.C. and R.W. Fitzgerald. 1986. Sex differences in spatial ability: an evolutionary hypothesis and test. Am. Nat. 127(1):74-88. Gause, G. F. 1936. The principles of biocoenology. Quarterly Rev. Bio. 11:320-336. Gause, G.F. 1932. Ecology of populations. Quarterly Review of Biology 7:27-46. Geluso, K.N. 1971. Habitat distribution of Peromyscus in the black mesa region of Oklahoma. J. Mamm. 52(3):605-607. Gentry, G.B. and E.P. Odum. 1957. The Effect of Weather on the Winter Activity of Old-Field Rodents, J. of Mammology 38(1):72-77. Gentry, G.B., F.B. Golley and J.T. McGinnis. 1966. Effect of Weather on Capture of Small Mammals. The American Midland Naturalist 75(2):526-530. Gentry, J. B. and M. H. Smith. 1968. Food habits and burrow associates of Peromyscus polionitus . J. Mamm. 49(3):562-565. Gentry, J.B. 1968. Dynamics of an Enclosed Population of Pine Mice, Microtus Pinetorum. Researches on Population Ecology 10(1):21-30. Gentry, J.B., F.B. Golley and M.H. Smith. 1971. Yearly Fluctuations in Small Mammal Populations in a Southeastern United States Hardwood Forest. Acta Theriologica 15(12):179- 190. Gentry, J.B., M.H. Smith and J.G. Chelton. 1971. An Evaluation of the Octagon Census Method for Estimatinf Small Mammal Populations. Acta Theriologica 16(10):149-159. Gentry, J.B., M.H. Smith and R.J. Beyers. 1971. Use of radioactivity tagged bait to study movement patterns in small mammal populations. Ann. Zool. Fennici 8:17-21. Gettinger, R.D. 1983. Use of doubly-labeled water (3HH18O) for determination of H2O flux and CO2 production by a mammal in a humid environment. Oecologia 59:54-57. Gettinger, R.D. 1984. A field study of activity patterns of Thomomys bottae. J. Mamm. 65(1):76-84. Gettinger, R.D. 1984. Energy and Water metabolism of free-rnaging pocket gophers, Thomomys bottae. Ecology 65(3):740-751. Gettinger, R.D. 1984. Seasonal patterns of nitrogen utilization by pocket gophers. Comp. Biochem. Physiol. 78(4):657-659. Getz, L.L. 1961. Factors Influencing the Local Distribution of Microtus and ********* in Southern Michigan. Ecology 42(1):110-119. Getz, L.L. 1961. Factors Influencing the Local Distribution of Shrews. The American Midland Naturalist 65(1):67-88. Getz, L.L. 1961. Notes on the Local Distribution of Peromyscus leucopus and Zapus hudsonius. The American Midland Naturalist 65(2):487-501. Getz, L.L. 1962. Aggressive Behavior of the Meadow an Prairie Voles. J. of Mammaology 43(3):351-358. Getz, L.L. 1965. Humidities on Vole Runways. Ecology 46(4):548- 551. Getz, L.L. 1967. Responses of the Meadow Vole to Woody Vegetation. Biological Science Series. Vol. 1, No. 2. Getz, L.L. 1968. A Method for Measuring Light Intensity Under Dense Vegetation. Ecology 49(6):1168-1169. Getz, L.L. 1970. Habitat of the Meadow Vole During a "Population Low". The American Midland Naturalist 83(2):455-461. Getz, L.L. 1970. Influence of vegetation on the local distribution of the meadow vole on southern Wisconsin. U. Connecticutt Occaional Papers 1(4):213-241. Getz, L.L. 1971. Microclimate, Vegetation Cover, and Local Distribution of the Meadow Vole. The Transactions of the Illinois State Academy of Science 64(1):9-21. Ghiselin, J. 1970. Edaphic Control of Habitat Selection by Kangaroo Mice (Microdipodops) in Three Nevadan Populations. Oecologia 4:248-261. Ghiselin, J. 1970. Prey population: a parsimonious model for evolution of response to predator species diversity. Science 170:649-650. Gholz, H.L. and R.F. Fisher, and W.L. Pritchett. 1985. Nutrient dynamics in slash pine plantation ecosystems. Ecology 66(3):647-659. Gholz, H.L., C.S. Perry, W.P. Cropper, L.C. Hendry. 1985. Litterfall, decomposition, and nitrogen and phosphorus dynamics in a chronosequence of slash pine (Pinus elliottii) plantations. Forest Sci. 31:463-478. Gibbons, J. W. 1986. Movement patterns among turtle populations: applicability to management of the desert tortoise. Herpitologica 42(1):104-113. | gopherus agassizii -- emigration -- management -- nesting -- | movement patterns -- turtle Gibbons, J. W. and J. R. Harrison, III. 1981. Reptiles and amphibians of Kiawah and Capers islands, South Carolina. Brimleyana 5:145-162. Gibbons, J. W., G. H. Keaton, J. P. Schubauer, J. L. Greene, D. H. Bennett, J. R. McAuliffe and R. R. Sharitz. 1980. Unusual population size structure in freshwater turtles on barrier islands. Georgia J. Sci. 37:155-159. Gibbons, J.D. and R.J. Freund. 1980. Organizations for statistical consulting at Colleges and Universities. The American Statistician 34(3):140-145. Gibbons, J.W. and J.W. Coker. 1978. Herpetofaunal colonization patterns of Atlantic coast barrier islands. Amer. Midland Nat. 99(1):219-233. |UVA publications Giddings, L. V. and A. R. Templeton. 1983. Behavioral phylogenies and the direction of evolution. Science 220:372-378. Gilbert, F. S. 1980. The equilibrium theory of island biogeography: fact or fiction? J. Biogeo. 7:209-235. Giles, R.H. 1982. Management knowledge through wildlife research: A perspective. Environ. Mgmt. 6(3):185-191. Gilpin, M. E. 1972. Enriched predator-prey systems: theoretical stability. Science 177:902-904. (Filed with J. E. Tyson et al. Limit cycles...) Gilpin, M.E. 1981. Peninsula Diversity Patterns. The American Naturalist 118:291-296. |equilibrium theory |density compensation Gilpin, M.E. and J.M. Diamond. 1976. Calculation of Immigration and Extinction Curves from the Species-Area-Distance Relation. Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. 73(11):4130-4134. Gilpin, M.E. and J.M. Diamond. 1982. Factors contributing to non- randomness in species co-occurences on islands. Oecologia 52:75-84. |assembly rules Gilpin, M.E., M.P. Carpenter, and M.J. Pomerantz. The Assembly of a laboratory community: Multispecies competition in Drosophila. Chapter 2. Glass, B. 1965. The Ethical Basis of Science. Science 150:1254- 1270. Glass, G. E. and N. A. Slade. 1980. The effect of Sigmodon hispidus on spatial and temporal activity of Microtus ochrogaster : evidence for competition. Ecology 6(2):358-370. | allotopy -- competition -- interspecific aggression | Microtus -- resource patitioning -- Sigmodon -- syntopy Glass, G. E., R. D. Holt and N. A. Slade. 1985. Infanticide as an evolutionarily stable strategy. Anim. Behar. 33:384-391. Glass, G.E. and N.A. Slade. 1980. Population Structure as a Predictor of Spatial Association Between Sigmodon Hispidus and Microtus Ochrogaster. Journal of Mammology 61(3):473-485. Glass, G.E. and N.A. Slade. 1980. The Effect of Sigmodon Hispidus on Spatial and Temporal Activity of Microtus OchrogasterL Evidence for Competition. Ecology 61(2):358-370. Glass, G.V., P.D. Peckham, and J.R. Sanders. Consequences of Failure to Meet Assumptions Underlying the Fixed Effects Analyses of Variance and Covariance. Review of Educational Research 42(3):237-288. Glasser, J.W. 1982. On the casues of temporal change in communities: modification of the biotic environment. Am. Nat. 119(3):375-390. Glasser, J.W. 1984. Evolution of efficiencies and strategies of resource exploitation. Ecology 65(5):1570-1578. Gliwicz, J. 1980. Island populations of rodents: their organization and functioning. Biol. Rev. 55:109-138. |UVA publications Gliwicz, J. 1981. Competitive interactions within a forest rodent community in central Poland. Oikos 37:353-362. Goertz, J.W. 1964. The Influence of Habitat Quality upon Density of Cotton Rat Populations. Ecological Monographs 34(4):359- 381. Goertz, J.W. 1971. An Ecological Study of Microtus pinetorum in Oklahoma. The American Midland Naturalist 86(1):1-12. Goldstein, R.A. and J.W. Elwood. 1971. A Two-Compartment, Three Parameter Model for the Absorption and Retention of Ingested Elements by Animals. Ecology 52(5):935-939. Golley, F.B. 1961. Energy Values of Ecological Materials. Ecology 42(3):581-584. Golley, F.B. 1961. Interaction of Natality, Mortality and Movement during One Annual Cycle in a Microtus Population. American Midland Naturalist 66(1):152-159. Golley, F.B. 1965. Structure and Function of an Old-Field Broomsedge Community. Ecological Monographs 35:113-131. Golley, F.B. 1968. Secondary Productivity in Terrestrial Communities. Am. Zoologist 8:53-59. Golley, F.B. Table of Caloric Equivalents. Golley, FB., E.L. Morgan and J.L. Carmon. 1966. Progression of Molt in Peromyscus Polionotus. J. of Mammalogy 47(1):145-148. Good, R.E. and N.F. Good. 1976. Growth Analysis of Pitch Pine Seedlings Under Three Temperature Regimes. Forest Science 22(3):445-448. Goodman, D. 1978. Management implications of the mathematical demography of long lived animals. US Dept. of Commerce PB 289 678 Goodman, D. 1982. Optimal life histories, optimal notation, and the value of reproductive value. Am. Nat. 119(6):803-823. Goodrum, P.D., V.H. Reid, and C.E. Boyd. Acorn Yields, Characteristics, and Management Criteria of Oaks for Wildlife. J. of Wildlife Management 35(3):520-532. Gottfryd, A. and R. I. C. Hansell. 1985. The impact of observer bias on multivariate analyses of vegetation structure. Oikos 45:223-234. Gould, S. J. 1966. Allometry and size in ontogeny and phylogeny. Biol. Rev. 41:587-640. Gould, S.J. 1966. Allometry and size in ontogeny and phylogeny. Biol. Rev. 41:587-640. Grabiner, J. V. and P. D. Miller. Effects of the Scopes trial: was it a victory for evolutionists? Science 185:832-837. | creationism Grace, J. B. and R. G. Wetzel. 1981. Habitat partitioning and competitive displacement in cattails ( Thypa ): experimental field studies. Am. Nat. 118:463-474. Graham, G.L. 1983. Changes in bat species diversity along an elevational gradient up the Peruvian andes. J. Mamm. 64(4):559-571. Grant, B.R. and P.R. Grant. 1983. Fission and fusion in a population of Darwin's Finches: an example of the value of studying individuals in ecology. Oikos 41:530-547. Grant, BR. and P.R. Grant. 1981. Exploitation of Opuntia cactus by Birds on the Galapagos. Oecologia 49:179-187. Grant, P. R. 1968. Polyhedral territories of animals. Am. Nat. 102(923):75-80. Grant, P.R. 1965. The Adaptive Significance of Some Size Trends in Island Birds. Evolution 19:355-367. Grant, P.R. 1969. Colonization of islands by ecologically dissimilar species of birds. Can. J. Zool. 47:41-43. Grant, P.R. 1969. Experimental studies of competitive interaction in a two-species system. I. Microtus and Clethrionomys species in enclosures. Can. J. of Zool. 47:1059-1078. Grant, P.R. 1970. Colonization of islands by ecologically dissimilar species of mammals. Can. J. of Zoology 48:545-553. |Mammal Populations Coastal Insular Grant, P.R. 1971. Experimental studies of competitive interaction in a two-species system. Grant, P.R. 1972. Interspecific competition among rodents. Ann. Rev. Ecol. Syst. 3:79-106. Grant, P.R. 1976. Population performance of Microtus pennsylvanicus confined to woodland habitat, and a model of habitat occupancy. Canadian J. of Zoology 53:1447-1465. Grant, P.R. 1978. Dispersal in relation to carrying capacity. Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. 75(6):2854-2858. Grant, P.R. 1980. Colonization of Atlantic Islands by Chaffinches (Fringilla spp.). Bonn. Zool. Beitr. 31:311-317. Grant, P.R. 1981. Patterns of Growth in Darwin's Finches. Proc. R. Soc. Lond. 212:403-432. Grant, P.R. 1981. The Feeding of Darwin's Finches on Tribulus Cistoides (L.) Seeds. Animal Behavior 29(3):785-793. Grant, P.R. 1983. The Relative Size of Darwin's Finch Eggs. The Auk 100(1):229-230. Grant, P.R. Comment on Simberloff's letter. The American Naturalist. Grant, P.R. Community Diversity and the coexistence of congeners. The American Naturalist. Grant, P.R. Interspecific competition in fluctuating environments. Chapter 10. Grant, P.R. Variation in the Size and Shape of Darwin;s Finch Eggs. The Auk 99:15-23. Grant, P.R. and B.R. Grant. 1980. Annual Variation in Finch Numbers, Foraging and Food Supply on Isla Daphne Major, Galapagos. Oecologia 46:55-62. Grant, P.R. and I. Abbott. 1980. Interspecific competition, island biogeography and null hypotheses. Evolution 34(2):332- 341. |assembly rules Grant, P.R. and P.T. Boag. 1980. Rainfall on the Galapagos and the Demography of Darwin's Finches. The Auk 97:227-244. Grant, P.R. and R.D. Morris. 1971. The Distribution of Microtus pennsylvanicus within Grassland Habitat. Canadian Journal of Zoology 49(7):1043-1052. Grant, P.R. and S.J. Millington. 1983. Feeding ecology and territoriality of the Cactus Finch Geospiza scandens on Isla Daphne Major, Galapogas. Oecologia 58:76-83. Grant, P.R., J.N. Smith, I.J. Abbott, and L.K. Abbott. 1978. Seasonal Variation in Feeding Habits of Darwin's Ground Finches. Ecology 59(6):1137-1150. Grant, P.R., T. Price and S. Millington. 1983. Helping at the Nest in Darwin's Finches as Misdirected Parental Care. The Auk 100(1):192-194. Grant, R E. 1983. Evolution: a cyclical argument? Science 219:1170. | creationism Graves, G.R. and N.J. Gotelli. 1983. Neotropical land-bridge avifaunas: new approaches to null hypothesis in biogeography. Oikos 41:322-333. |community assembly Graves, G.R. and N.J. Gotelli. 1983. Neotropical land-bridge avifaunas: new approaches to null hypothesis in biogeography. Oikos 41:322-333. |equilibrium theory |density compensation Green, R.F. 1988. Reply to Shorrocks and Rosewell. Am. Nat. 131(5):772-773. Green, R.H., J. McCuaig, and B. Hicks. 1984. Testing a paleoecology matrix model: estimates for a Sphaerium population in equilibrium with its death assemblage. Ecology 65(4):1201-1205. Greenacre, M. J. and E. S. Vrba. 1983. Graphical display and interpretation of antelope census data in African wildlife areas, using correspondence analysis. Ecology65(3):984-997. Greenbaum, E. 1977. The photosynthetic unit of hydrogen evolution. Science 196:879-880. Gregor, B. 1971. Carbon and Atmospheric Oxygen. Science 174:316- 318. Gregory, M.J. and G.N. Cameron. 1988. Examination of socially induced dispersal in Sigmondon hispidus. J. Mamm. 69(2):251- 260. Grinnel, J. 1924. Geography and evolution. Ecology 5:113-224. Grodzinnski, W. and A. Gorecki. 1967. Daily energy budgets of small rodents. Secondary Productivity of Terrestrial Ecosystems. Grodzinski, W. 1971. Energy Flow Through Populations of Small Mammals in the Alaskan Taiga Forest. Acta Theriologica 16(17):231-275. Grodzinski, W. and K. Sawicka-Kapusta. 1970. Energy Values of Tree-Seeds Eaten by Small Mammals. Oikos 21:52-58. Grosenbaugh, L.R. 1952. Plotless Timber Estimates - New, Fast, Easy. Journal of Forestry 32-37.. Gross, B. R. 1981. Evolution and prediction. (Response to N. Eldredge) Science 212:738. Gross, K. L. and P. A. Werner. 1982. Colonizing abilities of "biennial" plant species in relation to ground cover: impilcations for their distributions in a successional sere. Ecol. 63(4):921-931. | biennials -- colonization -- community -- Daucus carota | demography -- life history -- monocarpic perennials | Oenothera biennis -- patches -- seedlings -- seeds | succession -- Tragopogon dubius -- Verbascum thapsus Grossman, G.D. 1981. Community regulation and patterns of resource partitioning. Proc. 3rd Pacific Technical workshop on Fish food habit studies. Grossman, G.D. 1982. Dynamics and organization of a rocky intertidal fish assemblage: the persistance and resilience of taxocene structure. Am. Nat. 119(5):611-637. Grossman, G.D. 1982. Erratum to: Stochasticity in structural and functional characteristics of an Indiana stream fish assemblage: a test of community theory. Grossman, G.D., P.B. Moyle and J.O. Whitaker, Jr. 1982. Stochasticity in structural and functional characteristics of an Indiana stream fish assemblage: a test of community theory. Am. Nat. 120(4):423-454. Groves, C. R. and T. W. Clark. 1986. Determining minimum population size for recovery of the black footed ferret. Great Basin Naturalist Memoirs 8:150-159. Groves, C.R. and T.W. Clark. 1986. Determining minimum population size for recovery of the black-footed ferret. Great Basin Naturalist Memoirs 8:150-159. Grubb, P.J. Problems posed by sparse and patchily distributed species in species-rich plant communities. Chapter 12. Gruell, G. E. 1986. Post-1900 mule deer irruptions in the intermountain West: principle cause and influences. U. S. Dept. Agri. For. Serv. Gen. Tech. Rep. INT-206. Gruell, G.E. 1986. Post 1900 Mule Deer Irruptions in the Intermountain West: Principle Cause and Influences. USDAFS General Technical Report INT-206. Guilday, J.E., P.W. Parmalee, H.W. Hamilton. 1977. The Clark's Cave Bone Deposit and the Late Pleistocene Paleoecology of the Central Appalachian Mountains of Virginia. IN, Bulletin of Carnegie Museum of Natural History, Number 2, Pittsburg, 1977. Gutschick, V. P. 1981. Evolved strategies in Nitrogen aquisition by plants. Am. Nat. 118(5):607-637. Gysel, L.W. 1956. Measurement of Acorn Crops. Forest Science 2(1):305-313. Gysel, L.W. 1971. A 10-Year Analysis of Beechnut Production and Use in Michigan. J. Wildlife Management 35(3):516-519. Habicht, G.S., G. Beck and Jorge Benach. 1987. Scientific American July. 78-83. |Lyme Disease |ticks Haigh, G.R. 1983. Effects of inbreeding and social factors on the reproduction of young female Peromyscus maniculatus bairdii. J. Mamm. 64(1):48-54. Haila, Y. 1983. Land birds on northern islands: a sampling metaphor for insular colonization. Oikos 41:334-351. |assembly rules Haila, Y. 1983. Land birds on northern islands: a sampling metaphor for insular colonization. Oikos 41:334-351. |community assembly Haila, Yrjo. 1986. In the semiotic dimension of ecological theory: the case of island biogeography. Bio. and Phil. 1:377-387. Hairston, N. G. 1980. Evolution under interspecific competition: field experiments on terrestrial salamanders. Evolution 34(3):409-420. Hairston, N. G. 1980. Species packing in the salamander genus Desmognathus : what are the interspecific interactions involved? The Am. Nat. 115(3):354-366. Hairston, N. G. 1980. The experimental test of an analysis of field distributions: competition in terrestrial salamanders. Ecology 61(4):817-826. Hairston, N. G. 1981. An experimental test of a guild: salamander competition. Ecology 62(1):65-72. Hairston, N. G. 1983. Alpha selection in competing salamanders: experimental verification of an a priori hypothesis. Am. Nat. 122(1):105-113. Hairston, N. G., Jr. K. T. Li and S. S. Easter, Jr. 1982. Fish vision and the detection of planktonic prey. Science 218:1240-1242. Hairston, N.G. 1980. Species packing in the salamander genus Desmognathus: what are the interspecific interactions involved? Am. Nat. 115:354-366. Hairston, N.G. 1980. Species packing in the salamander genus Desmognathus: what are the interspecific interactions involved? The American Naturalist 115(3):354-366. |scientific method Hairston, N.G. 1985. The interpretation of experiments on interspecific competition. The American Naturalist 125:321- 325. |competition |dabate |evidence |reviews Hairston, N.G., F.E. Smith, and L.B. Slobodkin. 1960. Community Structure, Population Control and Competition. The American Naturalist 44(879):422-425. Hale. P.E. 1983. Use of discriminant function to characterize ruffed grouse drumming sites in Georgia: a reply. J. Wildl. Manage. 47(4):1152. Hall, E.R. 1951. A synopsis of the North American Lagomorpha. University of Kansas Publications Museum of Natural History. Vol.5, No. 10:119-202. Hall, M. L. 1983. Origin of Espanola Island and the age of terrestrial life on the Galopagos Islands. Science 221:545- 547. Hall, S. R. 1986. An annotated checklist of the vascular flora of Assateague Island (Maryland and Virginia). Castanea 51:265- 305. Hallett, J.G. 1980. Niche Width and Genetic Variation in Drosphila Reexamined. The American Naturalist 115(4):594-595. Hallett, J.G. 1982. Habitat selection an the community matrix of a desert small-mammal fauna. Ecology 63(5):1400-1410. Hallett, J.G. Regression Models of Habitat Use and Interspecific Competition. Hallett, J.G. and S.L. Pimm. 1979. Direct estimation of competition. The American Naturalist 113(4):593-600. |island experiments |non-mammals Hallett, J.G. and S.L. Pimm. Direct Estimation of Competition. Hallett, J.G., M.A. O'Connell and R.L. Honeycutt. 1983. Competition and Habitat selection: Test of a Theory using Small Mammals. Oikos 40:175-181. Halpin, Z.T. 1981. Adult-young interactions in island and mainland populations of the deermouse Peromyscus maniculatus. Oecologia 51:419-425. |Mammal Populations Coastal Insular Halvorson, C.H. 1982. Rodent occurrence, habitat disturbance and seed fall in a larch-fir forest. Ecology 63(2):423-433. Halvorson, C.H. 1982. Rodent occurrence, habitat disturbance, and seed fall in a larch-fir forest. Ecology 63(2):423-433. Hamill, D.N. and S.J. Wright. 1988. Interspecific interaction and similarity in species composition. Am. Nat. 131(3):412-423. Hamilton, T.H. 1961. On the Functions and Causes of Sexual Dimorphism in Breeding Plumage Characters of North American Species of Warblers and Orioles. The American Naturalist. January 7, 1961. Hamilton, T.H. and I. Rubinoff. 1963. Isolation, Endemism, and Multiplication of Species in the Darwin Finches. Evolution 17(4):388-403. Hamilton, T.H. and I. Rubinoff. On Models Predicting Abundance of Speceis and Endemics for the Darwin Finches in the Galapogos Archipelago. Evolution 18(2):339-342. Hamilton, T.H. and I. Rubinoff. On Predicting Insular Variation in Endism and Sympatry for the Darwin Finches in the Galapogos Archipelago. The American Naturalist 101(918):161- 172. Hamilton, T.H. and N.E. Armstrong. 1965. Environmental Determination of Insular Variation in Bird Species Abundance in the Gulf of Guinea. Nature 207(4993):148-151. Hamilton, T.H., I. Rubinoff and R.H. Barth. 1963. Species Abundance: Natural Regulation of Insualr Variation. Hamilton, T.H., R.H. Barth and I. Rubinoff. 1964. The Environmental Control of Insular Variation in Bird Species Abundance. Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences 52(1):132-140. Hamilton, W.D. 1963. The Evolution of Altruistic Behavior. The American Naturalist. Hamilton, W.J. 1938. Life History Notes on the Northern Pine Mouse. J. of Mammology 19:163-170. Handley, C. O., Jr. 1980. Mammals: 483-621: in D. W. Linzey (ed.). Endangered and threatened Plants and Animals of Virginia. VPI & SU Center for Environ. Studs., Blacksburg, VA. 665 pp. Hannon, S. J. 1983. Spacing and breeding density of willow ptarmigan in response to an experimental alteration of sex ratio. J. Anim. Ecol. 52:807-820. Hannon, S.J. 1983. Spacing and breeding density of willow ptarmigan in response to an experimental alteration of sex ratio. J. Animal Ecol. 52:807-820. Hansen, L. and G.O. Batzli. 1978. The influence of food availability on the white-footed mouse: populations in isolated woodlots. Can. J. Zool. 56:2530-2541. |Species of interest Hansen, L.P. and C.M. Nixon. 1984. Effects of adults on the demography of fox squirrels. Ill. State Natural History Survey. Hansen, L.P., C.M. Nixon and S.P. Havera. 1986. Recapture rates and length of residence in an unexploited fox squirrel population. The American Midland Naturalist 115(2):209-215. Hansen, R. M. and E. E. Remmenga. 1961. Nearest neighbor concept applied to pocket gopher populations. Ecol. 42(4):812-814. Hanski, I. 1981. Dynamics of regional distribution: the core and satellite species hypothesis. Oikos 38:210-221. Hanski, I. 1983. Coexistence of competitors in patchy environment. Ecology 64(3):493-500. |community assembly Hanski, I. 1986. Population dynamics of shrews on small islands accord with the equilibrium model. Biological Journal of the Linnean Society 28:23-26. | Sorex - island biography - extinction - colonization | demographic stochasticity - environmental stochasticity | competition - epigenetic variation Hanski, I. 1986. Population dynamics of shrews on small islands accord with the equillibrium model. Biol. J. Linnean Soc. 28:23-36. | Sorex -- island biogeography -- extinction | demographics stochasticity -- environmental stochasticity | competition -- colonization -- epigenetic variation Hanski, I. On patterns of temporal and spatial variation in animal populations. |equilibrium theory |density compensation Hanski, I. and E. Ranta. 1983. Coexistence in a patchy environment: three species of daphnia in rock pools. J. of An. Ecol. 52:263-279. |community assembly Hansson, L. 1970. Methods of morphological diet micro-analysis in rodents. Oikos 21:255-266. Hansson, L. 1971. Small rodent food, feeding and population dynamics. Oikos 22:183-198. Hansson, L. 1979. Food as a limiting factor for small rodent numbers. Oecologia 37:297-314. Hansson, L. 1982. Experiments on habitat selection in voles: Implications for the inverse distribution of two common european species. Oecologia 52:246-252. Hansson, L. 1983. Competition between rodents in successional stages of taiga forests: Microtus agrestis vs. Clethrionomys gleriolus . Oikos 40:258-266. Hansson, L. 1983. Reproductive development related to age indicators in microtine rodents. J. Wildl. Manage. 47(4):1170-1172. Harberd D. J. 1982. Application of a multivariate technique to ecological survey. J. Ecol. 50(1):1-17. Hardin, G. 1968. The Tragedy of the Commons. Science 162:1243- 1248 Hardin, G.H. 1960. The Competitive Exclusion principle. Science 131:1292-1297. Harland, R.M., P.J. Blancher and J.S. Millar. 1979. Demography of a population of Peromyscus leucopus. Can. J. Zool. 57:323- 328. |Species of interest Harper, J. L. and J. White. 1970. The dynamics of plant populations. Proc. adv study inst dynamics numbers popul. (Osterbreek, 1970):41-63. Harris, J.H. 1984. An experimental analysis of desert rodent foraging ecology. Ecology 65(5):1579-1584. Harris, M.P. 1973. The Galapogos Avifauna. The Condor 75:265-278. Harris, R.B. et al. 1987. Sample sizes for minimum viable population estimation. Conservation Biology 1(1):72-76. Harris, V.T. 1952. An Experimental Study of Habitat Selection By Prairie and Forest Races of the Deermouse, Peromyscus Maniculatus. Contributions from the Laboratory of Vertebrate Biology 56:1-53. Harris, V.T. 1954. Experiemntal Evidence of Reproductive Isolation between Two Subspecies of Peromyscus Maniculatus. Contributions from the Laboratory of Vertebrate Biology. 70:1-13. Harris, W. F., P. Sollins, N. T. Edwards, B. E. Dinger and H. H. Shugart. 1975. Analysis of carbon flow and productivity in a temperate deciduous forest ecosystem : 116-122 : i n Reichle, D. E., J. F. Franklin and D. W. Goodall (eds.). 1975. Productivity of World Ecosystems, National Acadamy of Sciences, Washington, D. C. 166 pp. Harris, W. F., R. S. Kinerson, Jr. and N. T. Edwards. 1977. Comparison of belowground biomass of natural deciduous forest and loblolly pine plantations. Pediobiologia 17:369-381. Harris, WF. and D.E. Reichle. Evaluating Forest Productivity in an Ecosystem Context. Harrison, G. W. 1979. Global stability of food chains. Am. Nat. 114(3):455-457. | Filed with Finnerty, J. P. Cycles in Canadian lynx. Harrison, G.W. Cycles in Canadian Lynx. Harrison, R. G. 1980. Dispersal polymorphisms in insects. Ann. Rev. Ecol. Syst. 11:95-118. Harvey, A. E., M. F. Jurgensen, M. J. Larsen and R. T. Graham. 1987. Decaying organic materials and soil quality in the inland Northwest: a management opportunity. U. S. Dept. Agri. For. Serv. Gen. Tech. Rep. INT-255. Harvey, A.E., M.F. Jurgensen, M.J. Larsen and R.T. Graham. 1987. Decaying Organic Materials and Soil Quality in the Inland Northwest: A Management Opportunity. USDAFS, General Technical Report INT-225. Harvey, M.J. and R.W. Barbour. 1965. Home Range of Microtus Ochogaster as Determined by a Modified Minimum Area Method. Journal of Mammalogy 46(3):398-402. Harwood, R.H. 1974. Predatory Behavior of Argiope aurantia (Lucas). The American Midland Naturalist 91(1):130-139. Hassan, F. A. 1981. Historical Nile floods and their implications for climatic change. Science 212:1142-1145. Hauser, P.M. and O.D. Duncan. 1959. Ecology and Demography. in, The Study of Population. Univecrsity of Chicago Press. Havera, S.P., C.M. Nixon and H.K. Belcher. 1985. Ovarian characteristics of fox squirrels. The American Midland Naturalist 114(2):396-399. Hawbecker, A. C. 1953. Environment of the Nelson antelope ground squirrel. J. Mamm. 34(3):324-345. Hay, M.E. 1981. Herbivory, algal distribution, and the maintenance of between-habitat diversity on a tropical fringing reef. Am. Nat. 118(4):520-540. Hayden, B.P. 1975. Storm wave climates at Cape Hatteras, North Carolina: Recent Secular Variations. Science 190:981-983. |UVA publications Hayden, B.P., R. Dolan, and P. Ross. Barrier island migration. Chapter 17. |UVA publications Hayne, D. W. 1949. Calculation of size of home range. J. Mamm. 30(1):1-18. Healy-Williams, N. 1983. Fourier shape analysis of globorotalia truncatulinoids from late quaternary sediments in the southern Indian Ocean. Mar. Micropaleontol. 8:1-15. Healy-Williams, N. 1984. Quantataive image analysis: application to planktonic foraminiferal paleoecology and evolution. Geobios, Mem. special 8:425-432. Healy-Williams, N. and D. F. Williams. 1981. Fourier analysis of test shape of planktonic foraminifera. Nature 289(5797):485- 487. Healy-Williams, N., R. Ehrlich and D. F. Williams. 1985. Morphometric and stable isotopic evidence for subpopulations of globorotalia truncatulinoids . J. Foraminaferal Research Healy-Williams, N., R. Ehrlich and D. F. Williams. 1985. Morphometric and stable isotopic evidence for subpopulations of globorotalia truncatulinoids . J. Foraminaferal Research 15(4):242-253. Heaney, L. R. 1986. Biogeography of mammals in SE Asia: estimates of rates of colonization, extinction and speciation. Biol. J. Linnean Soc. 28:127-165. Heaney, L.R. 1984. Mammalian species richness on islands on the Sunda Shelf, Southeast Asia. Oecologia 61:11-17. |Mammal Populations Coastal Insular Heaney, L.R. and B.D. Patterson. 1986. Introduction. in, Biological J. of the Linnean Society 28:i-iii. |Mammal Populations Coastal Insular Heatwole, H. and R. Levins. 1972. Trophic structure stability and faunal change during recolonization. Ecology 53(5):531-534. Heller, H. C. 1971. Altitudinal zonation of chipmunks ( eutamias ): interspecific aggression. Ecology 52(2):312-319. Henry, J.D. 1988. Outfoxing the fox. Natural History 4/88. Herbold, B. 1984. Structure of an Indiana stream fish association: choosing an appropriate model. Am. Nat. 124(4):561-572. Herlihy, A. T. and A. L. Mills. 1985. Sulfate reduction in freshwater sediments receiving acid mine drainage. Appl. Env. Microbiol. 49(1):179-186. Herr, J.M. A New Clearing-Squash Technique for the Study of Ovuel Development in Angiosperms. Amer. J. Bot. 58(8):785-790. Herrera, C.M. 1981. Combination rules among western European Parus species. Ornis Scandinavica 12:140-147. |assembly rules Herrera, C.M. 1984. A study of avian frugivores, bird-dispersed plants, and their interaction in mediterranean scrublands. Ecol. Monographs 54:1-23. Herrero, S. 1970. Injury Inflicted by Grizzly Bears. Science 170:593-598. Hespenheide, H.A. 1973. Ecological Inferences from Morphological Data. Ecology and Morphology. Hess, K. and R. R. Alexander. 1986. Forest vegetation of the Arapaho and Roosevelt National Forests in central Colorado: a habitat type classification. U. S. Dept. Agri. For. Serv. Res. Pap. RM-266. Hess, K. and R.R. Alexander. 1986. Forest Vegetation of the Arapaho and Roosevelt National Forests in Central Colorado: A Habitat Type Classification. USDAFS, Research Paper RM-266. Hett, J. M. 1971. A dynamic analysis of age in sugar maple seedlings. Ecol. 52(6):1071-1074. Hett, J. M. and O. L. Loucks. 1971. Sugar maple ( Acer saccharum marsh.) seedling mortality. J. Ecol. 59:507-520. Hett, J.M. and O.L. Loucks. 1971. Sugar Maple (Acer Saccharum Marsh) Seedling Mortality. J. of Ecology 59:507-520. Hickey, L. J. 1981. Land plant evidence compatible with gradual, not catastrophic, change at the end of the Cretaceous. Nature 292:529-531. Higgs, A. J. 1981. Island biogeography theory and nature reserve design. J. Biogeography 8:117-124. Hilborn, R. 1975. Similarities in Dispersal Tendency among Siblings in Four Species of Voles (Microtus). Ecology 56(5):1221-1225. Hilborn, R. and S. C. Stearns. 1980. Getting nicked by Occam's Razor: causality and hypotheses testing in biology. Unpubl. ms. Hill, R.W. 1983. Thermal physiology and energetics of Peromyscus: Ontogeny, Body temperature, metabolism, insulation, and microclimatology. J. Mamm. 64(1):19-37. Hixon, M.A. and W.N. Brostoff. 1983. Damselfish as keystone species in reverse: intermediate disturbance and diversity of reef algae. Science 220:511-513. Hockstra, T. W. and C. H. Flather. 1986. Theoretical basis for integrating wildlife in renewable resource inventories. J. Env. Manag. 24:95-110. Hodgson, J.R. 1972. Local Distribution of Microtus Montanus and M. Pennsylvanicus in southwestern Montana. J. of Mammology 53(3):487-499. Hoekstra, T. W. and J. H. Hof. 1985. National assessments of wildlife and fish: a technical framework. USDA Forest Service General Technical Report RM-122. Hoekstra, T.W. and C.H. Flather. 1986. Theoretical Basis for Integrating Wildlife in Renewable Resource Inventories. J. of Environmental Management 24:95-110. Hoekstra, T.W.< A.A. Dyer and D.C. Le Master. 1987. FORPLAN: An evaluation of a forest planning tool. USDA FS General Technical Report RM-140. Hoffmann, R. S. 1982. Adaptive syndromes. Science 216:873-875. Hoffmeyer, I. 1973. Interaction and habitat selection in the mice Apodemus flavicollis and A. sylvaticus . Oikos 24(1):108-116. Holbrook, S. J. 1977. Rodent faunal turnover and prehistoric community stability in northwest New Mexico. Am. Nat. 111(982):1195-1208. Holbrook, S.J. 1979. Habitat utilization, competitive interactions, and coexistence of three species of cricetine rodents in east-central arizona. Ecology 60(4):758-769. Holgate, P. Some New Tests of Randomness. Holling, C.S. 1973. Resilience and Stability of Ecological Systems. Holling, C.S. The Components of Predation as Revealed by a Study of Small-Mammal Predation of the European Pine Sawfly. The Canadian Entomologist 91:293-320. Holmes, R. T., R. E. Bonney, Jr. and S. W. Pacala. 1979. Guild structure of the Hubbard Brook bird community: a multivariate approach. Ecology 60:512-520. Holmes, R. T., R. E. Bonney, Jr. and S. W. Pacala. 1979. Guild structure of the Hubbard Brook bird community: a multivariate approach. Ecology 60:512-520. Holt, R.D. 1977. Predation, Apparent Competition and the Structure of Prey Communities. Theoretical Population Biology 12(2):197-229. Holt, R.D. 1984. Spatial heterogeneity, indirect interactions, and the coexistence of prey species. Am. Nat. 124(3):377-406. Hooper, R. G., A. F. Robinson, Jr. and J. A. Jackson. 1980. The red-cockaded woodpecker: notes on life history and management. U. S. Dept. Agri. Forest Service General Report SA-GR 9. Hopkins, R. B., J. F. Cassel and A. J. Bjugstad. 1986. Relationships between breeding birds and vegetation in four woodland types of the Little Missouri National Grasslands. U. S. Dept. Agri. For. Serv. Res. Pap. RM-270. Hopkins, R.B., J.F. Cassel, and A.J. Bjugstad. Relationships Between Breeding Birds and Vegetation in Four Woodland Types of the Little Missouri National Grasslands. USDAFS Research Paper RM-270. Horn, H. S. 1975. Forest succession. Sci. Amer. 232(5):90-98,122. Horn, H.S. 1966. Measurement of "OVerlap" in Comparative Ecological Studies. The American Naturalist 100(914):419-424. Horn, H.S. 1968. Regulation of animal numbers: a model counter- example. Ecology 49:776-778. Horn, H.S. 1968. Regulaton of Animal Numbers: A Model of Counter- Example. Ecology 49(4):776-778. Horn, H.S. and R.H. Mac Arthur. 1972. Competition Among Fugitive Species in a Harlequin Environment. Ecology 53(4):749-752. Horn, H.S. and R.M. May. 1977. Limits to similarity among coexisting competitors. Nature 270:660-661. Horsfall, F., R.E. Webb, and R.E. Byers. 1974. Dual Role of Forbs and Rodenticides in the Ground Spray Control of Pine Mice. 6th Vert. Pest. Conf, Anaheim, CA. March 5-7. Houston, B.R., T.W. Clark, and S.C. Minta. 1986. Habitat suitability index model for the balck-footed ferret: a method to locate transplant sites. Great Basin Naturalist Memoirs 8:99-114. Houston, D.B. 1975. A Comment on the History of the Northern Yellowstone Elk. BioScience 25(9):578-579. Howard, A.D. 1982. Equilibrium and time sclaes in geomorphology: application to sand-bed alluvial streams. Earth Surface Processes and Landforms 7:303-325. Howe, H. F. 1986. Seed dispersal by fruit-eating birds and mammals. in Seed dispersal. Ed. D. R. Murray. Academic Press Australia. 123-189. Howe, H. F. 1986. Seed dispersal by fruit-eating birds and mammals. in Seed dispersal. Ed. D. R. Murray. Academic Press Australia. 123-189. Howe, R. W. 1984. Local dynamics of bird assemblages in small forest habitat islands in Australia and North America. Ecology 65(5):1585-1601. Hueston, W. 1975. Vegetational Habitat Preference in Two Small Mammal Species. Huey, R.B. 1974. Behavioral Thermoregulation in Lizards: Importance of Associated Costs. Science 184:1001-1003. Huey, R.B., E.R. Pianka, M.E. Egan, and L.W. Coons. Ecological Shifts in Sympatry: Kalahari Burrowing Lizards. Manuscript. Jones, D. 1984. Use, Misuse and Role of Multiple-Comparison Procedures in Ecological and Agricultural Entomology. FORUM: Environmental Entomology13(3):635-649. Hughes, T.P. 1984. Population dynamics based on individual size rather than age: a general model with a reef coral example. Am. Nat. 123:778-795. Hughes, T.P. and J.H. Connell. 1987. Population dynamics based on size or age? A reef-coral analysis. Am. Nat. 129(6):818-829. Humphrey, S.R. and D.B. Barbour. 1981. Status and habitat of three subspecies of Peromyscus polionotus in Florida. Journal of Mammology 62(4):840-844. |Mammal Populations Coastal Insular Humphry, S. R. 1974. Zooeography of the nine-banded armadillo ( Dasypus novemcintus ) in the United States. BioSci. 24(8):457-462. Hunt, G.L. and M.W. Hunt. 1974. Trophic levels and turnover rates: the avifauna of Santa Barbara Island, California. Hunt, R. M., Jr. 1983. Miocene burrows of extinct bear dogs: indication of early denning behavior of large mammalian carnivores. Science 221:364-366. Hurlbert, S.H. 1984. Pseudoreplication and the design of ecological field experiments. Ecological Monographs 54(2):187-211. Hurlbert, S.H. and J. Zedler. Ecosystem Alteration by Mosquitofish Predation. Sceincey 175:639-641. Husband, T.P. 1976. Energy metabolism and body composition of the fox squirrel. J. Wildl. Manage. 40(2):255-263. Hutchinson, G.E. 1944. Limnological Studies in Connecticutt, VII. A Critical Examination of the Supposed Relationship Between Phytoplankton Periodicity and Chemiocal Changes in Lake Waters. Ecology 25(1):3-26. Hutchinson, G.E. 1951. Copepodology for the Ornithologist. Ecology 32(3):571-577. Hutchinson, G.E. 1957. Concluding Remarks. Cold Springs Harobor Symposium on Quantitative Biology. 22:415-427. Hutchinson, G.E. 1959. Homage to Santa Rosalia or Why are there so many kinds of animals? Am. Nat. 93:145-159. Hutchinson, G.E. 1961. The Paradox of the Plankton. The American Naturalist 45(882):137-145. Innis, G. 1972. The Second Derivative and Population Modelling: Another View. Ecology 53(4):720-723. Innis, G.S. 1979. Faculty dynamics. Simulation Councils. Island Patterns and Processes, Chapter 16. |equilibrium model Island biogeography. Chapter |equilibrium theory |density compensation Iverson, D. C. and R. M. Alston. 1986. The genesis of FORPLAN: a historical and analytical review of forest service planning models. U. S. Dept. Agri. For. Serv. Gen. Tech. Rep. INT-214. Iverson, D.C. and R.M. Alston. 1986. The Genesis of FORPLAN: A Historical and Analytical Review of Forest Service Planning Models. USDAFS, General Technical Report INT-214. Iverson, S.L. and B.N. Turner. 1972. Winter Coexistence of Clethrionomys gapperi and Microtus pennsylvanicus in a Grassland Habitat. The American Midland Naturalist 88(2):440- 445. Iverson, S.L. and B.N. Turner. 1975. Seasonal Variation in Body Composition of the Meadow Vole (Microtus pennsylvanicus). Prairie: A Multiple View. The University of Oklahoma Press: Grand Forks, ND. Jackson, J.B.C. 1981. Interspecific competition and species distributions: the ghosts of theories and data past. Amer. Zool. 21:889-901. |competition |dabate |evidence |reviews Jaeger, M.M. 1982. Feeding Pattern in Peromyscus maniculatus: The Response to Periodic Food Deprivation. Physiology and Behavior 28:83-88. Jaeger, R. 1976. A Model for the Organization of Terrestrial Salamander Communities. Presentation at the University of Virginia Dec. 10, 1976. Jaeger, R. G. 1981. Birds as inefficient predators on terrestrial salamanders. Am. Nat. 117:835-837. Jaeger, R. G. and A. M. Rubin. 1982. Forraging tactics of a terrestrial salamander: judging prey profitability. J. An. Ecol. 51:167-176. Jaeger, R. G. and D. E. Barnard. 1981. Foraging tactics of a terrestrial salamander, choice of diet in structurally simple environments. Am. Nat. 117(5):639-664. Jaeger, R. G., D. E. Barnard and R, G, Joseph. 1982. Foraging tactics of a terrestrial salamander: assessing prey density. Am. Nat. 119:885-890. Jaeger, R. G., K. C. B. Nishikawa and D. E. Barnard. 1983. Foraging tactics of a terrestrial salamander: costs of territorial defence. Anim. Behav. 31:191-198. Jaeger, R.G, R.G. Joseph and D.E. Barnard. 1981. Foraging tactics of a terrestrial salamander: sustained yield in territories. Anim. Bahav. 29:1100-1105. Jaeger, R.G. 1974. Competetive exclusion: comments on survival and extinction of species. BioScience 24(1):33-39. Jaeger, R.G. 1974. Competitive Exclusion: Coments on Survival and Extinction of Species. BioScience 24(1):33-39. Jaeger, R.G. 1974. Competitive Exclusion: Comments on Survival and Extinction of Species. BioScience 24(1):33-39. Jaeger, R.G. 1974. Interference or exploitation? A second look at competition between salamanders. J. of Herpetology 8(3):191- 194. |scientific method Jaeger, R.G., K.C.V. Nishikawa and D.E Barnard. 1983. Foraging Tactics of a Terrestrial Salamander: Costs of Territorial Defence. Animal Behavior 31:191-198. James F. C. 1983. Environmental component of morphological differentiation in birds. Science 221:184-186. James, D.A. and M.J. Lockerd. Refinement of the Shugart-Patten- Dueser Model for Analyzing Ecological Niche Patterns. Wildlife 2000. James, F. C. 1971. Ordinations of habitat relationships among the breeding birds. Wil. Bull. 83(3):215-236. Jarvinen, O. 1978. Estimating relative densities of land birds by point counts. Ann. Zool. Fennici 15:290-293. James, F. C. 1971. Ordinations of habitat relationships among the breeding birds. Wil. Bull. 83(3):215-236. James, F. C. 1971. Ordinations of habitat relationships among the breeding birds. Wil. Bull. 83(3):215-236. James, F.C. 1971. Ordinations of habitat relationships among breeding birds. The Wilson Bulletin 83(3):215-236. James, F.C. 1971. Ordinations of habitat relationships among breeding birds. The Wilson Bulletin 83(3):215-236. James, F.C. and H.H. Shugart. 1970. A quantitative method of habitat description. Audubon Field Notes 24(6):727-736. James, F.C. and H.H. Shugart. 1974. The Phenology of the Nesting Season of the American Robin (Turdus migratorius) in the United States. The Condor 76(2):159-168. James, F.C. and N.O. Wamber. 1982. Relationships between temperate forest bird communities and vegetation structure. Ecology 63(1):159-171. James, F.C. and N.O. Wamer. 1982. Relationships between temperate forest bird communities and vegetation structure. Ecology 63(1):159-171. James, F.C., R.F. Johnston, N.O. Wamer, G.J. Niemi, and W.J. Boecklen. 1984. The Grinneellian niche of the wood thrush. Am. Nat. 124:17-30. Janpen, D.H. 1983. No park is an island: increase in interference from outside as park size decreases. Oikos 41:402-410. |conservation Janzen, D.H. 1967. Why Mountain Passes are Higher in the Tropics. The American Naturalist 101(919):233-249. Janzen, D.H. 1973. Tropical Agroecosystems. Science 182:1212- 1219. Janzen, D.H. 1982. Removal of seeds from horse dung by tropical rodents: influence of habitat and amount of dung. Ecology 63(6):1887-1900. Janzen, D.H. 1988. Tropical Ecological and Biocultural Restoration. Science 239:243-244. Janzen, D.H. The eternal external threat. Chapter 13:286-303. Janzen,, D.H. 1980. When is it coevolution? Evolution 34(3):611- 612. Jarvenen, O. 1984. Dismemberment of parts: a reply to Willis on subdivision of reserves. Oikos 42:402-403. |conservation Jarvinen, O. 1978. Species richness of small mammals in Finland. Oikos 31:253-256. Jarvinen, O. and R. A. Vaisanen. 1977. Long-term changes of the North European land bird fauna. Oikos 29:225-228. Jarvinen, O. and R. A. Vaisanen. 1978. Recent changes in forest bird populations in northern Finland. Ann. Zool. Fennici 15:279-289. Jarvinen, O. and R. A. Vaisanen. 1979. Changes in bird populations as criteria of environmental changes. Holarct. Ecol. 2:75-80. Jarvinen, O. and Y. Haila. Assembly of land bird communities on northern islands: a quantitative analysis of insular impoverishment. Chapter 10. |community assembly Jarvinen, O., J. Kouki, and U. Hayrinen. 1987. Reversed latitudinal gradients in total density and species richness of birds breeding on Finnish mires. Ornis Fennica 64:00-00. Jenkins, J.H., J.R. Monroe and F.B. Golley. 1969. Comparison of Fallout 137Cs Accumulation and Excretion in Certain Southeatern Mammals. Proceedings of the Second National Symposium on Radioecology Ann Arbor, MI, May 15-17, 1967. Jensen, J.N. and D.I. Rasmussen. 1971. Serum albumins in natural populations of Peromyscus. J. Mamm. 52(3):508-514. Jensen, J.N., J.R. Merkle, and D.I. Rasmussen. 1976. Locus number and multiple hemogoblins in Eutamias and Peromyscus. Biochemical Genetics, vol. 14 (7/8):541-545. Jewell, P.A., P.J. Fullagar. Body measurements of small mammals: sources of error and anatomical changes. Notes on British Mammals - No. 14. Jike, L., G.O. Batzli and L.L. Getz. 1988. Home ranges of prairie voles as determined by radiotracking and by powdertracking. J. Mamm. 69(1):183-186. Johanson, D.C. and M.A. Edey. How Ape Became Man. Is it a Matter of Sex? Science 89:45-49. Johanson, D.C. and T.D. White. 1979. A systematic assessment of early African homonids. Science 203(4378):321-330. Johnson, A. 1981. The scientific ideas of G. K. Gilbert. (Book Review) Science 212:790-791. Johnson, C. 1964. The Evolution of Territoriality in the Odonta. Evolution 18(1):89-91. Johnson, C.G. 1963. The Aerial Migration of Insects. Scientific American . Johnson, E.A. and J.L. Kovner. 1956. Effect on Streamflow of Cutting a Forest Understory. Forest Science 2(2):82-91. Johnson, M.P. and D.S. Simberloff. 1974. Environmental Determinants of Island Species Numbers in the British Isles. J. of Biogeography 1:149-154. Johnson, M.P. and P.H. Raven. 1973. Species Number and Endemism: The Galapogos Archipelago Revisited Science 179:893-895. Johnson, M.P. and P.H. Raven. 1973. Species number and endemism: The Galapagos Archipelago revisited. Science 176:893-895. Johnson, M.P., L.G. Mason, and P.H. Raven. Ecological Parameters and Plant Species Diversity. The American Naturalist 102(926):297-306. Johnson, N.K. 1975. Controls of Number of Bird Species on Montane Islands in the Great Basin. Evolution 29(3):545-567. Johnson, N.K. 1975. Controls of Number of Bird Species on Montane Islands in the Great Basin. Evolution 29:545-567. Johnson, R.A., M.F. Willson, J.H. Thompson, and R.I. Bertin. 1985. Nutritional values of wild fruits and consumption by migrant frugivorous birds. Ecology 66(3):819-827. Johnson, W. C. 1977. A mathematical model of forest succession and land use for the North Carolina Piedmont. Bullatin of the Torrey Botanical Club 104(4):334-346. Jolicoeur, P. and J. E. Mosimann. 1960. Size and shape variation in the painted turtle, a principal component analysis. Growth 24:339-354. Jolicoeur, P. and J. E. Mosimann. 1960. Size and shape variation in the painted turtle, a principal component analysis. Growth 24:339-354. Jones, D.D. and C.J. Walters. 1976. Catastrophe Theory and Fisheries Regulation. Journal of Fisheries Research Board of Canada 33(12):2829-2833. Jonsson, B. 1981. An electronic caliper with automatic data storage. Forest Science 27(4):765-770. Jonsson, B. and B. Matern. 1982. Sample plots on sloping ground. Forest Sci. 28(1):2-4. Jordan, C. F. 1981. Do ecosystems exist? Am. Nat. 118:284-287. Jordan, C. F. 1982. The nutrient balance of an Amazonian rain forest. Ecol. 63(3):647-654. | Amazonian rain forest -- atmospheric input -- leaching | nutrient balance -- nutrients Jordan, C. F. and R. Herrerra. 1981. Tropical rain forests: are nutrients really critical? Am. Nat. 117(2):167-180. Jordan, C.F. 1981. Do Ecosystems Exist? The American Naturalist 118:284-287. Jordan, C.F. The Nutrient Balance of an Amazonian Rain Forest. Ecology 63(3):647-654. Jordan, C.F. and R. Herrera. 1981. Tropical Rain Forests: Are Nutrients Really Critical? The American Naturalist 117(2):167-180. Jordan, J.S. 1948. A Midsummer Study of the Southern Flying Squirrel. J. of Mammalogy 29(1):44-48. Jordan, J.S. 1971. Dispersal Period in a population of Eastern Fox Squirrels. USDAFS, Research Paper NE-216. Jordon, C.F. Productivity of a tropical forest and its relation to a world pattern of energy storage. Chapter in book. Unknown. Jorgensen, C. D. 1968. Hoome range as a measure of probable interactions among populations of small mammals. J. Mamm. 49(1):104-112. Jorgensen, C. D. 1968. Spatial relationships of Perognathus longimembris (coues) in southern Nevada. Proc. Utah Acad. Sci., Arts and Letters 45(1):118-125. Jorgensen, C. D. and W. W. Tanner. 1963. The application of the density probability funstion to determine the home ranges of Uta stansburiana stansburiana and Cnemidophorus tigris tigris . Herpetologica 19(2):105-115. Jorgensen, C.D. 1968. Home Range as a Measure of Probable interactions Among Populations of Small Mammals. J. of Mammalogy 49(1):104-112. Joslin, J.K. Visual Cues Used in Orientation by White-footed Mice, Peromyscus leucopus: a Laboratory Study. The American Midland Naturalist 98(2):308-319. Joule, J. and Cameron, G. N. 1975. Species removal studies. I. Dispersal strategies of sympatric Sigmodon hispidus and Reithrodontomys fulvescens populations. J. Mamm. 56(2):378- 396. Joule, J. and D.L. Jameson. 1972. Experimental Manipulation of Population Density in Three Sympatric Rodents. Ecology 53(4):653-660. Joule, J. and D.L. Jameson. 1972. Experimental manipulation of population density in three sympatric rodents. Judson, S. 1968. Erosion of the Land, or What's Happening to Our Continents? American Scientist 56(4):356-374. Jukes, T.H. DDT Stands Trial Again. BioScience 22(11):670-672. Justice, K. E. 1961. A new method for measuring home ranges of small mammals. J. Mamm. 42(4):462-470. Kachi, N. and T. Hirose. 1979. Multivariate approaches to the plant communities related with edaphic factors in the dune system at Azigaura, Ibaraki Pref. I. Association-Analysis. Jap. J. Ecol. 29:17-27. Kachi, N. and T. Hirose. 1979. Multivariate approaches to the plant communities related with edaphic factors in the dune system at Azigaura, Ibaraki Pref. II. Ordination. J. Ecol. 29:359-368. Kachi, N. and T. Hirose. 1983. Limiting nutrients for plant growth in coastal sand dune soils. J. Ecol. 71:937-944. Kaikusalo, A. and I. Hanski. 1985. Population dynamics of Sorex araneus and S. ceacutien in Finnish Lapland. Acta Zool. Fennica 173:283-285. Kantak, G. E. 1983. Behavioral, seed preference and habitat selection experiments with two sympatric peromyscus species. The Am. Mid. Nat. 109(2):246-252. Kaplan, J.L. and J.A. Yorke. Competitive Exclusion and Nonequilibrium Coexistence. The American Naturalist. Kareiva, P. 1982. Exclusion experiments and the competitive release of insects feeding on collards. Ecol. 63(3):696-704. | collards -- exclusion experiments -- flea beetles | interspecific competition -- plant-herbivore interactions Karr, J.R. 1982. Avian extinction on Barro Colorado island, Panama: a reassessment. Am. Nat. 119(2):220-239. Karr, J.R. 1982. Population variability and extinction in the avifauna of a tropical land bridge island. Ecology 63(6):1975-1978. Karr, J.R. 1983. Commentary on: Avian community ecology: an iconoclastic view. Karr, J.R. and K.E. Freemark. 1983. Habitat selection and environmental gradients: dynamics in the "stable" tropics. Ecology 64(6):1481-1494. Karr, J.R., D.W. Schemske, and N.V.L. Brokaw. 1982. Temporal variation in the understory bird community of a tropical forest. in, The Ecology of a Tropical Forest: Seasonal Rhythms and Long-term Change. Smithsonian Institution Press, Wash. D.C. Katz, R.W. 1983. Statistical Procedures for Making Inferences about Precipitation Changes Simulated by an Atmospheric General Circulation Model. J. of Atmospheric Sciences 40:2193-2201. Kaufman, D. W., M. W. Courtney and P. R. Chu. 1982. The first three years of NSF's population biology and physiological ecology program. BioSci. 32(1):51-53. Kaufman, D.W. and G.A. Kaufman. 1975. Caloric Density of the Old- Field Mouse During Postnatal Growth. Acta Theriologica 20(6):83-95. Kaufman, D.W. and G.A. Kaufman. 1975. Prediction of Elemental Content in the Old-Field Mouse in, Mineral Cycling in Southeastern Ecosystems. ERDA Symposium Series (CONF-740513). Kaufman, D.W. and G.A. Kaufman. 1982. Sex ration in natural populations of Peromyscus maniculatus. The American Midland Naturalist 108(2):376-380. |Species of interest Kaufman, D.W., G.A. Kaufman and J.G. Wiener. Energy Equivalents for Sixteen Species of Xeric Rodents. J. of Mamm. 56(4):946- 949. Kaufman, D.W., J.B. Gentry, G.A. Kaufman, M.H. Smith and J.G. Wiener. Density Estimation of Small Mammals: Comparison of Techniques Utilizing Removal Trapping. Acta Theriologica 23(7):147-171. Kaufman, D.W., M.J. O'Farrell, G.A. Kaufman, and S.E. Fuller. 1976. Digestibility and Elemental Assimilation in Cotton Rats. Acta Theriologica 21(9):147-156. Kaufman, D.W., R.K. Selander and M.H. Smith. 1973. Genic Heterozygosity in a Population of Eutamias Panamintinus. J. of Mamm. 54(3):776-778. Kaufman, G.A. and D.W. Kaufman. 1975. Effects of Age, Sex, and Pelage Phenotype on the Elemental Composition of the Old- Field Mouse. in, Mineral Cycling in Southeastern Ecosystems. ERDA Symposium Series (CONF-740513). Kaufman, G.A. and D.W. Kaufman. 1977. Body Composition of the Old-Field Mouse (Peromyscus Polionotus). J. of Mammalogy 58(3):429-434. Kaufman, G.A. and J. W. Gibbons. 1975. Weight-Length Relationships in Thirteen Species of Snakes in the Southeastern United States. Herpetologica 31(1):31-37. Kaufman, G.A., D.W. Kaufman and E.J. Finck. 1988. Influence of fire and topography on habitat selection by peromyscus maniculatus and Rwithrodontomys megalotis in ungrazed tallgrass prairie. J. Mamm. 69(2):342-352. Kaufman, M.R. and E.L. Fiscus. 1985. Water transport through plants - Internal integration of edaphic and atmospheric effects. Acta Horticulturae Number 171:83-93. Kaufmann, M. R. and E. L. Fiscus. 1985. Water transport through plants - internal integration of edaphic and atmospheric effects. Acta Horticulturae 171:83-93. Kaufmann, M.R. 1985. Annual Transpiration in Subalpine Forests: Large Differences Among Four Tree Species. Forest Ecology and Management 13:235-246. Keane, R.E., II. 1987. Forest succession in Western Montana - a computer model designed for resource managers. USDA FS INT- 376, October 1987. Kearney, M.S. and B.H. Luckman. 1983. Holocene timberline fluctuations in Jasper National Park, Alberta. Science 221:261-263. Keever, C. 1973. Distrbution of major forest species in southeastern Pennsylvania. Ecol. Monographs 43:303-327. | forest survey -- site studies Keller, B.L. and C.J. Krebs. 1970. Microtus Population Biology: III. Reproductive Change in Fluctuating Populations of M. Ochrogaster and M. Pennsylvanicus in Southern Indiana. 1965- 67. Ecological Monographs 40(3);263-294. Kelly, J. M., G. M. Van Dyne and W. F. Harris. 1974. Comparison of three methods of assessing grassland productivity and biomass dynamics. Am. Mid. Nat. 92(2):357-369. Kelly, M.G., G.M. Hornberger and B.J. Cosby. 1974. Continuous automated measurement of rates of photosynthesis and respiration in an undisturbed river community. Limnology and Oceanography 19(2):305-312. Kendeigh, S.C. and G.C. West. 1965. Caloric Values of Plant Seeds Eaten by Birds. Ecology 46(4):553-555. Kennedy, C. R., A. O. Bush and J. M. Aho. 1985. Patterns in helminth communities: why are birds and fish different? Parasitology 93:205-215. Kennedy, C. R., A. O. Bush and J. M. Aho.. in Bulletin of Carnegie Museum of Natural History (6). Ed. D. A. Schlitter. Carnegie Mus. Nat. Hist., Pittsburgh, PA. pp. 138-145. Kent, D. V. 1977. An estimate of the duration of the faunal change at the Cretaceous-Tertiary boundary. Geology 5:769- 771. Kenward, R. Wildlife Radio Tagging, Equipment Field Techniques and Data Analysis. Academic Press: Kerfoot, W. C., W. R. DeMott and C. Levitan. 1985. Nonlinearities in competitive interactions: component variables or system response? Ecol. 63(3):959-965. Kerr, R. A. 1977. Carbon dioxide and climate: carbon budget still unbalanced. Science 197:1352-1353. Kerr, R. A. 1983. An early glacial two-step? Science 221:143-144. Kerr, R. A. 1983. Orbital variation- ice age link strengthened. Science 219:272-274. Kerr, R.A. 1977. Carbon Dioxide and Climate: Carbon Budget Still Unbalanced. Science 197:1352-1353. Kerr, R.A. 1980. The Bits and Pieces of Plate Tectonics. Science 207(7):1059-1061. Kerr, R.A. 1983. Carbon dioxide and a changing climate. Science 222:491. Kerr, R.A. 1985. Wild String of Winters Confirmed. Science 227:506. Kershaw, K. A. 1973. Quantatative and dynamic plant ecology. 2nd ed. pp. 128-167. Klotz, L. H. 1986. The vascular flora of Wallops Island and Wallops Mainland, Virginia. Castanea 51:306-326. Kershaw, K.A. 1973. The Poisson Series and the Detection of Non- Randomness. in, Quantitative and Dynamic Plant Ecology 2nd Edition. Kettlewell, H. B. D. 1959. Darwin's missing evidence. Sci. Amer. March 1959. Khrone, D.T. and M.S. Miner. Removal trapping stidues of dispersal in Peromyscus leucopus . Manuscript. Kilpatrick, C. W. 1981. Genetic structure of insular populations. in Mammalian population genetics. Eds. M. H. Smith and J. Joule. U. of GA Press, Athens. 28-59. Kilpatrick, C. W. 1981. Genetic structure of insular populations. in Mammalian population genetics. Eds. M. H. Smith and J. Joule. U. of GA Press, Athens. 28-59. Kilpatrick, C. W. 1981. Genetic structure of insular populations. in Mammalian population genetics. Eds. M. H. Smith and J. Joule. U. of GA Press, Athens. 28-59. Kilpatrick, C. W., S. C. Forrest and T. W. Clark. 1986. Estimating genetic variation in the black-footed ferret -- a first attempt. Great Basin Naturalist Memoirs 8:145-149. Kilpatrick, C. W., S. C. Forrest and T. W. Clark. 1986. Estimating genetic variation in the black-footed ferret -- a first attempt. Great Basin Naturalist Memoirs 8:145-149. Kilpatrick, C.W., S.C. Forrest and T.W. Clark. 1986. Estimating genetic variation in the black-footed ferret - a first attempt. Great Basin Naturalist Memoirs 8:145-149. Kilpatrick, W.C. 1981. Genetic Structure of insular populations. in, Mammalian Population Genetics, Smith, M.H. and J. Joule (eds). Kimura, M. The Neutral Theory of Molecular Evolution. 98-126. Kincaid, W.B. and G.N. Cameron. 1982. Effects of species removal on resource utilization in a Texas rodent community. J. Mamm. 63(2):229-235. Kincaid, W.B., G.N. Cameron, and B.A. Carnes. 1983. Patterns of habitat utilization in sympatric rodents on the Texas Coastal Prairie. Ecology 64(6):1471-1480. King, A.W. and S.L. Pimm. Complexity, Diversity and Stability: a Reconciliation of theoretical and empirical results. Manuscript. King, C.E. 1964. Relative Abundance of Species and MacArthur's Model. Ecology 45(4):716-727. King, D. and J. Roughgarden. 1982. Graded allocation between vegetative and reproductive growth for annual plants in growing seasons of random length. Theoretical Population Biology 22(1):1-16. King, D. and J. Roughgarden. 1982. Multiple switches between vegetative and reproductive growth in annual plants. Theoretical Population Biology 21(2):194-204. King, D. and J. Roughgarden. 1983. Energy allocation patterns of the California grassland annuals Plantago erecta and Clarkia rubicunda. Ecology 64(1):16-24. Kirkland, G. L., Jr. 1981. The microdistribution of small mammals at the coniferous-deciduous forest interface. Nat. Geog. Soc. Res. Reports 13:329-336. Kirkland, G. L., Jr. 1982. Clearcuts - small mammals. in Handbook of census methods for terrestrial vertabrates. Ed. D. E. Davis. CRC Press, Boca Raton, Florida. pp. 327-328. Kirkland, G. L., Jr. 1985. Small mammal communities in temperate North American forests. Aust. Mammal. 8:137-144. | small mammals -- communities -- temperate forests | North America - - Soricidae -- diversity -- omnivores -- | sympatric congeners Kirkland, G. L., Jr. and D. F. Schmidt. 1982. Abundance, habitat, reprodution and morphology of forest-dwelling small mammals of Nova Scotia and southeastern New Brunswick. Can. Field- Nat. 96(2):156-162. | small mammals -- abundance -- reproduction -- Nova Scotia | New Brunswick -- Sorex dispar - - Microtus chrotorrhinus Kirkpatrick, R.L. and G.L. Valentine. 1970. Reproduction in Captive Pine Voles, Microtus Pinetorum. J. Mamm. 51(4):779- 785. Kitchings, J.T., H.H. Shugart and J.D. Story. 1974. Environmental Impacts Associated with Electric Transmission Lines. Oak Ridge National Laboratory ORNL-TM-4498. Klomp, H. Intraspecific Competition and the Regulation of Insect Numbers. Ann. Rev Entomol. 9:17-40. Klomp, H. Intraspecific competition and the regulation of insect numbers. Klopfer, P. H. 1981. Islands as models. BioSci. 31(11):838- 839. Kluge, A. G. 1982. The ccladistic perspective. (Book Review) Science 215:51-52. Knee, C. 1983. Squirrel energetics. Mamal Rev. 13(2/3/4):113-122. Knight, R.L. and D.P. Swaney. 1981. In defense of ecosystems. Am. Nat. 117:991-992. Knoppien, P. 1984. The rare male mating advantage: an artifact caused by marking procedures? Am. Nat. 123:862-866. Kochel, R. C. and V. R. Baker. 1982. Paleoflood hydrology. Science 215:353-360. Koenig, W.D. and F.A. Pitelka. Inbreeding and Juvenile Mortality in Small Populations of Ungulates. Science 206(30):1101-1105. Koeppl, J. W. , G. W. Korch, N. A. Slade, and J. P. Airoldi. 1985. Robust statistics for spatial analysis: the center of activity. Occasional Papers of the Museum of Natural History The University of Kansas 115:1-14. Koeppl, J.W., N.A. Slade and R.W. Turner. 1979. Spatial Associations of Rattur Exulans in Central Java, Indonesia. J. Mamm. 60(4):795-802. Kohn, A. J. and A. C. Riggs. 1982. Sample size dependance in measures of proportional similatiry. Mar. Ecol. Prog. Ser. 9:147-151. Kolata, G.B. 1974. Theoretical ecology: beginnings of a predictive science. Science 183:400- |scientific method Koplin, J.R. and R.S. Hoffmann. 1968. Habitat overlap and competitive exclusion in voles (Microtus). The American Midland Naturalist 80(2):494-507. Kostelecka-Myrcha, A. and A. Myrcha. 1964. The Rate of Passage of Foodstuffs thriugh the Alimentary Tracts of Certain Microtidae Under Laboratory Conditions. Acta Theriologica 9(4):37-53. Kovacic, D. A., M. I. Dyer and A. T. Cringan. 1985. Kovacic, D. A., M. I. Dyer and A. T. Cringan. 1985. Understory biomass in Ponderosa Pine follwing Mountain Pine Beetle infestation. Forest Ecology and Management 13:53-67. KozLowski, T. T. and T. Keller. 1966. Food relations of woody plants. Botan. Rev. 32(4):293-382. Kozlowski, T. T. 1980. Impact of air pollution on forest ecosystems. BioSci. 30(2):88-93. Krebs, C. J. 1977. Competition between Microtus pennsylvanicus and Microtus ochrogaster . The Am. Mid. Nat. 97(1):42-49. Krebs, C. J. 1977. Competition between Microyus pennsylvanicus and Microtus ochrogaster . The Am. Mid. Nat. 97(1):42-49. Krebs, C. J., I. Wingate, J. LeDuc, J. A. Redfield, M. Taitt and R. Hillborn. 1976. Microtus popuolation biology: Dispersal in fluctuating populations of M. towsendii . Can. J. Zool. 54(1):79-95. Krebs, C.J. 1963. Lemming Cycle at Baker Lake, Canada, during 1959-62. Science 140:674-675. Krebs, C.J. 1966. Demographic Changes in Fluctuating Populations of Microtus Californicus. Ecological Monographs 36(3):239- 273. Krebs, C.J. and I. Wingate. 1976. Small Mammal Communities of the Kluane Region, Yukon Territory. The Canadian Field-Naturalist 90(4):379-389. Krebs, C.J. and J.H. Myers. Population Cycles in Small Mammals. Krebs, C.J., M.S. Gaines, B.L. Keller, J.H. Meyers, and R.H. Tamarin. 1973. Population cycles in small rodents. Science 179:34-41. Krebs, C.J., M.S. Gaines, B.L. Keller, J.H. Myers and R.H. Tamarin. Population Cycles in Small Rodents. Science 179:34- 41. Kricher, J.C. 1972. Bird Species Diversity: The Effect of Species Richness and Equitability on the Diversity Index. Ecology 53(2):279-282. Krohne, D. T. and M. S. Miner. 1984. Removal trapping studies of dispersal in Peromyscus leucopus . Can. J. Zool. 1984. Krohne, D.T. 1982. Demographic structure in Peromyscus leucopus. Abstract from 1982 Proceedings of the Indiana Academy of Science. Krohne, D.T. 1982. The demography of low-litter-size populations of Microtus californicus. Can. J. of Zool. 60:368-374. Kruskal W.H. and J.M. Tanur. 1978. Tests of Significance. in, International Encyclopedia of Statistics Vol.2 The Free Press: Macmillan Publ. Co.: New York. Kuno, E. 1971. Sampling error as a misleading artifact in "Key Factor Analysis". Res. Popul. Ecol. 13:28-45. Kunz, T.H. Resource Utilization: Temporal and Spatial Components of Bat Activity in Central Iowa. J. of Mammalogy 54(1):14-32. Kuris, A.M. and A.R. Blaustein. 1977. Ectoparasitic Mites on Rodents: Application of the Island Biogeography Theory? Science 195:596-597. Kurzejeski, E.W. and B.G. Root. 1988. Survival of reintroduced ruffed grouse in North Missouri. J. Wildl. Mgmt. 52(2):248- 252. Kushlan, J.A. 1976. Environmental Stability and Fish Community Diversity. Ecology 57:821-825. LaBarbera, M. 1983. Why the wheels won' go. Am. Nat. 121(3):395- 408. LaMarche, V.C. 1974. Paleoclimatic Inferences from Long Tree-Ring Records. Science 183(4129):1043-1048. Lack, D. 1950. Population Ecology in Birds: A Review. Proceedings of the Xth International Ornithological Congress 410-448. Lack, D. 1953. Darwin's Finches. Scientific American. Lack, D. 1956. Variations in the Reproductive Rate of Birds. Proceedings of the Royal Society, B, 45:329-333. Lack, D. 1969. Tit Niches in Two Worlds: Or homage to Evelyn Hutchinson. The American Naturalist 103(929):43-49. Lacy, R.C. 1987. Loss of genetic diversity from managed populations: interacting effects of drift, mutation, immigration, selection, and population subdivision. Conservation Biology 1(2):143-158. Lamb, T. and J.C. Avise. 1986. Directional introgression of mitochondrial DNA in a hybrid population of tree frogs: The influence of mating behavior. Proc. Nat'l Acad. Sci. 83:2526- 2530. Larkin, P.A. 1956. Interspecific competition and population control in freshwater fish. J. Fish Res. Bd. Canada 13:327- 342. Larson, W. E., F. J. Pierce and R. H. Dowdy. 1983. The threat of soil erosion to long-term crop production. Science 219:458- 465. | agriculture Lau, R.R. and D.R. Young. 1988. Influence of physiological integration on survivorship and water relations in a clonal herb. Ecology 69(1):215-219. Laughlin, W.S. 1963. Eskimos and Aluets: Their Origins and Evolution. Science 142:633-646. Laughlin, W.S. 1968. Guide to Human Population Studies. Arctic Anthropology 1:32-47. Laughlin, W.S. 1975. Aleuts: Ecosystem, Holocene History, and Siberian Origin. Science 189(4202):507-515. Lawler, T. E. 1986. Comparative biogeography of mammals on islands. Biol. J. Linnean Soc. 28:99-125. | equilibrium theory -- historical legacy method -- mammals | island biogeography -- z values Lawlor, L.R. and J.M. Smith. 1976. The Coevolution and Stability of Competing Species. The American Naturalist 110(971):79-99. Lawlor, T. The Mammals. Chapter 10:265-289. |Mammal Populations Coastal Insular Lawlor, T.E. 1982. The evolution of bosy size in mammals: evidence from insular populations in Mexico. The American Naturalist 119(1):54-72. |community assembly Lawlor, T.E. 1983. The peninsular effect on mammalian species diversity in Baja California. The American Naturalist 121(3):432-439. |Mammal Populations Coastal Insular Lawrence, M. 1985. Recent Literature of Mammalogy. Lawton, J.H. Non-competitive populations, non-convergent communities, and vacant niches: the herbivores of bracken. Chapter 6. |assembly rules Lawton, J.H. and D.R. Strong. 1981. Community patterns and competition in foliovorous insects. Am. Nat. 118(3):317-338. |competition |dabate |evidence |reviews Lawton, J.H. and D.R. Strong. 1981. Community patterns and competition in folivorous insects. Am. Nat. 118(3):317-338. Lawton, J.H. and S. McNeil. On the problem of being an herbivore. Lawton, J.H. and S.L. Pimm. 1978. Population dynamics and the length of food chains. Nature 272(5649):189-190. Lawton, J.H. and S.L. Pimm. Pattern and Process in Food Webs. Manuscript, undated. Lawton, J.H., H. Cornell, W. Dritschilo, and S.D. Hendrix. 1981. Species as islands: comments on a paper by Kuris et al. Am. Nat. 117:623-627. LeDuc, J. and C.J. Krebs. Demographic consequences of artificial selection at the LAP locus in voles (Microtus townsendii). Can. J. of Zoology 53(12):1825-1840. Leakey, M.D. 1980. On the Status of Australopithecus afarensis. Science 207(7):1102-1103. Leakey, R.E 1976. Hominids in Africa. American Scientist 64:174- 178. Leatherman, S.P. 1983. Shoreline Mapping: A comparison of techniques. Shore and Beach : July. Leatherman, S.P., T.E. Rice and V. Goldsmith. 1982. Virginia barrier island configuration: A reappraisal. Science 215:285- 288. |UVA publications Lefkovitch, L.P. 1984. A nonparametric method for comparing dissimilarity matrices, a general measure of biogeographical distance, and their application. Am. Nat. 123(4):484-499. Lehmkuhl, J.F. 1984. Determining size and dispersion of minimum viable populations for land management planning and species conservation. Environmental Management 8(2):167-176. Leigh, E.G., A.S. Rand, and D.M. Windsor. 1982. The ecology of a tropical forest: Seasonal rhythms and Long-term changes. Smithsonian Institution Press, Wash. D.C. Lemen, C. A. and M. L. Rosenweig. 1978. Microhabitat selection in two species of heteromyid rodents. Oecologia 33:127-135. Leopold, A. 1941. Lakes in Relation to Terrestrial Life Patterns. A Symposium on Hydrobiology. Levin, D. A. 1979. The nature of plant species. Science 204:381- 384. Levin, S.A. 1970. Community Equilibria and Stability, and an Extension of the Competitive Exclusion Principle. The American Naturalist 104(939):413-423. Levin, S.A. 1974. Dispersion and Population Interactions. The American Naturalist 108(960):207-227. Levings, S.C. 1983. Seasonal, annual and among-site variation in the ground ant community of a deciduous tropical forest: some causes of patchy species distributions. Ecol. Monog. 53(4):435-453. Levings, S.C. and N.R. Franks. 1982. Patterns of nest dispersion in a tropical ground ant community. Ecology 63(2):338-344. Levins, R. 1956. The strategy of model building in population biology. Am. Sci. 54:421-431. Levins, R. 1962. Theory of fitness in a heterogenous environment. I. The fitness set and adaptive function. Am. Nat. 96:361- 371. Levins, R. 1963. Theory of Fitness in a Heterogenous Environment II. Developmental Flexibility and Niche Selection. The American Naturalist 893:75-90. Levins, R. 1968. Ecological Engineering: Theory and Technology. The Quarterly Review of Biology 43:301-305. Levins, R. 1979. Coexistence in a variable environment. Am. Nat. 114:765-783. Levins, R. and D. Culver. 1971. Regional Coexistence of Species and Competition between Rare Species. Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. 68(6):1246-1248. Levins, R., M.L. Pressick and H. Heatwole. 1973. Coexistence Patterns in Insular Ants. American Scientist 61:463-472. Lewin, D.C. 1968. Notes on the Habitat of Microtus in Central Illinois. Ecology 49(4):791-792. Lewin, R. 1981. Creationism goes on trial in Arkansas. Science 214:1101-1104. | creationism Lewin, R. 1981. Lake Bottoms Linked with Human Origins. Science 211(6):564-566. Lewin, R. 1981. Weak creationist bill filed in Maryland. Science 214:73. | creationism Lewin, R. 1982. A tale with many connections. Science 215:484- 487. | creationism Lewin, R. 1982. Adaptation can be a problem for evolutionists. Science 216:1212-1213. Lewin, R. 1982. Creastionist bill fails in maryland. Science 215:1378-1379. | creationism Lewin, R. 1982. Judge's ruling hits hard at creationism. Science 215:381-384. | creationism Lewin, R. 1982. Tide of creationism stemmed for the nonce. Science 215:36. | creationism Lewin, R. 1982. Where is the science in creation science? Science 215:142-146. | creationism Lewin, R. 1983. Do ape-size legs mean ape like-gait? Science 221:537-538. Lewin, R. 1983. How did vertabrates take to the air. Science 221:38-39. Lewin, R. 1983. Predators and hurricanes change ecology. Sci. 221:737-740. (missing p. 738.) Lewin, R. 1983. Predators and hurricanes change ecology. Sciencey 221:737-740. |scientific method Lewin, R. 1983. Santa Rosalia was a goat. Sci. 221:636-639. Lewin, R. 1983. Santa Rosalia was a goat. Science 221:636-639. |scientific method Lewin, R. 1983. Were Lucy's feet made for walking? Science 220:700-702. Lewin, R. 1984. Creationism defeated in Louisiana senate. Science 224:1079. | creationism Lewin, R. 1985. Catastrophism not yet dead. Science 229:640. Lewin, R. 1985. Hawaiin Drosphila: young islands, old flies. Science 229:1072-1073. Lewin, R. 1985. Molecules vs. Morphology: of mice and men. Science229:743-744. Lewin, R. 1986. How unusual are unusual events? Research News Sept. 26, 1986:1385. Li, C. Y. and C. Maser. 1986. New and modified techniques for studying nitrogen-fixing bacteria in small mammal droppings. U. S. Dept. Agri. Forest Service Res. Note PNW-441. Libby, W.F. 1963. Accuracy of Radiocarbon Dates. Science 140:278- 280. Lidicker, W. Z., Jr. 1966. Ecological observations on a feral house mouse population declining to extinction. Ecol. Monographs 36(1):27-50. Lidicker, W. Z., Jr. 1978. Regulation of numbers in small mammal populations - historical reflections and a synthesis. in Populations of small mammals under natural conditions: Vol. 5 - Special Publication Series, Pymatuning Laboratory of Ecology. Ed. D. P. Snyder. University of Pittsburgh. pp. 122- 141. Lidicker, W. Z., Jr. 1981. Organization and chaos in population structure: some thoughts on future directions for mammalian population genetics. in Mammalian population genetics. Eds. M. H. Smith and J. Joule. U. of GA Press, Athens. 309-320. Lidicker, W. Z., Jr. 1981. Organization and chaos in population structure: some thoughts on future directions for mammalian population genetics. in Mammalian population genetics. Eds. M. H. Smith and J. Joule. U. of GA Press, Athens. 309-320. Lidicker, W.Z. 1962. Emigration as a possible mechanism permitting the regulation of population density below carrying capacity. Am. Nat. 96:29-33. Lidicker, W.Z. 1980. The social biology of the California vole. 62:46-55. Lidicker, W.Z. 1981. Organization and chaos in population structure: some thoughts on future directions for mammalian population genetics. in, M.H. Smith and J. Joule (eds.). Lidicker, W.Z. 1988. Solving the enigma of Microtine "Cycles". J. Mamm. 69(2):255-235. Lidicker, W.Z. Population Regulation. Review. Pymatuning Laboratory of Ecology, Special Publication No. 5 - Small Mammal Populations. Lidicker, W.Z. and J.L. Patton. 1987. Patterns of Dispersal and genetic structure in populations of small rodents. in, Mammalian Dispersal Patterns. The Effects of social structure on population genetics. University of Chicago Press, Chicago, London, Chepko-Sade and A. Tang Halpin, eds. Lieberman, D., J.B. Hall and M.D. Swaine. 1979. Seed Dispersal by Baboons in the Shai Hills, Ghana Ecology 60(1):65-75. Lieberman, M. and D. Lieberman. 1970. The Evolutionary Dynamics of the Desert Woodrat, Neotoma Lepida. Evolution 24(3):560- 570. Light, L.E. and J.P. Bogart. 1987. More Myths. Letters. BioScience 37(1):4 Lima, S.L. 1984. Downy woodpecker foraging behavior: efficient sampling in simple stochastic environments. Ecology 65(1):166-174. Lima, S.L. 1984. Territoriality in variable environments: a simple model. Am. Nat. 124(5):641-655. Liming, F.G. and J.P. Johnston. Reproduction in Oak-Hockory Forest Stands of the Missouri Ozarks. J. Forestry 42(3):175- 180. Lindroth, R. L. and G. O. Batzli. 1986. Inducable plant chemical defences: a cause of vole population cycles? J. Animal Ecol. 55:431-499. Lindroth, R.L. G.O. Batzli and G.R. Guntenspergen. 1984. Artificial diets for use in nutritional studies with microtine rodents. J. Mamm. 65(1):139-143. Lindroth, R.L. and G.O. Batzli. 1984. Food Habits of the Meadow Vole (Microtus pennsylvanicu) in Bluegrass and Prairie Habitats. J. Mamm/ 65(4):600-606. Lisle, L. D. 1982. Annotated bibliography of sea level changes along the Atlantic and Gulf coasts of North America. Shore and Beach, July, 1982, 24-33. Literature Review : computer literature searches. Liung, G.M. and G.E.P. Box. 1980. Analysis of Variance with Autocorrected Observation. Scand. J. of Statist. 7:172-180. Livezey, R.E. Statistical Analysis of General Circulation Model Climate Simulation, Sensitivity, and Prediction Experiments. Climate Advisory Center. Livezey, R.E. and W.Y. Chen. 1983. Statistical Field Significance and its Determination by Monte Carlo Techiniques. Monthly Weather Review 111:46-59. Livingstone, D.A. 1975. Late Quaternary Climatic Change in Africa. Annual Review of Ecology and Systematics 6:249-280. Livingstone, F.B. 1958. Anthropological Implications of Sickle Cell Gene Distribution in West Africa. American Anthropologist 60:533-562. Livingstone, F.B. 1962. Population Genetics and Population Ecology American Anthropologist 64(1):44-53. Livingstone, F.B. 1969. Genetics, Ecology and the Origins of Incest and Exogamy. Current Anthropology 10(1):45-62. Lohmoller, J.B. Berlin University. Model Evaluation... Lomnicki, A. 1971. Animal population regulation by the genetic feedback mechanism: a critique of the theoretical model. Am. Nat. 105:413-421. Lomolino, M. V. 1982. Species-area and species-distance relationships of terrestrial mammals in the thousand island region. Oecologia 54:72-75. Lomolino, M. V. 1984. Immigrant selection, predation and the distributions of Microtus pennsylvanicus and Blarina brevicauda on islands. Am. Nat. 123(4):468-483. Lomolino, M. V. 1986. Mammalian community sructure on islands: the importance of immigration, extinction and interactive effects. Biol. J. Linnean Soc. 28:1-21. | Area -- community structure -- compensatory effects | equilibrium theory -- extinction -- immigration | island biogeography -- isolation -- mammals -- rescue effects Lomolino, M.V. 1982. Species-Area and Species-Distance Relationships of Terrestrial Mammals in the Thousand Island Region. Oecologia 54:72-75. |Mammal Populations Coastal Insular Lomolino, M.V. 1984. Immigrant selection, predation and the distributions of Microtus pennsylvanicus and Blarina brevicauda on islands. The American Naturalist 123(4):468- 483. |equilibrium model Lomolino, M.V. 1984. Immigrant selection, predation, and the distributions of Microtus pennsylvanicus and Blarina brevicauda on islands. Am. Nat. 123:468-483. |Mammal Populations Coastal Insular Lomolino, M.V. 1984. Mammalian island biogeography: effects of area, isolation and vagility. Oecologia 61:376-382. |Mammal Populations Coastal Insular Lomolino, M.V. 1984. Mammalian island biogeography: effects of area, isolation and vagility. Oecologia 61:376-382. |equilibrium model Lomolino, M.V. 1984. Postdoctoral research fellowship application to NSF. "Turnover of Mammalian Communities in the Thousand Island Region". Lomolino, M.V. 1985. Body size of mammals on islands: The island rule re-examined. The American Naturalist 125:310-316. Lomolino, M.V. 1986. Mammalian community structure on islands: the importance of immigration, extinction and interactive effects. Biol. J. of Linnean Society 28:1-21. |Mammal Populations Coastal Insular Lorenz, K.Z. 1958. The Evolution of Behavior. Scientific American. Lotka, A.J. 1939. Contact Points of Population Study with Related Branches of Sciences. Proceedins of the American Philosophical Society 80(4):602-626. Lovett, G. M., W. A. Reiners and R. K. Olson. 1982. Cloud droplet deposition in subalpine fir forests: hydrological and chemical inputs. Science 218:1303-1304. Lowenstein, J. M. 1985. Molecular approaches to the identification of species. American Scientist 73:541-557. Lubchenco, J. 1978. Plant species diversity in a marine intertidal community: importance of herbivore food preference and algal competetive abilities. Am. Nat. 112:23-39. Lucas, J. R. 1983. The role of foraging time constraints and variable prey encounter in optimal diet choice. Am. Nat. 122(2):191-209. Luck, R.F. 1971. An appraisal of two methods of analyzing insect life tables. Can. Entomologist 103:1261-1271. Luckinbill, L.S. 1984. An experimental analysis of a life history theory. Ecology 65(4):1170-1184. Lundelius, E.L. 1966. Marsupial Carnivore Dens in Australian Caves. Studies in Speleology 1(4):174-181. Lynch, D. 1962. Study of a Grassland Mosaic at Austin, Texas. Ecology 43(4):679-686. Lynch, J. F. and N. K. Johnson. 1974. Turnover and equilibria in insular avifaunas, with special reference to the California Channel Islands. The Condor 76:370-381. Lynch, J.D. 1973. Evolution in the Genus Bufo. Lynch, J.F. and N.K. Johnson. 1974. Turnover and Equilibrai in Insular Avifaunas, with Special Reference to the California Channel Islands. The Condor 76:370-384. M'Closkey, R.T. 1975. Habitat dimensions of white-footed mice, Peromyscus leucopus. Amer. Midland Naturalist 93(1):158-167. |Species of interest M'Closkey, R.T. 1975. Habitat succession and rodent distribution. J. Mamm. 56(4):950-955. M'Closkey, R.T. 1976. Use of artificial microhabitats by white- footed mice, Peromyscus leucopus. Am. Midland Nat. 96(2):467- 470. M'Closkey, R.T. 1981. Microhabitat use in coexisting desert rodents - the role of population density. Oecologia 50:310- 315. |assembly rules M'Closkey, R.T. 1981. Microhabitat use in coexisting desert rodents - the role of population density. Oecologia 50:310- 315. |community assembly M'Closkey, R.T. 1983. Perognathus baileyi and Jojoba (Simmondsia chinensis): A test of their association. J. Mamm. 64(3):499- 501. Mac Arthur, R. and R. Levins. 1964. Competition, habitat selection and character displacement in a patchy environment. Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. 51: MacArthur, R. 1969. Species packing, and what interspecies competition minimizes. Zoology 64:1369-1371. MacArthur, R. H. Recher, and M. Cody. 1966. On the relation between habitat selection and species diversity. Am. Nat. 100:319-332. MacArthur, R. and R. Levins. 1964. Competition, habitat selection, and character displacement in a patchy environment. Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. 51:1207-1210. MacArthur, R. and R. Levins. 1967. The limiting silimilarity, convergence and divergence of coexisting species. Am. Nat. 101:377-385. MacArthur, R.H. 1965. Patterns of species diversity. Biol. Rev. 40:510-533. |equilibrium theory |density compensation MacArthur, R.H. 1971. Patterns of terrestrial bird communities. Chapter 5. In, Avian Biology, Vol. 1. MacArthur, R.H. and E.O. Wilson. 1963. An equilibrium theory of insular zoogeography. Evolution, International Journal of Organic Evolution. |equilibrium model MacArthur, R.H. and J.W. MacArthur. 1961. On bird species diversity. Ecology 42:594-598. MacArthur, R.H., J.M. Diamond and J.R. Karr. 1972. Density compensation in island faunas. Ecology 53(2):330-342. |equilibrium model MacArthur, R.M. 1973. Niche overlap and limiting similarity. Chapter 6. in, Monographs in Population Biology. MacNally, R.C. 1983. On assessing the significance of interspecific competition to guild structure. Ecology 64(6):1646-1652. |assembly rules Macarthur, R. and R. Levins. 1967. The limiting similarity, convergence, and divergence of coexisting species. Am. Nat. 101:377-385. Macarthur, R. and R. Levins. Competition, habitat selection, and character displacement in a patchy environment. Proc. N.A.S. 51:1207-1210. Mace, G. and P.H. Harvey. 1983. Energetic constraints on home- range size. Am. Nat. 121(1):120-132. Mack, R.N. and J.N. Thompson. 1982. Evolution in steppe with few, large, hooved animals. Am. Nat. 119:757-773. Macurda, R. B., Jr. and D. L. Meyer. 1983. Sea lillies and feather stars. Am. Sci. 71:354-365. Maezler, D.A. 1970. The regression of Log N on Log as a test of density dependence: an exercise with computer constructed density-independent populations. Ecology 51:811-822. Magee, B. 1974. Karl Popper: The Useful Philosopher. Horizon 16(5):52-57. Magnusson, W.E. 1983. Use of discriminant function to characterize ruffed grouse drumming sites in Georgia: a critique. J. Wildl. Manage. 47(4):1151-1152. Maguire, B. 1963. The passive dispersal of small aquatic organisms and their colonization of isolated bodies of water. Ecological Monographs 33:161-185. |equilibrium model Maguire, L.A., U.S. Seal and P.F. Brussard. Managing critically endangered species: the Sumatran Rhino as a Case Study. Manuscript. Makarewicz, J.C. and G.E. Likens. 1975. Niche analysis of a zooplankton community. Science 190:1000-1003. Malanson, G.P. 1982. The assembly of hanging gardens: effects of age, area and location. The American Naturalist 119:145-150. |assembly rules Malanson, G.P. 1985. Spatial autocorrelation and distributions of plant species on environmental gradients. Oikos 45(2):278- 280. Malmgren B. A., W. A. Berggren and G. P. Lohmann. 1984. Species formation through punctuated gradualism in planctonic foraminafera. Sciense 225:317-319. Manner, H.I. 1981. Ecological succession in New and Old Swiddens of montane Papua New Guinea. Human Ecology 9(3):359-377. Manville, R.H. 1942. Notes on the mammals of Mount Desert Island, Maine. J. Mamm. 23(4):391-398. Manville, R.H. 1951. A small island community in midsummer. Ecology 32(4):608-617. Manville, R.H. 1960. Recent changes in the mammal fauna of Mount Desert Island, Maine. J. Mamm. 41(3):415-416. Manville, R.H. 1964. The vertebrate fauna of Isle au Haut, Maine. Am. Midland Nat. 72(2):396-407. Mares M. A. 1985. Mammal faunas of xeric habitats and the great American interchange. in The Great American Biotic Interchange. Eds. F. G. Stehli and D. Webb. Plenum Publishing Corp. pp. 489-520. Mares M. A., K. A. Ernest and D. D. Gettinger. 1986. Small mammal community stucture and composition in the Cerrado Province of central Brazil. J. Trop. Ecol. 2:289-300. | Brazil -- community structure -- gallery forest | habitat selection -- marsupials -- neotropics -- rodents | tropical savanna Mares, M. A. 1986. Conservation in South America: problems, consequences and solutions. Science 233:734-739. Mares, M. A. and J. K. Braun. 1986. An international survey of the popular and technical literature of mammology. Annals of Carnegie Museum 55(9):145-205. Mares, M.A. 1975. South American mammal zoogeography: evidence from convergent evolution in desert rodents. Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. 72(5):1702-1706. Mares, M.A. and A.C. Hulse. 1977. Patterns of some vertebrate communities in Creosote bush deserts. In, Creosote Bush, T.J. Mabry, J.H. Hunziker and D.R. DiFeo, Jr. (eds.), Dowden, Hutchinson and Ross, Inc.:Stroudsburg, PA. Mares, M.A. and D.F. Williams. 1977. Experimental support for food particle size resource allocation in heteromyid rodents. Ecology 58:1186-1190. Mares, M.A., K.E. Streilein and M.R. Willig. 1981. Experimental assessment of several population estimation techniques on an introduced population of eastern chipmunks. J. Mamm. 62(2):315-328. Mares, M.A., M.D. Watson and T.E. Lacher, Jr. 1976. Home range perturbations in Tamias striatus. Oecologia 25:1-12. Mares, M.A., R. Adams, T.E. Lacher, M.R. Willig. 1980. Home range dynamics in chipmunks: responses to experimental manipulation of population density and distribution. Annals of Carnegie Museum 49(13):193-201. Mares, M.A., T.E. Lacher and M.R. Willig. 1982. An experimental analysis of social spacing in Tamias striatus. Ecology 63(2):267-273. Mares, M.A., T.E. Lacher, M.R. Willig and N.A. Bitar. 1982. An experimental analysis of social spacing in Tamias striatus. Ecology 63(2):267-273. Marshall, E. 19 the allometry of population cycles. Science 224:1350-1352. Marshall, E. 1983. Acid rain, a year later. Science 221:241-242. Marshall, E. 1983. The apology of yellow rain. Science 221:241- 242. Marshall, J.T. 1986. Systematics of the Genus Mus. Current Topics in Microbiology and Immunology 127:12-18. Marshall, L. G., S. D. Webb, J. J. Sepkoski Jr. and D. M. Raup. 1982. Mammalian evolution and the great American interchange. Sci. 215(4538):1351-1357. Marshall, L.D. 1982. Male nutrient investment in the Lepidoptera: What nutrients should males invest? Am. Nat. 120:273-279. Martell, A.M. and A.L. Macaulay. 1981. Food Habits of Deer Mice (Peromyscus maniculatus) in Northern Ontario. The Canadian Field-Naturalist 95:319-324. Marten, G.G. 1973. Time patterns of Peromyscus activity and their correlations with weather. J. Mamm. 54:169-188. Martin, P. S. 1973. Late pleistocene extinctions. (Response to J. W. Corbett) Science 180:906. (Filed with J. W. Corbett) Martin, P.L. and A.L. Olmstead. 1985. The agricultural mechanization controversy. Science 227:601-606. Martin, P.S. 1970. Pleistocene niches for alien animals. BioScience 20(4):218-221. Martin, P.S. and H.E. Wright. 1967. Late-Pleistocene and Holocene Faunal History of Central Texas. in, Pleistocene Extinctions: The Search for a Cause. Volume 6 of the Proceedings of the VII Congress of the International Association for Quaternary Research. Martin, T.E. 1980. Diversity and abundance of spring migratory birds using habitat islands on the Great Plains. Condor 82:430-439. |equilibrium theory |density compensation Martin, T.E. 1981. Species-area slopes and coefficients: a caution on their interpretation. The American Naturalist 118(6):823-837. |equilibrium theory |density compensation Marzola, D. L. and D. P. Bartholomew. 1979. Photosynthetic pathway and biomass energy production. Science 205:555-559. Marzola, DL. and D.P. Bartholomew. 1979. Photosynthetic Pathway and Biomass Energy Production. Science 205:555-560. Massey, A. Variable Responses to High Density of Female Mus musculus: A Merger of Two Population Regulation Hypotheses. Manuscript. Matson, P. A. and R. D. Boone. 1984. Natural disturbance and nitrogen mineralization: wave-form dieback of mountain hemlock in the Oregon Cascades. Ecol. 65(5):1511-1516. | in situ incubations -- nitrogen availability | nutrient limitation -- Oregon Cascades Mountains | Phellinus weirii -- Tsuga mertensiana -- wave-form dieback Mattson, D.J., R.R. Knight, and B.M. Blanchard. Derivation of habitat component values for the Yellowstone grizzly bear. Matzke, G. 1983. Game Ranching. Science 220:1228. Maurer, B. A. 1983. Overlap and competition in avian guilds. Am. Nat. 121:903-907. Maurer, B.A. 1982. Statistical inference for MacArthur-Levins niche overlap. Ecology 63(6):1712-1719. Maurer, B.A. 1985. On the ecological and evolutionary roles of interspecific competition. Oikos 45:300-302. May R. M. 1972. Will a large comples system be stable? Nat. 238:413-414. May, R. M. 1972. Limit cycles in predastor-prey relationships. Science 177:900-902. ( Filed with Rosenweig, M. L. Enriched predator-prey systems... ) May, R. M. 1972. Limit cycles in predator-prey communities. Science 177:900-902. May, R. M. 1977. Thresholds and breakpoints in ecosystems with a multiplicity of stable states. Nature 269:471-477. May, R. M. 1983. Food webs. (Book review) Science, 15 April, 1983:295-296. May, R. M. 1983. Mathematical ecology. Science 221:544. May, R. M. 1983. Parasitic infections as regulators of animal populations. Am. Sci. 71:36-45. May, R. M., J. R. Beddington, C. W. Clark S. J. Holt and R. M. Laws. 1979. Management of multispecies fisheries. Science 205(4403):267-277. May, R.M. 1971. Proceedings of the Ecological Society of Australia. Vol. 6. Stability in model ecosystems. May, R.M. 1971. Stability in multispecies community models. Mathematical Biosciences 12:59-79. May, R.M. 1972. Limit Cycles in Predator-Prey Communities. Science 177:900-901. May, R.M. 1975. Some notes on estimating the competition matrix, a. Ecology 56(3):737-741. May, R.M. An overview: real and apparent patterns in community structure. Chapter 1. |scientific method May, R.M. and M.P. Hassell. 1981. The Dynamics of Multiparasitoid-Host Interactions. The American Naturalist 117(3):234-261. May, R.M. and R.H. MacArthur. 1972. Niche overlap as a function of environmental variability. Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. 69:1109- 1113. May, R.M. and R.H. MacArthur. 1972. Niche overlap as a function of environmental variabilty. Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. 69(5):1109-1113. McArdle, J.J. 1978. The Statistical Analyses of Monte Carlo Simulation Data Using the Techniques of Discrete Multivariate Analysis. National Bureau of Standards Special Publication 503. McAuliffe, J.R. 1984. Competition for space, disturbance, and the structure of a benthic stream community. Ecology 65(3):894- 908. McCarley, H. 1963. Distributional relationships of sympatric populations of Peromyscus leucopus and P. gossypinus. Ecology 44(4):784-788. McCarley, H. 1966. Annual cycle, population dynamics and adaptive behavior of Citellus tridecemlineatus . J. Mamm. 47(2):294- 316. McCarley, W.H. 1956. Color variations of ground squirrels (Citellus mexicanus, scuiridae) in Texas. The Southwestern Naturalist 1(1):30-34. McCarley, W.H. 1959. The effect of flooding on a marked population of Peromyscus. J. of Mammology 40(1):57-63. McCarlye, W.H. 1958. Ecology, behavior and population dynamics of Peromyscus nuttalli in Eastern Texas. Texas Journal of Science X(2):147-171. McClensghan, L. R., Jr. and M. S. Gaines. 1976. Density-dependent dispersal in Sigmodon : a critique. J. Mamm. 57(4):758-759. McClure, P.A. and J.C. Randolph. 1980. RElative Allocation of Energy to Growth and Development of Homeothermy in the Eastern Wood Rat (Neotoma Floridana) and Hispid Cotton Rat (Sigmodon Hispidus). Ecological Monographs 50(2):199-219. McComb, W. C. 1982. Managing urban forests to increase or decrease gray squirrel populations. Southern J. Appl. For. 8(1):31-34. McCoy, E.D. 1982. The application of island-biogeographic theory to forest tracts: problems in the determination of turnover rates. Biological Conservation 22:217-227. |conservation McDaniel, I.N. 1965. DDT Spray and Bird Mortality. Science 149:326. Filed with Wurster, C.F. McGinley, M.A. 1984. Central place foraging for nonfood items: determination of the stick size-value relationship of house building materials collected by eastern woodrats. Am. Nat. 123(6):841-853. McIntosh R. P. 1971. Community, competition, and adaptation. Quart. Rev. Bio. 45:259-280. McIntosh, R.P. 1970. Community, Competition, and Adaptation. Quarterly Review of Biology 45:259-280. McIntosh, R.P. 1980. The background and some current problems of theoretical ecology. Synthese 43:195-255. McMurtrie, R. 1976. On the limit to niche overlap for nonuniform niches. Theoretical Population Biology 10:96-107. McNab, B.K. 1963. Bioenergetics and the determination of home range size. Am. Nat. XCVII:133-140. McNaughton, S.J. and L.L. Wolf. 1970. Community Ordering and Niche Width. Science 170:1335. McNaughton, S.J. and M.B. Coughenour. 1981. The Cybernetic Nature of Ecosystems. Am. Nat. Vol 117:985-990. McPherson, A.B. and J.N. Krull. 1972. Island populations of small mammals and their affinities with vegetation type, island size and distance from mainland. McPherson and Krull: Island Mammals. McPherson, A.B. and J.N. Krull. 1972. Island populations of small mammals and their affinities with vegetation types, island size and distance from mainland. Am. Midland Nat. 88(2):384- 392. Mead, J.I., T.R. Van devender, and K.L. Cole. 1983. Late quaternary small mammals from sonoran desert packrat middens, Arizona and California. J. Mamm. 64(1):173-180. Meagher T. R. 1982. The population biology of Chamaelirium luteum , a dioecious member of the lily family: two-sex population prolections and stable population structure. Ecol. 63(6):1701-1711. | Chamaelirium luteum -- dioecious plants -- life histories | population dynamics -- stable population structure | stage-class matrix projection models | two-sex population projection models Meagher, T. R. and J. Antovonics. 1982. The population biology of Chamaelirium luteum , a dioecious member of the lily family: life history studies. Ecol. 63(6):1690-1700. | Chamaelirium luteum -- life histories -- phenology | population dynamics - - resource allocation | sexual dymorphism Medin, D. E. 1985. Breding bird responses to diameter-cut logging in west-central Idaho. U. S. Dept. Agri. For. Serv. Res. Pap. INT-355. Medin, D. E. 1986. Small mammal responses to diameter-cut logging in an Idaho Douglas-fir forest. U. S. Dept. Agri. For. Serv. Res. Note INT-362. Medin, D.E. 1985. Breeding Responses to Diameter-Cut Logging in West-Central Idaho. USDAFS Research Paper INT-355. Medin, D.E. 1986. Small Mammal Responses to Diameter-Cut Logging in an Idaho Douglas-fir Forest. USDAFS Research Note INT-362. Meffe, G.K. 1984. Effects of abiotic disturbance in coexistence of predatory-prey fish species. Ecology 65(5):1525-1534. Mehlop, P. and J.F. Lynch. 1978. Population characteristics of Peromyscus leucopus introduced to islands inhabited by Microtus pennsylvanicus. Oikos 31:17-26. |Mammal Populations Coastal Insular Meier, P.T. 1983. Polyterritorial polygyny in the pied flycatcher: male deception or female choice? Am. Nat. 121:145-147. Menard H. W. 1983. Insular erosion, isostasy, and subsidence. Science 220(4600):913-918. Menge, B.A. 1972. Competition for food between two intertidal starfish species and its effect on body size and feeding. Ecology 53(3):635-644. Menge, J.L. and B.A. Menge. 1974. Role of resource allocation, aggression and spatial heterogeneity in coexistence of two competing intertidal starfish. Ecological Monograph 44(2):189-209. Merriam, H. G. 1971. Woodchuck burrow distribution and related movement patterns. J. Mamm. 52(4):732-746. Merriam, H. G. and A. Merriam. 1965. Vegetation zones around woodchuck burrows. The Canadian Field-Naturalist 79(3):177- 180. Merritt, J. R. and J. M. Merritt. 1980. Population ecology of the deer mouse ( Peromyscus maniculatus ) in the front range of Colorado. Annals of Carnegie Museum 49:113-130. Merritt, J. R. and J. M. Merritt. 1980. Population ecology of the deer mouse ( Peromyscus maniculatus ) in the front range of Colorado. Annals of Carnegie Museum 49:113-130. Meserve, P.L. 1974. Temporary occupancy of a coastal sage scrub community by a seasonal immigrant, the California mouse (Peromyscus californicus). J. Mamm. 55(4):836-840. Meyer, J. L., E. T. Schultz and G. S. Helfman. 1983. Fish schools: an asset to corals. Science220:1047-1050. Michener, G.R. and J.O. Murie. 1983. Black-tailed prairie dog coteries: are they cooperative breeding grounds? Am. Nat. 121:266-274. Middleton, J. and G. Merriam. 1981. Woodland mice in a farmland mosaic. J. Appl. Ecol. 18:703-710. Middleton, J. and G. Merriam. 1983. Distribution of woodland species in farmland woods. J. Appl. Ecol. 20:625-644. Middleton, J. and G. Merriam. 1985. The rationale for conservation: Problems from a virgin forest. Biol. Conserv. 33:133-145. Mielke, D. L. 1977. A stand model for upland forests of southern Arkansas. M. S. thesis, University of Tennessee, Knoxville. Moritz, C. 1983. Parthenogenesisin the endemic Austrailian lizard Heteronotia bioei (Gekkonidae). Science 220:735-737. Mielke, D.L. 1977. A Stand Model for Upland Forests of Southern Arkansas. A Master's Thesis University of Tennessee. Mielke, P.W., K.J. Berry and G.W. Brier. 1981. Application of Multi-Response Permutation Procedures for Examining Seasonal Changes in Monthly Mean Sea-Level Pressure Patterns. Monthly Weather Review 109:120-126. Millar, J. S. and R. M. Zammuto. 1983. Life histories of mammals: an analysis of life tables. Ecology 64(4):631-635. | age at maturity -- body mass -- life expectancy | life history -- life table -- letter size -- mammal | reproductive value Millar, J.S. 1983. Negative maternal effects in Permyscus maniculatus. J. Mamm 64(3):540-543. Miller, R. S. and D. B. Botkin. 1974. Endangered species : models and predictions. American Scientist 62(2):172-181. Miller, R. S. and W. J. D. Stephen. 1966. Spatial relationships in flocks of sandhill cranes ( Grus canedensis ). Ecol. 47(2)323-326. Miller, R.S. Pattern and process in competition. |competition |dabate |evidence |reviews Miller, T.E. 1982. Community diversity and interactions between the size and frequency of disturbance. The Am. Nat. 120(4):533-536. Minnich R. A. 1983. Fire mosaics in Southern California and Northern Baja California. Science 219:1287-1294. Minton, P.D. 1981. Discussion. American Statistical Association, 1981 Proc. Section on Statistical Education. Moehlman, P.D. 1987. Social Organization in Jackals. American Scientist 75:366-376. Moehlman, P.D. 1987. Social Organization in Jackals. American Scientist 75:366-376.Morris, D.W. 1982. Age-specific dispersal strategies in iteroparous species: who leaves when? Evolutionary Theory 6:53-65. Moeur, M. 1985. COVER: A User's Guide to the CANOPY and SHRIBS Extension of the Stand Prognosis Model. USDAFS General Technical Report INT-190. Moeur, M. 1985. Cover: a user's guide to the canopy and shrubs extension of the stand prognosos model. U. S. Dept. Agri. For. Serv. Gen. Tech. Rep. INT-190. Mohr, C. O. 1966. Comparison of methods for calculating areas of animal activity. J. Wildl. Manag. 30(2):293-304. Monk, C. D. and F. C. Gabielson, Jr. 1985. Effects of shade, litter and root competition on old-field vegetation in South Carolina. Bulletin of the Torrey Botanical Club 112(4):383- 392. | old-field -- shade -- litter -- root competition -- annuals -- | perennials -- succession Montgomery, W. I. 1980. population structure and dynamics of sympatric Apodemus species ( Rodetria : Muridae ). J. Zool. Lond. 192:351-377. Montgomery, W.I. 1980. Population structure and dynamics of sympatric Apodemus species (Rodentia: Muridae). The Zoological Society of London. Montgomery, W.I. 1981. A removal experiment with sympatric populations of Apodemus sylvaticus (L.) and A. flavicollis (Melchior)(Rodentia: Muridae). Moore, J. 1983. Responses of an avian predator and its isopod prey to an acanthocephalan parasite. Ecology 64(5):1000-1015. Moran, P.A.P. 1953. The statistical analysis of the Canadian lynx cyle. Morgan G. S. and C. A. Woods. 1986. Extinction and the zoogeography of West Indian land animals. Biol. J. Linnean Soc. 28:167-203. | West Indies -- mammals -- fossils -- Late Quaternary | island biogeography -- extinction -- colonization Morgan, R.P. and J.A. Chapman. 1979. Serum proteins of the Sylvilagus complex. Reprinted from the Proceedings of the World Lagomorph Conference. Edited by K. Myers and C.D. MacInnes. University of Guelph, Guelph, Ontario. Moriarty, J.J. and W.C. McComb. 1985. Plant community composition and structure in a central Appalachian forest stand 25 years after timber stand improvement. Castanea 50(1):32-42. Morin, P.J. 1981. Predatory salamanders reverse the outcome of competition among three species of anumran tadpoles. Science 212:1284-1285. |island experiments |non-mammals Morin, P.J. 1984. Odonate guild composition: experiments with colonization history and fish predation. Ecology 65(6):1866- 1873. Morin, P.J. 1984. The impact of fish exclusion on the abundance and species composition of larval odonates: results of short- term experiments in a North Carolina farm pond. Ecology 65(1):53-60. Morin, P.J. 1985. Predation intensity, prey survival and injury frequency in an amphibian predator-prey interaction. Copeia 1985(3):638-644. Morris, D. W. 1982. Age-specific dispersal straregies in iteroparous species: who leaves when? Evolutionary Theory 6:53-65. Morris, D. W. 1984. Rodent population cycles: life history adjustments to age-specific dispersal strategies and intrinsic time lags. Oecologia 64:8-13. Morris, D.W. 1982. Age-specific dispersal strategies in iteroparous species: who leaves when? Evolutionary Theory 6:53-65. Morris, D.W. 1983. Field tests of competitive interference for space among temperate-zone rodents. Can. J. Zool. 61:1517- 1523. Morris, R.D. and P.R. Grant. 1972. Experimental stusies of competitive interaction in a two-species system. J. Anim. Ecol. 41:275-290. Morris, R.F. 1957. The interpretation of mortality data in studies on population dynamics. Can. Entomologist 89(2):49- 69. Morse, D. H. 1985. Costs in a milkweed-bumblebee mutualism. Am. Nat. 125:903-905. Morse, D.R., J.H. Lawton, M.M. Dodson, and M.H. Williamson. 1985. Fractal dimension of vegetation and the distribution of arthropod body lengths. Nature 314:731-732. Mosaic. Tales the Tree Rings Tell. Mosaic 8(5):1-9. Mueggler and R. B. Campbell, Jr. 1986. Aspen community types of Utah. U. S. Dept. Agri. For. Serv. Res. Pap. INT-362. Mueggler, W.F. and R.B. Campbell. 1986. Aspen Community Types of Utah. USDAFS Research Paper INT-362 Muller, C.H. 1958. Science and philosophy of the community concept. Am. Sci. 46(3):294-308. Munger J.C. and J.H. Brown. 1981. Competition in desert rodents: an experiment with semipermeable exclosures. Science 211:510- 512. Murdoch, W. W. 1970. Population regulation and population inertia. Ecol. 51(3):497-502. Murdoch, W.W., J. Chesson and P.L. Chesson. 1985. Biological control in theory and practice. Am. Nat. 125(3):344-366. Murphy, D.D. and P.R. Ehrlich. 1980. Two California Checkerspot Buttlerfly Subspecies: One New, One on the Verge of Extinction. J. of the Lepidopterists' Society 34(3):316-320. Murphy, M.T. 1983. Ecological aspects of the reproductive biology of eastern kingbirds: geographic comparisons. Ecology 64(4):914-928. Murphy, T.M. 1981. The Population Status of The American Alligator on the Savannah River Plant, S.C. SRO-NERP-4. Murphy, T.P. and C. Nalewajko. 1976. Blue-Green Algae: Their Excretion of Iron-Selective Chelators Enables Them to Dominate Other Algae. Science 19:900-902. Murray J., M. S. Johnson and B. Clarke. 1982. Microhabitat differences among genetically similar species of Partula . Evolution 36(2):316-325. Murray, B. G., Jr. 1967. Dispersal in vertabrates. Ecol. 48(6):975-978. Myers, P. and L.L. Master. 1983. Reproduction by Peromyscus maniculatus: size and compromise. J. Mamm. 64(1):1-18. Nadeau, J.H., R.T. Lombardi and R.H. Tamarin. 1980. Population structure and dispersal of Peromyscus leucopus on Muskeget Island. Naylor, B.G. and P. Handford. 1985. In defense of Darwin's theory. BioScience 35(8):478-484. Neel, J. V. 1981. The major ethnic groups: diversity in the midst of similarity. Am. Nat. 117(1):83-87. Neel, J.V. 1958. The study of natural selection in primitive and civilized human populations. Human Biology 30(1):43-72. Neill, W.E. 1975. Resource partitioning by competing microcrustaceand in stable laboratory microecosystems. Verb. Internat. Verein. Limnol. 19:2885-2890. Neiring, W.A. and RH. Goodwin. 1974. Creation of relatively stable shrublands with herbicides: Arresting "Succession: on Rights-of-Way and Pastureland. Ecology 55(4):784-795. Nel, J. A. J. 1978. Habitat heterogenaity and changes in small mammal community structure and resource utilization in the southern Kalahari. in Bulletin of Carnegie Museum of Natural History (6). Ed. D. A. Schlitter. Carnegie Mus. Nat. Hist., Pittsburgh, PA. pp. 118-131. Nellis, C.H., S.P. Wetmore, and L.B. Keith. 1972. Lynx-Prey interactions in Central Alberta. J. Wildl. Manage. 36(2):320- 329. Nelson, G. and N.I. Platnick. 1980. A vicariance approach to historical biogeography. BioScience 30(5):339-344. |community assembly Nelson, M.E. and L.D. Mech. 1981. Deer social organization and wolf predation in northeastern Minnesota. Wildlife Monographs. No. 77. Supplement to The J. of Wildlife Management Vol. 45(3), July, 1981. Nelson, M.E. and L.D. Mech. 1984. Home-Range Formation and Dispersla of Deer in Norteastern Minnesota. J. Mamm. 65(4):567-575. Newmark, W. D. 1986. Species-area relationship and its determinants for mammals in western North American national parks. Biol. J. Linnean Soc. 28:83-98. | mammalian species richness -- area -- elevational range | habitat diversity -- western North America -- national parks | reserve design Newton, S.L., T.D. Nudds and J.S. Millar. 1980. Importance of Arboreality in Peromyscus leucopus and Microtus pennsylavanicus Interactions. The Canadian Field-Naturalist 94:167-170. Neyman, J. 1967. R.A. Fisher (1890-1962): An Appreciation. Science 156:1456-1462. Nicholaides, J.J., D.E. Bandy, P.A. Sanchez, J.R. Benites, J.H. Villachica, A.J. Coutu and C.S. Valverde. 1985. Agricultural alternatives for the Amazon Basin. BioScience 35(5):279-291. Nichols, J.D., W. Conley, B. Batt, and A.R. Tipton. 1976. Temporally dynamic reproductive strategies and the concept of r- and K-selection. Am. Nat. 110:995-1005. Nicholson, A.J. 1950. Population oscillations caused by competition for food. Nature 165:476-477. Niering, W. A. and R. S. Warren. 1980. Vegetation patterns and processes in New England salt marshes. BioSci. 30(5):301-307. Nilsson, S.G. 1977. Density compensation and competition among birds breeding on small islands in a South Swedish lake. Oikos 28:170-176. |equilibrium theory |density compensation Nilsson, S.G. and I.N. Nilsson. 1982. Are estimated species turnover rates on islands largely sampling errors? The American Naturalist 121:595-597. |equilibrium theory |density compensation Nitikman, L. Z. and M. A. Mares. 1987. Ecology of small mammals in a gallery forest of central Brazil. Annals of Carnegie Museum 56(2):75-95. Nixon, C.M. and L.P. Hansen. 1987. Managing Forests to maintain populations of gray and fox squirrels. Ill. Dept. of Conservation Tech. Bull. 5, June. Nixon, C.M. and L.P. Hansen. 1987. Managing forests to maintain populations of gray and fox squirrels. Ill. Dept. Cons. Tech. Bull. 5. June. Nixon, C.M., D.M. Worley and M.W. McClain. 1968. Food Habits of Squirrels in Southeast Ohio. J. Wildlife Management 32(2):294-305. Nixon, C.M., W.R. Edwards and L. Eberhardt. 1967. Estimating Squirrel Abundance from Livetrapping Data. J. Wildlife Management 31(1):96-101. Nixon, E.S. and C. McMillan. 1964. The Role of Soil in the Distribution of Four Grass Species in Texas. The American Midland Naturalist 71(1):114-140. Nixon, S.W. and C.A. Oviatt. 1973. Ecology of a New England Salt Marsh. University of Rhode Island Marine Reprint No. 16. Northwestern University. Volgelback Computer Center. SPSS - Statistical Package for the Social Sciences. Norton, G.A., R.W. Sutherst and G.F. Maywald. 1983. A framework for integrating control methods against the cattle tick, Boophilus microplus in Australia. J. Applied Ecology 20:489- 505. Noss, R.F. 1987. Corridors in real landscapes: a reply to Simberloff and Cox. Conservation Biology 1(2):159-164. Numbers, R. L. 1982. Creationism in 20th-century America. Science 218:538-544. | creationism O'Brien, R. and D.D. Van Hooser. 1983. Understory vegetation inventory: an efficient procedure. USDAFS INT-323. O'Brien, S. J., M. E. Roelke, L. Marker, A. Newman, C. A. Winkler, D. Meltzer, L. Colly, J. F. Evermann, M. Bush and D. E. Wildt. 1985. Genetic basis for species vulnerability in the cheeta. Science 227:1428-1434. O'Farrell, M.J. 1974. Seasonal Activity Patterns of Rodents in a Sagebrush Community. J. of Mammalogy 55(4):809-823. O'Farrell, M.J., Kaufman, D.W. and D.W. Lundahl. 1977. Use of Live-Trapping with the Assessment Line Method for Density Estimation. J. of Mamm. 58(4):575-582. Odum, E. P. 1962. Relationships between structure and function in the ecosystem. Japanese J. Ecol. 12(3):108-118. Odum, E.P. 1960. Organic Production and Turnover in Old-Field Succession. Ecology 41(1):34-49. Odum, E.P. 1962. Relationships Between Structure and Function in the Ecosystem. Japanese J. of Ecology 12(3):109-118. Odum, H.T. and E.P. Odum. 1955. Trophic Structure and Productivity of a Windward Coral Reef Community on Eniwetok Atoll. Odum, W.E. 1982. Environmental degradation and the tyranny of small decisions. BioScience 32(9):728-729. Oertel, G.F. 1977. Geomorphic cycles in ebb deltas and related patterns of shore erosion and accretion. J. of Sedimentary Petrology 47(3):1121-1131. |UVA publications Oksanen, L., S.D. Fretwell, and O. Jarvinen. 1979. Interspecific aggression and the limiting similarity of close competitors: the problem of size gaps in some community arrays. Am. Nat. 114(1):117-129. Oldenstadt, D. L., R. E. Allan, G. W. Bruehl D. A. Dillman, E. L. Michalson, R.I. Papendick and D. J. Rydrych. 1982. Solutions to environmental and economic problems (STEEP). Science 217:904-909. Olson, C.L. 1976. On Choosing a Test Statistic in Multivariate Analysis of Variance. Psychological Bulletin 83(4):579-586. Olson, J.S. 1971. Primary productivity: temperate forests, especially American deciduous types. UNESCO, Productivity of forest ecosystems. Proc. Brussels Symp 1969. pp. 235-258. Olson, J.S. Use of tracer techniques for the study of biogeochemical cycles. ORNL publication # 225. Olszewski J. L. 1968. Role of uprooted trees in the movements of rodents in forests. Oikos 19:99-104. Oppenheimer, M., C.B. Epstein, and R.E. Yuhnke. 1985. Acid deposition, smelter emissions, and the linearity issue in the western United States. Science 229:859-861. Orians, G.H. 1969 On the evolution of mating systems in birds and mammals. The American Naturalist 103(934):589-603. Orians, G.H. 1969. The Number of Bird Species in Some Tropical Forests. Ecology 50(5):783-801. Oritz de Montellano, B. R. 1978. Aztec cannibalism: an ecological necessity? Science 200(4342):611-617. Orlove, B. S. 1983. Pastoralists (Book review). Science 221:355- 356. Ostfeld, R.S., S.R. Pugh, J.O. Seamon and R.H. Tamarin. 1988. Space use and reproductive success in a population of meadow voles. J. An. Ecology 57:385-394. Ota, K. and E.W. Jameson. Ecological relationships and economic importance of Japanese microtinae. Ecology 42(1):184-185. Overall, J. E. and C. J. Klatt. 1972. Discriminant function for two groups. in Applied Multivariate analysis. McGraw-Hill, New York. 243-253. Overton, W. R. 1982. Creationism in schools: the decision in McLean versus the Arkansas Board of Education. Science 215:934-943. | creationism Ovington, J.D. and D. Heitkamp. 1960. The Accumulation of Energy in Forest Plantations in Britain. The Journal of Ecology 48:639-646. Owen, D. F. and R. G. Weigert. 1976. Do consumers maximize plant fitness? Oikos 27:488-492. Ozoga, J.J. and C.J. Phillips. 1964. Mammals of Beaver Island Michigan. Biological Series, publications of the museum, Michigan State University, vol 2(6). Pacala, S. and J. Roughgarden. 1982. Resource partitioning and interspecific competition in two two-species insualr Anolis lizard communities. Science 217:444-446. |island experiments |non-mammals Pacala, S.W. and J. Roughgarden. 1985. Population experiemtns with the Anolis lizards of St. Maarten and St. Eustatius. Ecology 66(1):129-141. Pacala, S.W. and J.A. Silander, Jr. Neighborhood Models of Plant Population Dynamics, 1. Single-Species Models of Annuals. 1985. American Naturalist 125 :385-411. Pagels, J.F. 1977. Distribution and Habitat of Cotton Rat (Sigmodon Hispidus) in Central Virginia. Va. J. of Science 28(3):133-135. Pagels, J.F. and C.M. Tate. 1976. Shrews (Insectivora: Soricidae) of the Paddy Knob-Little Back Creek Area of Western Virginia. Virginia Journal of Science 27(4):202-203. Paine, R.T 1979. Disaster Catastrophe, and Local Persistence of the Sea Palm Postelsia palmaeformis . Science 205 (17):685-687. Paine, R.T. 1966. Food Web Complexity and Species Diversity. The American Naturalist 100(910):65-75. Paine, R.T. 1966. Food web complexity and species diversity. Am. Nat. 100:65-75. Paine, R.T. 1980. Food Webs: Linkage, Interaction strength and community infrastructure. The third Tansley lecture. J. of Animal Ecology 49:667-685. |assembly rules Paine, R.T., J.C. Castillo, and J. Cancino. 1985. Perturbation and recovery patterns of starfish-dominated intertidal assemblages in Chile, New Zealand and Washington State. Am. Nat. 125:679-691. Pais, A. 1982. Max Born's statistical interpretation of quantum mechanics. Science 218:1193-1198. Paradiso, J.L. and C.O. Handley. 1965. Checklist of Mammals of Assateague Island. Chesapeake Science 6(3):167-171. |Mammal Populations Coastal Insular Parker W.S. and E.R. Pianka. 1975. Comparative Ecology of Populations of the Lizard Uta stansburiana. Copeia 4:615-632. Parker, B.C. and B.L. Turner. 1961. "Operational Niches" and "Community-Interaction Values" as Determined from In Vitro Studies of Some Soil Algae. Evolution 15(2):228-238. Parker, W.S. and E.R. Pianka. Ecological Observation of the Leopard Lizard (Crotaphytus Wislizen) in Different Parts of its Range. Herpetologica 32(1):95-114. Patten, B.C. 1959. An Introduction to the Cybernetics of the Ecosystem: The Trophic-Dynamic Aspect. Ecology 40(2):221-231. Patten, B.C. 1964. The Plankton Community. Science 144(3618):556- 558 Patten, B.C. 1966. Systems Ecology: A Course Sequence in Mathematical Ecology. BioScience 16(9):593-598. Patten, B.C. and E.P. Odum. 1981. The cybernetic nature of ecosystems. Am. Nat. 118:886-895. Patten, B.C. and G.T. Auble. 1981. System theory of the ecological niche. The American Naturalist 117:893-992. Patten, B.C. and M. Witkamp. 1967. Systems Analysis of 134Cesium Kinetics in Terrestrial Microcosms. Ecology 48(5):813-824. Patterson, B. D. 1986. Nested subsets and the structure of insular mammalian faunas and archipelagos. Biol. J. Linnean Soc. 28:65-82. | extinction -- nested subsets -- biogeography -- archipelago | faunas -- simulation -- montane mammals -- American Southwest Patterson, B.D. 1981. Morphological shifts of some isolated populations of Eutamias (Rodentia: Sciuridae) in different congeric assemblages. Evolution 35:1-22. Patterson, B.D. 1986. Species Loss. Letters section: Science 234:1311. Patton, D. R. 1984. A model to evaluate abert squirrel habitat in uneven-aged Ponderosa pine. Wildl. Soc. Bull. 12:408-414. Patton, J. C., R. J. Baker and J. C. Avise. 1981. Phenetic and cladistic analysis of biochemical evolution in peromyscine rodents. in Mammalian population genetics. Eds. M. H. Smith and J. Joule. U. of GA Press, Athens. 288-308. Patton, J. C., R. J. Baker and J. C. Avise. 1981. Phenetic and cladistic analysis of biochemical evolution in peromyscine rodents. in Mammalian population genetics. Eds. M. H. Smith and J. Joule. U. of GA Press, Athens. 288-308. Patton, J.C., R.J. Baker and J.C. Avise. 1981. Phenetic and cladistic analyses fof biochemical evolution in peromyscus rodents. in, M.H. Smith and J. Joule (eds.). Peakall, D.B. 1970. Pesticides and the Reproduction of Birds. Scientific American 222(4):72-78. Pearson, O.P. 1963. History of Two Local Outbreaks of Feral House Mice. Ecology 44(3):540-549 Pearson, O.P. 1964. Carnivore-Mouse Predation: An Example of its Intensity and Bioenergetics. J of Mamm. 45(2):177-188. Pearson, O.P. The Prey of Carnivores during one cycle of Mouse Abundance. Peterman, R.M., W.C. Clark and C.S. Holling. The dynamics of resilience: shifting stability domains in fish and insect systems. Chapter 15. Peters, R.H. 1976. Tautology in Evolution and Ecology. The American Naturalist 110(971):1-12. Peters, R.H. and J.V. Raelson. 1984. Relations between individual size and mammalian population density. The American Naturalist 124(4):498-517. Petersen, M.K. 1973. Interactions between the cotton rats, sigmodon fulviventer and S. hispidus. The American Midland Naturalist 90(2):319-333. Peterson, R. O., R. E. Page and K. M. Dodge. 1984. Wolves, moose, and the allometry of population cycles. Science 224:1350- 1352. Peterson, R. O., R. E. Page and K. M. Dodge. 1984. Wolves, moose, and107(958):737-759. Peterson, R.O. and R.E. Page. 1988. The rise and fall of Isle Royale wolves, 1975-1986. J. Mamm. 69(1):89-99. Petrides, G.A. and W.G. Swank. 1958. Management of the Big Game Resource in Uganda, East Africa. Transactions of the 23rd N. American Wildlife Conference: Washington, D.C. Petrides, G.A. and W.G. Swank. Estimating the Productivity and Energy Relations of an African Elephant Population. Philips, R.E., R.L. Blevins, G.W. Thomas, W.W. Frye and S.H. Phillips. 1980. No-tillage agriculture. Science 208:1108- 1113. Phipps, R.L. 1985. Collecting, Preparing, Crossdating and measuring tree increment cores. USGS Water-Resources Investigations Report 85-4148. Phipps, R.L. 1985. Collecting, preparing, crossdating, and measuring tree increment cores. U. S. Geological Survey: Water-Resources Investigations Report 85-4148. Pianka, E.R 1971. Bird Species Density in the Kalahari and the Australian Deserts. Koedoe 14:123-130. Pianka, E.R and H.D. Pianka. 1976. Comparative Ecology of Twelve Species of Nocturnal Lizards (Gekkonidae) in the Western Australian Desert. Copeia 1:125-142. Pianka, E.R. (ed.). 1963. Attempt at Application of Analysis of Variation to the Qualitative Richness of the Fauna of Terrestrial Vertebrates. Smithsonian Herpetological Information Services (Translation of paper by: P.V. Terent'ev). Pianka, E.R. 1965. Species Diversity and Ecology of Flatland Desert Lizards in Western North America. Dissertation Abstracts 47:334B. Pianka, E.R. 1966. Convexity, Desert Lizards and Spatial Heterogeneity. Ecology 47(6):1055-1059. Pianka, E.R. 1966. Latitudinal Gradients in Species Diversity: A Review of Concepts. The American Naturalist 100(910):33-46. Pianka, E.R. 1966. Latitudinal gradients in species diversity: a review of concepts. Am. Nat. 100:33-46. Pianka, E.R. 1967. Lizard Species Diversity. Ecology 48(3):333- 351. Pianka, E.R. 1968. Notes on the Biology of Varanus Eremius. The Western Australian Naturalist 11(2):39-44. Pianka, E.R. 1969. Sympatry of Desert Lizards (Ctenotus) in Western Australia. Ecology 50(6):1012-1030. Pianka, E.R. 1970. Bird Censuses from Desert Localities in Wesstern Australia. The Emu 70(1):17-22. Pianka, E.R. 1970. On r and K Selection. The American Naturalist 102:592-597. Pianka, E.R. 1971. Australian Lizards. Copeia 4:764-766. Pianka, E.R. 1971. Comparative Ecology of Two Lizards. Copeia:129-138. Pianka, E.R. 1971. Ecology of the Agamid Lizard Amphibolurus isolepis in Western Australia. Pianka, E.R. 1971. Lizard Species Density in the Kalahari Desert. Ecology 52(6):1024-1029. Pianka, E.R. 1971. Notes on the Biology of Varanus Tristis. The Western Australian Naturalist 11(8):180-183. Pianka, E.R. 1972. Populations in a Seasonal Environment. Science 178:48-49. Pianka, E.R. 1972. Zoogeography and Speciation of Australian Desert Lizards: An Ecological Perspective. Copeia 1:127-145. Pianka, E.R. 1972. r and K Selection or b and d Selection. The American Naturalist 106(951):581-588. Pianka, E.R. 1973. The Structure of Lizard Communities. Annual Review of Ecology and Systematics Volume 4:53-74. Pianka, E.R. 1974. Niche Overlap and Diffuse Competition. Proc. Nat'l Acad. Sci. 71(5):2141-2145. Pianka, E.R. 1974. Niche Overlap and Diffuse Competition. Proc. Nat. Acad. Science 71(5):2141-2145. Pianka, E.R. 1976. Natural selection of optimal reproductive tactics. Amer. Zool. 16:775-784. Pianka, E.R. Competition and Niche Theory. Chapter 7. Pianka, E.R. and R.B. Huey. 1977. Natural Selection for Juvenile Lizards Mimicking Noxious Beetles. Science 195:201-203. Pianka, E.R. and W.S. Parker. 1972. Ecology of the Iguanid Lizard Callisaurus draconoides. Copeia 3(8):493-508. Pianka, E.R. and W.S. Parker. 1975. Age-Specific Reproductive Tactics. The American Naturalist 109(968):453-464. Pianka, E.R. and W.S. Parker. 1975. Ecology of Horned Lizards: A Review with Special Reference to Phrynosoma platyrhinos. Copeia 1:141-162. Pianka, E.R.. 1971. Notes on the Biology of Amphibolurus Cristatus and Amphibolurus Scutulatus. The Western Australian Naturalist 12:36-41. Pickral, J. 1974. The Hairston-Smith-Slobodkin Controversy: A Critical Review. Class Paper for R. Dueser ESEC 890. Pielou, D.P. and EC. Pielou. 1968. Association among Species of Infrequent Occurrence: The Insect and Spider Fauna of Polyporus betulinus (Bulliard) Fries. J. Theor. Biol. 21:202- 216. Pielou, E.C. 1963. The Concept of Segregation Pattern in Ecology: Some Discrete Distributions Applicable to the Run Lengths of Plants in Narrow Transects. in, Classical and Contagious Discrete Distributions. Proceedings of the International Symposium Montreal, Canada. Pielou, E.C. 1963. The Distributions of Diseased Trees with Respect to Healthy Ones in A Patchily Infected Forest. Biometrics 19(3):450-459. Pielou, E.C. 1966. Comment on a Report by J.H. Vandermeer and R.H. MacArthur Concerning the Broken Stick Model of Species Abundance. Ecology 47(6):1073-1074. Pielou, E.C. 1966. Correction to One of MacArthur's Species- Abundance Formulas. Science 151:592. Pielou, E.C. 1966. Shannon's formula as a measure of specific diversity: its use and misuse. Am. Nat. 100:463-465. Pielou, E.C. 1966. Species-Diversity and Pattern-Diversity in the Study of Ecological Succession. J. Theoret. Biol. 10:370-383. Pielou, E.C. 1967. A Test for Random Mingling of the Phases of a Mosaic. Biometrics 23(4):657-670. Pielou, E.C. 1972. 2 k Contingency Tables in Ecology. J. Theor. Biol. 34:337-352. Pielou, E.C. 1972. Niche Width and Niche Overlap: A Method for Measuring Them. Ecology 53(4):687-692. Pielou, E.C. 1981. The Usefulness of Ecological Models: A Stock- Taking. The Quarterly Review of Biology 56:17-31. Pielou, E.C. 1981. The broken-stick model: a common misunderstanding. Am. Nat. 117:609-610. Pimental, D. 1968. Population regulation and genetic feedback. Science 159:1432-1437. Pimentel, D. 1961. Animal population regulation by the genetic feed-back mechanism. Am. Nat. 95:65-79. Pimentel, D., S.A. Levin and A.B. Soans. 1975. On the Evolution of Energy Balance in Some Exploiter-Victim Systems. Ecology 56:381-390. Pimentel, R. A. and D. F. Frey. 1978. Multivariate analysis of variance and discriminant analysis. in Quantitative ethology. Ed. P. W. Colgan. John Wiley & Sons, New York. 247-274. Pimentel, R. A. and D. F. Frey. 1978. Multivariate analysis of variance and discriminant analysis. in Quantitative ethology. Ed. P. W. Colgan. John Wiley & Sons, New York. 247-274. Pimm, S. L. and M. Rejmanek w/ P. Stary. Bounds on food web connectance. Nat. 285(5766):591-592. Pimm, S.L. 1978. An Experimental Approach to the Effects of Predictability on Community Structure. Amer. Zool. 18:797- 808. Pimm, S.L. 1978. Niche Overlaps. (Review of "Food Webs and Niche Space" by J.E. Cohen). Science 202:1075-1076. Pimm, S.L. 1979. Complexity and stability: another look at MacArthur's Original Hypothesis. Oikos 33:351-357. Pimm, S.L. 1980. Bounds on food web connectance. Nature 285(5766):591-592. Pimm, S.L. 1980. Food Web design and the effect of species deletion. Oikos 35:139-149. Pimm, S.L. 1985. Estimating competition coefficients from census data. Oecologia 67:588-590. Pimm, S.L. and M.L. Rosenzweig. 1981. Competitors and Habitat Use. Oikos 37:1-6. Pimm, S.L. and M.L. Rosenzweig. 1985. Competition and food selection: Field tests of a theory. Ecology 66(3):798-807. Pinder, J.E. 1975. Effects of Species Removal on an Old-Field Plant Community. Ecology 56(3):747-751. Pinder, J.E., J.G. Wiener and M.H. Smith. 1978. The Weibull Distribution: A New Method of Summarizing Survivorship Data. Ecology 59(1):175-179. Pitelka, F.A. The Nutrient-Recovery Hypothesis for Arctic Microtine Cycles. Plass, G. N. 1959. Carbon dioxide and climate. Scientif. Amer. July 1959. Plass, G.N. 1959. Carbon Dioxide and Climate. Scientific American, July. Plass, G.N. 1959. Carbon Dioxide and Climate. Scientific American 201(1):41-47. Platnick, N.I. and G. Nelson. A method of analysis for historical biogeography. In, Systemic Zoology. Platt, J. R. 1966. More diversity in our science, our patterns of living, and our education would enrich us all. Science 154:1132-1138. Platt, J.R. 1964. Strong Inference. Science 146:347-353. Platt, J.R. 1966. Diversity. Science 154:1132-1152. Polis, G. A. 1984. Age structue component of niche width and intraspecific resource partitioning: can age groups function as ecological species? Am. Nat. 123(4):541-564. Poole, R.W. 1974. Measuring the structural similarity of two communities composed of the same species. Researches on Population Ecology 16(1):138-151. Poole, R.W. 1979. The statistical prediction of the fluctuations in abundance in Nicholson's sheep blowfly experiments. Spatial and temporal Analysis in Ecology pp. 213-246. Porter, A L., D. E. Chubin, F. A. Rossini, M. E Boeckmann and T. Connolly. 1982. The role of the dissertation in scientific careers. Am. Sci. 70:400-902. ( Filed with Rosenweig, M. L. Enriched predator-prey systems... ) Porter, J.H. and R.D. Dueser. 1982. Niche overlap and competition in an insular small mammal fauna: a test of the niche overlap hypothesis. Oikos 39:228-236. |UVA publications Porter, J.W. 1974. Community Structure of Coral Reefs on Opposite Sides of the Isthus of Panama. Science 186:543-545. Porter, K.G. 1976. Enhancement of Algal Growth and Productivity by Grazing Zooplankton. Science 192:1332-1333. Powell, J.R. and T. Dobzhansky. 1976. How Far Do Flies Fly? American Scientist 64:179-185. Power, D.M. 1975. Similarity among Avifaunas of the Galapogos Islands. Ecology 56(3):616-626. Power, D.M. 1976. Avifaunal Richness on the California Channel Islands. The Condor 78:394-398. Power, J.F. and R.F. Follett. Monoculture. pp79-87. Preisendorfer, R.W. and T. Barnett. 1983. Numerical Model-Reality Intercomparison Tests Using Small-Sample Statistics. J. of the Atmospheric Sciences 40:1884-1896. Press S. J. and S. Wilson. 1978. Choosing between logistic regression and discriminant analysis. J. Am. Stat. Assoc. 73(364):699-705. Press, S.J. and S. Wilson. 1978. Choosing Between Logistic Regression and Discriminant Analysis. J. of the American Statistical Association, December, 73(364):699-705. Preston, F. W. 1948. The commonness, and rarity, of species. Ecol. 29(3):254-283. Preston, F. W. 1962. The canonical distribution of commonness and rarity: part I. Ecol. 43(2):185-215. Preston, F. W. 1962. The canonical distribution of commonness and rarity: part II. Ecol. 43(3):410-432. Preston, F.W. 1948. The commonness, and rarity, of species. Ecology 29(3):254-283. Preston, F.W. 1962. The canonical distribution of commonness and rarity: Part I. Ecology 43(2):185-215. Preston, F.W. 1962. The canonical distribution of commonness and rarity: Part II. Ecology 43(3):410-432. Preston, F.W. The commoness, and rarity, of species. Ecology 29:254-283. Price, M. V. and K. A. Kramer. 1984. On measuring micrhabitat affinities with special reference to small mammals. Oikos 42:000-000. Price, M. V. and S. H. Jenkins. 1986. Rodents as seed consumers and dispersers. in Seed dispersal. Ed. D. R. Murray. Academic Press Australia. 123-189. Price, M. V. and S. H. Jenkins. 1986. Rodents as seed consumers and dispersers. in Seed dispersal. Ed. D. R. Murray. Academic Press Australia. 123-189. Price, M.V. 1978. The role of microhabitat in structuring desert Rodent Communities. Ecology 59(5):910-921. Price, M.V. 1983. Ecological consequences of body size: a model for patch choice in desert rodents. Oecologica in press Price, M.V. Laboratory studies of seed size and seed species selection by heteromyid rodents. in press, Oecologica. Price, M.V. and J.H. Brown. Patterns of Morphology and Resource use in North American Desert Rodent Communities. In, The Biology of Desert Rodents. Price, M.V. and K.A. Kramer. 1983. On measuring microhabitat affinities with special reference to small mammals. Oikos 8506/2594. Price, M.V. and K.A. Kramer. 1984. On measuring microhabitat affinities with special reference to small mammals. Oikos 42:349-354. Price, M.V. and N.M. Waser. 1983. On the Relative Abundance of Species: Post-Fire Changes in a Coastal Sage Scrub Rodent Community. Price, M.V. and N.M. Waser. 1984. On the relative abundance of species: postfire changes in a coastal sage scrub rodent community. Ecology 65(4):1161-1169. Price, M.V. and N.M. Waser. Microhabitat Use by Heteromyid Rodents: Effects of Artificial Seed Patches. submitted to Ecology. Price, P. W., C. E. Bouton, P. Gross, B. A. McPheron, J. N. Thompson and A. E. Weis. 1980. Interactions among three trophic levels: influence of plants on interactions between insect herbivores and natural enemies. Ann. Rev. Ecol. Syst. 11:41-65. Prothero, D..R. 1985. Mid-Oligocene extinction event in North American land mammals. Science 229:550-551. Pulliam, H.R. 1974. On the Theory of Optimal Diets. The American Naturalist 108(959):59-75. Pulliam, H.R. 1975. Coexistence of Sparrows: A Test of Community Theory. Science 189:474-476. Pulliam, H.R. and M.R. Brand. 1975. The Production and Utilization of Seeds in Plains Grassland of Southeastern Arizona. Ecology 56(5):1158-1166. Putz, F.E., G.G. Parker and R.M Archibald. 1984. Mechanical abrasion and intercrown spacing. Am. Midland Nat. 112(1):24- 28. Quarles, H.D., B. Hanawalt, and W.E. Odum. 1974. Lead in Small Mammals, Plants, and Soil at Varying Distances from a Highway. J Appl. Ecol. 11:937-949. Rabinowitz, D. A relationship between abundance and competitive ability: greenhouse experiments with seedlings of sparse and common prairie grasses. Manuscript. Racey, G.D. and D.L. Euler. 1983. Changes in mink habitat and food selection as influenced by cottage development in central Ontario. J. Applied Ecology 20:387-402. Radmer, R. and B. Kok. 1977. Photosynthesis: limited yields, unlimited dreams. BioSci 27(9):599-605. Radner, R. and B. Kok. 1977. Photosynthesis: Limited Yields, Unlimited Dreams. BioScience 27(9):599-605. Radovich, J. Application of Optimum Sustainable Yield Theory to Marine Fisheries. Rahel, F.J. 1984. Factors structuring fish assemblages along a bog lake succesioonal gradient. Ecology 65(4):1276-1289. Ralston, A. 1986. Discrete Mathematics: The New Mathematics of Science. American Scientist 74:611-618. Ramsey, P.R., J.C. Avise, M.H. Smith and D.F. Urbston. Biochemical Variation and Genetic Heterogeneity in South Carolina Deer Populations. J. Wildlife Manage. 43(1):136-142. Randall, J. A. 1978. Behavioral mechanisms of habitat segregation between sympatric species of Microtus : habitat preference and interspecific dominance. Behav. Ecol. Sociobiol. 3:187-202. Randall, J. A. 1978. Behavioral mechanisms of habitat segregation between sympatric species of Microtus : habitat preference and interspecific dominance. Behav. Ecol. Sociobiol. 3:187-202. Randolph, J.C. 1973. Ecological Energetics of a Homeothermic Predator, The Short-Tailed Shrew. Ecology 54(5):1166-1187. Randolph, J.C. 1980. Daily Energy Metabolism of Two Rodents (Peromyscus Leupocus and Tamias Striatus) in Their Natural Environment Raphael M. G. 1987. Estimating relative abundance of forest birds: simple versus adjusted counts. Wilson Bull. 99(1):125- 131. Raphael, M.G. and K.V. Rosenburg. An integrated approach to wildlife inventories in forested habitats. Manuscript. Rapoport, A. 1962. The Use and Misuse of Game Theory. Scientific American 207(6):108-118. Rapport, D.J. 1971. An Optimization Model of Food Selection. The American Scientist 105(946):575-587. Rasmussen, D.I. 1964. Blood group polymorphism and inbreeding in natural populations of the deer mouse Peromyscus maniculatus. Evolution 18(2):219-229. Rasmussen, D.I. 1970. Biochemical polymorphisms and genetic structure in populations of Peromyscus. Symp. zool. Soc. Lond. 26:335-349. Rasmussen, D.I. 1975. The Genus Peromyscus. in, Handbook of Genetics, Vol. 4, R.C. King (ed.), Plenum Press. Rasmussen, D.I. and J.N. Jensen. 1971. Serum esterase diversity in mice of the genus Peromyscus. Comp. Biochem. Physiol. 39B:19-24. Rasmussen, D.I. and R.K. Koehn. 1966. Serum transferrin polymorphism in the deer mouse. Genetics 54(6):1353-1357. Rasmussen, D.I., J.N. Jensen, and R.K. Koehn. 1968. Hemogoblin polymorphism in the deer mouse, Peromyscus maniculatus. Biochemical Genetics 2:87-92. Rasmussen, W. D. The mechinization of agriculture. | agriculture Rathcke, B. 1985. Slugs as generalist herbivores: tests of three hypotheses on plant choices. Ecology 66(3):828-836. Raun, G.G. 1959. Terrestrial and Aquatic Vertebrates of a Moist, Relic Area in Central Texas. The Texas Journal of Science 11(2):158-171. Raun, G.G. 1959. Terrestrial and Aquatic Vertebrates of a moist, Relict Area in Central Texas. The Texas Journal of Science 11(2):158-171. Raup, D. M. 1982. Large body impacts and terrestrial evolution meeting, October 19-22, 1981. Paleobio 8(1):1-3. Raup, D.M. 1972. Taxonomic Diversity during the Phanerozoic. Science 177:1065-1071. Rausch, R. 1947. Suggestions for the Handling of Certain Mammals. Rautenbach, I. L. and J. A. J. Nel. 1978. Coexistence in Transvaal carnivora 15(4):242-253. Rautenbach, I. L. and J. A. J. Nel. 1978. Coexistence in Transvaal carnivora. in Bulletin of Carnegie Museum of Natural History (6). Ed. D. A. Schlitter. Carnegie Mus. Nat. Hist., Pittsburgh, PA. pp. 138-145. Raven, P. J. 1981. A southern biota. (Book review) Science 214:1337-1338. Reader, P. M. and T. R. E. Southwood. 1984. Studies on the flight activity of the Viburnum whitefly, a reluctant flyer. Entomol. exp. appl. 36:185-191. | flight -- dispersal -- aerial density -- migration -- whitefly | host plant Rebar, C. and O.J. Reichman. 1983. Ingestion of moldy seeds by heteromyid rodents. J. Mamm. 64(4):713-715. Rebar, C. and W. Conley. 1983. Interactions in microhabitat use between Dipodomys ordii and Onychomys leucogaster. Ecology 64(5):984-988. Recher, H.F. 1959. Bird Species Diversity and Habitat Diversity in Australia and North America. The American Naturalist 103(929):65-80. Redfield, A.C. 1958. The Biological Control of Chemical Factors in the Environment. American Scientist 46(3):205-222 Redfield, J.A. 1975. Comparative demography of increasing and stable populations of blue grouse (Dendragapus obscurus). Canadian J. of Zoology 53(1):1-11. Redfield, J.A., C.J. Krebs, and M.J. Taitt. 1977. Competition between Peromyscus maniculatus and Microtus townsendii in grasslands of coastal British Columbia. J. Anim. Ecol. 46:607-616. Regier, H.A. and E.B. Cowell. 1972. Applications of Ecosystem Theory, Succession, Diversity, Stability, Stree and Conservation. Biological Conservation 4(2):83-88 Regier, H.A. and W.L. Hartman. 1973. Lake Erie's Fish Community: 150 years of Cultural Stresses. Science 180:1248-1255. Rehfeldt, G. E. 1986. Adaptive vaiation in Pinus ponderosa from intermountain regions. II. Middle Colmbia River system. U. S. Dept. Agri. For. Serv. Res. Pap. INT-373. Rehfeldt, G.E. 1986. Adaptive Variation in Pinus Ponderosa from Intermountain Regions. II. Middle Columbia River System. USDAFS Research Paper INT-373. Reich, L.M. and R.H. Tamarin. 1980. Trap use as an indicator of social behavior in mainland and island voles. Acta Theriologica 25(23):Rosenzweig, M.L., Z. Abramsky, B. Kotler and W. Mitchell. 1985. Can interaction coefficients be determined from census data? Oecologia 66:194-198. |competition |dabate |evidence |reviews Reich, L.M. and R.H. Tamarin. 1984. Multiple capture trap associations of meadow voles (Microtus pennsylvanicus). J. Mamm. 65(1):85-90. Reiche, D.E. 1975. Advances in Ecosystem Analysis. BioScience 25(4):257-264. Reichert, S.E. 1974. Thoughts on the Ecological Significance of Spiders. BioScience 24(6):352-356. Reichman, O.J. 1975. Relation of Desert Rodent Diets to Available Resources. J. of Mamm. 56(4):731-751. Reichman, O.J. 1977. Optimization of Diets Through Food Preferences by Heteomyid Rodents. Ecology 58(2):454-457. Reichman, O.J. and D. Oberstein. 1977. Selection of Seed Distribution Types by Dipodomys Merriami and Perognathus Amplus. Ecology 58(3):636-643. Reichman, O.J. and K.M. Van De Graaff. 1973. Seasonal Activity and Reproductive Patterns of Five Species of Sonoran Desert Rodents. The American Midland Naturalist 90(1):118-126. Reichman, O.J. and K.M. Van de Graaff. 1975. Association Between Ingestion of Green Vegetation and Desert Rodent Production. J. of Mamm. 56(2):503-506. Reichman, O.J. and R.J. Baker 1972. Distribution and Movements of Two Species of Pocket Gophers (Geomyidae) in an Area of Sympatry in the Davis Mountains, Texas. J. of Mamm. 53(1):21- 33. Reichman, O.J. and Van de Graaff, K.M. 1975. Association between ingestion of green vegetation and desert rodent reproduction. J. Mamm. 56(2):503-506. Remsen, J. V., Jr. 1984. High incedence of "leapfrog" pattern of geographic variation in Andean birds: implications for the speciation process. Science 224:171-173. Reville, B.J. 1983. Numbers of nesting frigatebirds, Fregata minor and F. ariel, on Aldabra atoll nature reserve, Seychelles. Biological Conservation 27:59-76 Rey, J.R. Experimental tests of island biogeographic theory. Chapter 7. |equilibrium model Rey, J.R. and D.R. Strong. 1983. Immigration and extinction of salt marsh arthropods on islands: an experimental study. Oikos 41:396-401. |island experiments |non-mammals Rey, J.R., D.R. Strong and E.D. McCoy. 1982. On overinterpretation of the species-area relationship. Am. Nat. 119:741-743. |equilibrium theory |density compensation Reynolds, R.T. and D.B. Linkhart. 1984. Methods and materials for capturing and monitoring flammulated owls. Great Basin Naturalist 44(1):49-51. Reynolds, R.T. and E.C. Meslow. 1984. Partioning of Food and Niche Characteristics of Coexisting Accipiter During Breeding. The Auk 101:761-779. Rice, J., R.D. Ohmart, and B.W. Anderson. 1983. Turnovers in species composition of avian communities in contiguois riparian habitats. Ecology 64(6):1444-1455. Richard, A.F. 1982. Primate ecology and social organization. Carolina Biological Supply Co. Readers Series. Richardson, C.J. 1985. Mechanisms controlling phosphorus retention capacity in freshwater wetlands. Science 228:1424- 1427. Richardson, J. L. 1980. The organismic community: resilience of an embattled ecological concept. BioSci. 30(7):465-471. Richardson, L., T. W. Clark, S. C. Forrest and T. M. Campbell III. 1987. Winter ecology of black-footed ferrets ( Mustela nigripes ) at Meeteese, Wyoming. The Am. Mid. Nat. 117(2):225- 239. Ricker, W.E. 1954. Effects of compensatory mortality upon population abundance. J. Wildl. Manage. 18:45-51. Ricklefs, R. E. 1970. Prey population: a parsimonious maodel for evolution of response to predator species diversity; response to J. Ghiselin. Science 170:650-651. (Filed with J. E. Tyson et al. Limit cycles...) Ricklefs, R.E. 1970. Clutch Size in Birds: Outcome of Opposing Predator and Prey Adaptations. Science 168:599-600. Ricklefs, R.E. 1970. Prey Population: A Parsimonious Model for Evolution of Response to Predator Species Diversity. Science 170:649-651. Ricklefs, R.E. 1972. Dominance and the Niche in Bird Communities. The American Naturalist 106(950):538-545. Ricklefs, R.E. 1983. A comment on the regulation of reproductive success towards e -1 . Oikos 41(2):284-292. Ricklefs, R.E. and G.W. Cox. 1977. Morphological similarity and ecological Riechert, S. E. and A. B. Cady. 1983. Patterns of resource use and tests for competitive release in a spider community. Ecol. 64(4):899-913. Riechert, S.E. 1986. Spider Fights as a Test of Evolutionary Game Theory. Amerian Scientist 74:604-609. Risser, P.G. and W.J. Parton. 1982. Ecosystem analysis of the tallgrass prairie: nitrogen cycle. Ecology 63(5):1342-1351. Robbins, L.W., M.H. Smith, M.C. Wooten, and R.K. Selander. 1985. Biochemical polymorphism and its relationship to chromosomal and morphological variation in Peromyscus leocopus and peromyscus gossypinus. J. Mamm. 66(3):498-510 Robinson, T.J., F.F.B. Elder and J.A. Chapman. 1983. Evolution of chromosomal variation in cottontails, genus Sylvilagus (Mammalia: Lagomorpha): S. aquaticus, S. floridanus, and S. transitionalis. Cytogenet. Cell Genet. 35:216-222. Robinson, T.J., F.F.B. Elder and J.A. Chapman. 1984. Evolution of chromosomal variation in cottontails, genus Sylvilagus (Mammalia: Lagomorpha). Cytogenet. Cell Genet. 38:282-289. Robinson, T.J., F.F.B. Elder, and J.A. Chapman. 1983. Karotypic conservatism in the genus Lepus (order Lagomorpha). Can. J. Genet. Cytol. 25:540-544. Robinson, W.I. and J.B. Falls. 1965. A Study of Homing of Meadow Mice. The American Midland Naturalist 73(1):188-224. Rogers, H. H., J. F. Thomas and G. E. Bingham. 1983. Response of agronomic and forest species to elevated atmocpheric carbon dioxide. Science 220:428-429. Ronco, F., C.B. Edminster, and D.P. Trujillo. Growth of Ponderosa Pine Thinned to Differnet Stocking Levels in Northern Arizona. USDAFS Research Paper RM-262. Ronco, F., Jr., C. B. Edminster and D. P. Trujillo. 1985. Growth of ponderosa pine thinned to different stocking levels in northern Arizona. U. S. Dept. Agri. For. Serv. Res. Pap. RM- 262. Rood, J.P. 1965. Observations on the life cycle and variation of the long-tailed field mouse Apodemus sylvaticus on the isles of Scilly and Cornwall. J. Zool. 147:99-107. Root, R.B. 1967. The Niche Exploitation Pattern of the Blue-Gray Gnatcatcher. Ecological Monographs 37(4):317-350. Rose, G.B. 1979. Calcium Cycling and Trophic Relationships of Arthropods in a 45Ca-Tagged Cornfield. Oecologia 38:127-146. Rose, M. R. and W. F. Doolittle. 1983. Molecular biological mechanisms of speciation. Science 220:157-162. Rose, R.K. and E.C. Birney. 1985. Community Ecology. Biology of New World Microtus. 8:310-339. Rose, R.K. and M.S. Gaines. 1976. Levels of Agression in Fluctuating Populations of the Prairie Vole, Microtus Ochrogaster, in Eastern. J. of Mamm. 57(1):43-57. Rose, R.K. and R.D. Dueser. 1980. Lifespan of Virginia meadow voles. J. Mamm. 61(4):760-763. Rose, R.K., N.A. Slade, and J.H. Honacki. 1977. Live Trap Preference Among Grassland Mammals. Acta Theriologica 22(21):296-307. Rosen, D. E. 1985. Geological hierarchies and biogeographic congruence in the Caribbean. Ann. Missouri Bot. Gard. 72:636- 659. Rosen, D.E. Vicariant patterns and historical explanation in biogeography. in, Systemic Zoology. Rosenweig, M. L. 1972. Response to M. E. Gilpin. Enriched predator-prey sysrems: theoretical stability. Science 177:903-904. (Filed with Gilpin) Rosenzeig, M.L., A. Abramsky, and S. Brand. 1984. Estimating species interactions in heterogeneous environments. Oikos 43:329-340. Rosenzweig, M.L 1968. The Strategy of Body Size in Mammalian Carnivores. The American Midland Naturalist 80(2):299-315. Rosenzweig, M.L. 1966. Community Structure in Sympatric Carnivora. J. of Mamm. 47(4):602-612. Rosenzweig, M.L. 1968. Anecdotal Evidence for the Reality of Character Convergence. The American Naturalist 102(927):491- 492. Rosenzweig, M.L. 1969. Why the Prey Curve has a Hump. The American Naturlist 103(929):81-87. Rosenzweig, M.L. 1971. Paradox of Enrichment: Destabilization of Exploitation Ecosystems in Ecological Time. Science 171:385- 387. Rosenzweig, M.L. 1972. Enriched Predator-Prey Systems: Theoretical Stability. Science 177:902-904. Rosenzweig, M.L. 1974. On the Evolution of Habitat Selection. in, Proceedings of the 1st International Congress of Ecology. Rosenzweig, M.L. 1977. Aspects of Biological Exploitation. The Quarterly Review of Biology 52:371-380. Rosenzweig, M.L. 1979. Optimal habitat selection in two-species competitive systems. Fortschr. Zool. 25:283-293. Rosenzweig, M.L. 1981. A theory of habitat selection. Ecology 62(2):327-335. Rosenzweig, M.L. Competitive Speciation. Manuscript. Rosenzweig, M.L. Literature Cited. (List of references). Rosenzweig, M.L. and J. Winakur. 1969. Population Ecology of Desert Rodent Communities: Habitats and Environmental Complexity. Ecology 50(4):558-572. Rosenzweig, M.L. and P.W. Steiner. 1970. Population ecology of desert rodent communities: body size and seed-husking as bases for heteromyid coexistence. Ecology 51(2):217-224. Rosenzweig, M.L. and R.H. MacArthur. 1963. Graphical Representation and Stability Conditions of Predator-Prey Interactions. The American Naturalist XCVII(895):209-223 Rosenzweig, M.L. and R.H. MacArthur. 1963. Graphical Representation and Stability Conditions of Predator-Prey Interations. The American Naturalist 895:209-223. Rosenzweig, M.L., Z. Abramsky, B. Kotler, and W. Mitchell. 1985. Can interaction coefficients be determined from census data? Oecologia 66:194-198. Ross, M.H. and G. Bras. 1975. Food Preference and Length of Life. Science 190:165-167. Rossi, L., E.A. Fano and A. Basset. 1983. Sympatric coevolution of the trophic niche of two detritivorous isopods, Asellus aquaticus and Proasellus coxalis. Oikos 40:208-215. Rotenberry, J. T. and J. A. Wiens. 1980. Habitat structure, patchiness, and avian communities in North American steppe vegetation: a multivariate analysis. Ecology 61(5):1228- 1250. Rotenberry, J. T. and J. A. Wiens. 1980. Habitat structure, patchiness, and avian communities in North American steppe vegetation: a multivariate analysis. Ecology 61(5):1228-1250. Rotenberry, J.T. and J.A. Wiens. 1980. Temporal Variation in Habitat Structure and Shrubsteppe Bird Dynamics. Oecologia 47:1-9. Rotenberry, J.T. and J.A. Wiens. 1985. Statistical power analysis and community-wide patterns. Am. Nat. 125:164-168. |island experiments |non-mammals Rotenberry, J.T. and J.A. Wiens. Habitat Structure, Patchiness, and Avian Communities in North American Steppe Vegetation: A Multivariate Analysis. Ecology 61(5):1228-1250. Roth, V.L. 1981. Constancy in the size ratios of sympatric species. Am. Nat. 118(3):394-404. Rothstein, S.I. 1973. The niche-variation model - is it valid? The American Naturalist 107(957):598-620. Roubik, D.W. 1983. Experimental community studies: time-series tests of competition between african and neotropical bees. Ecology 64(5):971-978. Roubik, D.W. Obligate necrophagy in a social bee. Science 217:1059-1060. Roughgarden, J. 1971. Density-Dependent Natural Selection. Ecology 52(3):453-468. Roughgarden, J. 1972. Evolution of Niche Width. The American Naturalist. 106(952):683-718. Roughgarden, J. 1974. Population dynamics in a spatially varying environment: how population size "tracks" spatial variation in carrying capacity. The American Naturalist 108(963):649- 664. |equilibrium theory |density compensation Roughgarden, J. 1983. Competition and theory in community ecology. The American Naturalist 122(5):583-601. |competition |dabate |evidence |reviews Roughgarden, J. and J. Diamond. Overview: The role of species interactions in community ecology. Chapter 20. Roughgarden, J. and M. Feldman. 1975. Species packing and predation pressure. Ecology 56:489-492. Roughgarden, J.D. and E. Fuentes. 1977. The Environmental Determinants of Size in Solitary Populations of West Indian Anolis Lizards. Oikos 29:44-51. Rowe, F.P. 1981. Wild house mouse biology and control. Symp. zoool. Soc. London. 47:575-589. |Species of interest Rowe, J.H. 1961. Archaeology as a Career. Archaeology 14(1):45- 55. Rowe, J.S. 1961. The Level-of-Integration Concept and Ecology. Ecology 42(2):420-427. Rowley, M.H. and J.J. Christian. 1977. Competition between Lactating Peromyscus leucopus and Juvenile Microtus pennsylvanicus. Behavioral Biology 20:70-80. Royama, T. 1984. Population dynamics of the spruce budworm Choristoneura fumiferana. Ecological Monographs 54(4):429- 462. Rozensweig, M.L. 1972. Stability of Enriched Ecosystems. Science 175:564-565. Rummel, J.D. and J. Roughgarden. 1985. Effects of reduced perch- height separation on competition between two Anolis lizards. Ecology 66(2):430-444. |island experiments |non-mammals Rummel, J.D. and J. Roughgarden. Some differences between invasion-structured and coevolution-structures competitive communities: a preliminary theoretical analysis. Oikos 41:477-486. |assembly rules Rummel, R. J. 1970. Preliminary descriptive and vector concepts. in Applied factor analysis. Northwestern U. Press. 35-100. Sauer, J. R. 1983. Mortality associated with severe weather in a northern population of cotton rats. Amer. Midl. Nat. :188- 189. Rummel, R. J. 1970. Preliminary descriptive and vector concepts. in Applied factor analysis. Northwestern U. Press. 35-100. Runkle, J. R. 1981. Gap regeneration in some old-growth forests of the eastern United States. Ecol. 62(4):1041-1051. Rusterholz, K. A. 1981. Competition and the structure of an avian foraging guild. Am. Nat. 118(2):173-190. Rusterholz, K.A. 1981. Niche overlap among foliage-gleaning birds: support for Pianka's niche overlap hypothesis. Am. Nat. 117:395-399. Rutledge, R.W., B.L. Basore and R.J. Mulholland. 1976. Ecological Stability: An Information Theory Viewpoint. J. Theor. Biol. 57:355-371. Ryder, V.L. On the Morphology of Leaves. The Botanical Review: 263-276. Sale, P.F. 1982. Stock-recruit relationships and regional coexistence in a lottery competitive system: a simulation study. The American Naturalist 120(2):139-159. |community assembly Sale, P.F. and D.M. Williams. 1982. Community structure of coral reef fishes: are the patterns more than those expected by chance? Am. Nat. 120:121-127. |community assembly Salt, G.W. 1966. An examination of logarithmic regression as a measure of population density response. Ecology 47:1035-1039. Salt, G.W. 1983. Roles: their limits and responsibilities in ecological and evolutionary research. Am. Nat. 122:697-705. Samuelson, R.J. 1967. Redwood Park: Squabbling on Details Delays Final Agreement. Science 157:410. Samways, M.J. 1983. Community structure of ants (hymenoptera: formicidae) in a series of habitats associated with citrus. J. Applied Ecology 20:833-847. Sanderson, G.C., ED. Ables, R.D. Sparrowe, J.R. Grieb, L.D. Harris, and A.N. Moen. Research Needs in Wildlife. Sanderson, H.R. and L.A. Berry. 1973. Gray Squirrels Reproduce in a 2-acre Enclosure. USDAFS Research Note NE-174. Sauer, J. R. and N. A. Slade. 1985. Mass-based demography of a hispid cotton rat ( Sigmodon Hispidus ) population. J. Mamm. 66(2):316-328. Sauer, J. R. and N. A. Slade. 1986. Field-determined growth rates of prarie voles ( Microtus ochrogaster ): observed patterns and environmental influences. J. Mamm. 67(1):61-68. Sauer, J. R. and N. A. Slade. 1986. Size-dependant population dynamics of Microtus ochrogaster . Am. Nat. 127(6):902-908. Sauer, J.D. 1964. Oceanic islands and biogeographical theory: a review. |equilibrium model Sauer, J.R. and N.A. Slade. 1987. Size-based demography of vertebrates. Ann. Rev. Ecol. Syst. 18:71-90. Sauer, J.R. and N.A. Slade. 1987. Uinta ground squirrel demography: is body mass a better categorical variable than age? Ecology 68(3):642-650. Savage, H. M. 1983. The shape of evolution: systematic tree topology. Bio. J. of the Linn. Soc. 20:225-244. Savage, J.M. 1982. The enigma of the central american herpetofauna: dispersals or vicariance? Ann. Missouri Bot. Garden 69:464-547. Schaffer, W.M. 1968. Character Displacement and the Evolution of the Hominidae. The American Naturalist 102(928):559-571. Schaffer, W.M. 1983. The application of optimal control theory to the general life history problem. Am. Nat. 121:418-431. Schaffer, W.M. 1984. Stretching and folding in lynx fur returns: evidence for a strange attractor in nature? Am. Nat. 124(6):798-820. Schaffer, W.M. and D.W. Zeh. 1983. Competition for Nectar between Introduced Honey Bees and Native North American Bees and Ants. Ecology 64(3):564-577. Schaffer, W.M. and M. Kot. 1985. Do strange attractors govern ecological systems? BioScience 35(6):342-350. Schaffer, W.M. and M. Kot. 1985. Nearly one dimensional dynamics in an epidemic. J. theoret. Biol. 112:403-427. Schaffer, W.M., R.S. Inouye and T.S. Whittam. 1982. Energy allocation by an annual plant when the effects of seasonality on growth and reproduction are decoupled. Am. Nat. 120:787- 815. Schall, J. J. and E. R. Pianka. 1978. Geographical trends in numbers of species. Science 201(4357):679-686. Schall, J.J. and E.R. Pianka. 1978. Geographical Trends in Numbers of Species. Science 201:679-686. Schaller, G.B. 1972. Are you running with me, hominid? Predators of the Serengeti: Part II. Schaller, G.B. 1972. The Endless Race of Life. Conclusion in a Series. in, The Serengeti Lion: University of Chicago Press. Schaller, G.B. 1972. The Social Carnivore. Predators of the Serengeti: Part I. Schindler, D.W., K.H. Mills, D.F. Malley, D.L. Findlay, J.A. Shearer, I.J. Davies, M.A. Turner, G.A. Linsey, and D.R. Cruikshank. 1985. Long-term ecosystem stress: the effects of years of experimental acidification on a small lake. Science 228:1395-1401. Schlesinger, W.H. Toxic foods and vole cycles. Schlieter, J. A. 1986. Estimation of diameter at breast height from stump diameter for lodgepole pine. U. S. Dept. Agri. For. Serv. Res. Note INT-359. Schlieter, J.A. 1986. Estimation of Diameter at Breast Height from Stump Diameter for Lodgepole Pine. USDAFS Research Note INT-359. Schlitter, D. A. 1978. Editor's notes in Ecology and taxonomy of African small mammals. Bulletin of Carnegie Mus. of Nat. Hist. #6. pp. 9-10. Schluter, D., T.D. Price and P.R. Grant. 1985. Ecological character displacement in Darwin's finches. Science 227:1056- 1059. |island experiments |non-mammals Schmitt, R.J. 1985. Competitive interactions of two mobile prey species in a patchy environment. Ecology 66(3):950-958. Schnell, G. D. and R. K. Selander. 1981. Environmental and morphological correlates of genetic variation in mammals. in Mammalian population genetics. Eds. M. H. Smith and J. Joule. U. of GA Press, Athens. 60-99. Schnell, G. D. and R. K. Selander. 1981. Environmental and morphological correlates of genetic variation in mammals. in Mammalian population genetics. Eds. M. H. Smith and J. Joule. U. of GA Press, Athens. 60-99. Schnell, G.D. and R.K. Selander. 1981. Environmental and morphological correlates of genetic variation in mammals. in, Mammalian Population Genetics, M.H. Smith and J. Joule (eds.). Schnell, G.D., J.A. Gryzbowski, D.J. Hough and T.M. McKenna. 1985. Evaluation of spatial patterning in Oklahoma furbearer populations. The Southwestern Naturalist 30(2):225-238. Schoch, R. M. and P. F. A. Maderson. 1983. Evolution debate. Science 220:360. | creationism Schoen, J.W., S.D. Miller and H.V. Reynolds III. 1987. Last stronghold of the Grizzly. Natural History, January 1987. Schoener, A. and T.W. Schoener. 1984. Experiments on dispersal: short-term floatation of insular anoles, with a review of similar abilities in other terrestrial animals. Oecologia 63:289-294. |island experiments |non-mammals Schoener, T. W. 1984. Size differences among sympatric, bird- eating hawks: a worldwide survey. in Ecological communities - conceptual issues and the evidence. Eds. D. R. Strong, Jr., D. Simberloff, L. G. Abele and A. B. Thistle. Prinston University Press. pp. 255-281. Schoener, T.W. 1968. The Anolis Lizards of Bimini: Resource Partitioning in a Complex Fauna. Ecology 49(4):704-726. Schoener, T.W. 1968. The Anolis Lizards of Bimini: Resource Partitioning in a Complex Fauna. Ecology 49(4):704-727. Schoener, T.W. 1974. Competition and the Form of Habitat Shift. Theoretical Population Biology 6:265-307. |equilibrium theory |density compensation Schoener, T.W. 1974. Resource Partitioning in Ecological Communities. Science 185:27-39. Schoener, T.W. 1974. Some methods for calculating competition coefficients from resource-utilization spectra. Am. Nat. 108(961):332-341. Schoener, T.W. 1975. Terrestrial Vertebrates on Very Small Islands: The Attenuation of Species Diversity. Seminar Notes: 2/27/75. Schoener, T.W. 1982. The controversy over interspecific competition. Amer. Sci. 70:586-595. |competition |dabate |evidence |reviews Schoener, T.W. 1983. Field Experiments on interspecific competition. The American Naturalist 122(2):240-285. Schoener, T.W. 1983. Rate of species turnover decreases from lower to higher organisms: a review of the data. Oikos 41:372-377. |community assembly Schoener, T.W. 1983. Rate of species turnover decreases from lower to higher organisms: a review of the literature. Oikos 41:372-377. |equilibrium model Schoener, T.W. 1983. Spider populations: extraordinarily high densities in islands without top predators. Science 219:1353- 1355. |island experiments |non-mammals Schoener, T.W. 1983. The time to extinction of a colonizing propagule of lizards increases with island area. Nature 302:332-334. |island experiments |non-mammals Schoener, T.W. 1985. Some comments on Connell's and my reviews of field experiments on interspecific competition. The American Naturalist 125(5):730-740. Schoener, T.W. 1985. Some comments on Connell's and my reviews of field experiments on interspecific competition. The American Naturalist 125(5):730-740. |competition |dabate |evidence |reviews Schoener, T.W. Overview: Kinds of ecological communities - ecology becomes pluralistic. Chapter 28. Schoener, T.W. Patterns in terrestrial vertebrate versus arthropod communities: do systematic differences in regularity exist? Chapter 33. Schoener, T.W. Resource partitioning in ecological communities. Science 185:27-39. |competition |dabate |evidence |reviews Schoener, T.W. Size Differences among Sympatric, Bird-Eating Hawks: A Worldwide Survey. Schoener, T.W. Theory of Feeding Strategies. 369-404. Schoener, T.W. and A. Schoener. 1983. Distribution of vertebrates on some very small islands. I. Occurrence sequences of individual species. J. Animal Ecology 52:209-235. |island experiments |non-mammals Schoener, T.W. and A. Schoener. 1983. Distribution of vertebrates on some very small islands. II. Patterns in species number. J. An. Ecology 52:237-262. |island experiments |non-mammals Schoener, T.W. and G.C. Gorman. 1968. Some Niche Differences in Three Lesser Antillean Lizards of the Genus Anolis. Ecology 49(5):819-830. Schreuder, H.T. and G.E. Brink. 1987. Volume estimation by diameter class using bootstrap variance estimates. Forest Ecology and Management 20:189-194. Schreuder, H.T., S. Banyard and G.E. Brink. 1987. Comparison of three sampling methods in estimating stand parameters for a tropical forest. Forest Ecology and Management 21:119-127. Schroder, G.D. and M.L. Rosenzweig. 1975. Perturbation analysis of competitionand overlap in habitat utilization between Dipomys ordii and Dipodomys merriami. Oecologia 19:9-28. Schulter, D. and P.R. Grant. 1982. The distribution of geospiza difficilis in relation to G. fuluginosa in the Galapagos islands: tests of three hypotheses. Evolution 36(6):1213- 1226. |assembly rules Schuster, R.H. 1976. Lekking Behavior in Kafue Lechwe. Science 192:1240-1242. Schwerdtfeger, F. Is the density of animal populations regulated by mechanisms or by chance? Proc. of the 10th Int; Congress of Entomology 4:115-122. Scott, D.E. and R.D. Dueser. 1986. Habitat use by insular populations of Mus and Peromyscus: What is the Role of Competition? Submitted to Ecology, January 1986. |UVA publications Scott, D.E. and R.D. Dueser. Habitat use by two small mammal species: What is the role of competition? |UVA publications Scott, M. L. and P. G. Murphy. 1986. Origin and composition of an old-growth cedar-hardwood stand: the role of dune activity. The Michigan Botanist 25:57-65. Scott, V.E. and G.L. Crouch. 1987. Response of breeding birds to commercial clearcutting of Aspen in Southwestern Colorado. USDA FS Research Note RM-475. Seagle, S. W. and H. H. Shugart. 1985. Faunal richness and turnover on dynamic landscapes: a simulation study. J. Biogeo. 12:499-508. Seagle, S.W. Charaterization of patchy small mammal microhabitats. Manuscript. Seagle, S.W., H.H. Shugart and D.C. West. 1984. Habitat Availability and Animal Community Characteristics. Oak Ridge National Laboratory Publ. #2217. Seagle, S.W., H.H. Shugart and D.C. West. 1984. Habitat availability and animal community characteristics. ORNL/TM- 8864. Seeley, T. D. 1983. The ecology of tropical and temperate honeybee societies. Am. Sci. 71:264-272. Selander, R.K. 1965. On Mating Systems and Sexual Selection. The American Naturalist XCIX(906):129-141. Selander, R.K. 1966. Sexual Dimorphism and Differential Niche Utilization in Birds. The Condor 68(2):113-151. Selander, R.K. 1967. Evolution in the House Sparrow. I. Intrapopulation Variation in North America. The Condor 69(3):217-258. Selander, R.K. 1970. Biochemical polymorphisms in populations of the house mouse and old-field mouse. Symp. zool. Soc. Lond. 26:73-91. Selander, R.K. and D. W. Kaufman. 1973. Genic Variability and Strategies of Adaptation in Animals. Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. 70(6):1875-1877. Selander, R.K. and D.W. Kaufman. 1973. Self-Fertilization and Genetic Population Structure in a Colonizing Land Snail. Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. 70(4):1186-1190. Selander, R.K., D.W. Kaufman, R.J. Baker, and S.L. Williams. Genic and Chromosomal Differentiation in Pocket Gophers of the Geomys Bursarus Group. Evolution 28(4):557-564. Selander, R.K., S.Y. Yang, and W.G. Hunt. 1969. XVI. Polymorphism in Esterases and Hemogoblin in Wild Populations of the House Mouse (Mus musculus). Studies in Genetics V. The University of Texas:Austin, TX Selander, R.K., W.G. Hunt and S.Y. Yang. 1969. Protein Polymorphism and Genic Heterozygosity in Two European Subspecies of the House Mouse. Evolution 23(3):379-390. Selander, T.W. 1969. The Ecological Aspects of the Systematics of Animals. Systematic Biology:213-239. Selvin, H.C. and A. Stuart. 1966. Data-Dredging Procedures in Survey Analysis. The American Statistician. Selvin, H.C. and A. Stuart. 1966. Data-dresging procedures in survey analysis. The American Statistician, June. Servello, F.A., K.E. Webb, and R.L. Kirkpatrick. Estimation of the digestibility of diets of small mammals in natural habitats. J. Mamm. 64(4):603-609. Shaffer, M.L., F.B. Samson. 1985. Notes and Comments: Population size and extinction: a note on determining critical population sizes. Am. Nat. 125:144-152. Shaffer, Mark L. 1981. Minimum population sizes for species conservation. BioScience 31(2):131-134. Shank, C.C. 1982. Age-sex differences in the diets of wintering Rocky Mountain bighorn sheep. Ecology 63(3):627-633. Shanks, R. E. and F. H. Norris. 1950. Microclimatic variation in a small valley in eastern Tennessee. Ecol. 31(4):532-539. Sharp, W.C. Conservation plants for the Northeast. Soil Conservation Service, USDA Program Aid # 1154. Shaw, R.F. and J.D. Mohler. 1953. The Selective Significance of the Sex Ratio. The American Naturalist LXXXVII(837):337-342. Sheffield, R. M. 1981. Multiresource inventories: techniques for evaluating nongame bird habitat. U. S. Dept. Agri. Forest Service Research Paper SE-218. | wildlife habitat evaluation -- habitat parameters | multiple use Shelly, T.E. and S.W. Christensen. 1982. Testing for competition: a critique of de Vita;s use of the broken-stick model. Am. Nat. 119:435-437. Sheppard, D.H. and S.M. Yoshida. 1971. Social Behavior in Captive Richardson's Ground Squirrels. J. of Mamm. 52(4):793-799. Sheppe, W. 1965. Characteristics and Uses of Peromyscus Tracking Data. Ecology 46(5):630-634. Sheppe, W. 1967. The Effect of Livetrapping on the Movement of Peromyscus. The American Midland Naturalist 78(2):471-480. Sherman, P.W. 1977. Nepotism and the Evolution of Alarm Cells. Science 197:1246-1254. Sherry, T.W. 1984. Comparative dietary ecology of sympatric, insectivorous neotropical flycatchers (Tyrannidae). Ecological Monographs 54(3):313-338. Shideler, G.L., J.C. Ludwick, G.F. Oertel, and K.Finkelstein. 1984. Quaternary stratigraphic evolution of the southern Delamrva Peninsula coastal zone, Cape Charles, Virginia. Geological Society of America Bulletin 95:489-502. |UVA publications Shugart, H. H., Jr. and D. C. West. 1980. Forest succession models. BioSci. 30(5):308-313. Shugart, H. H., Jr. and D. C. West. 1981. Long-term dynamics of forest ecosystems. Am. Sci. 69:647-652. Shugart, H. H., Jr. and I. R. Noble. 1981. A computer model of succession and fire response of the high-altitude Eucalyptus forest of the Brindabella Range, Australian Capital Territory. Austral. J. Ecol. 6:149-164. Shugart, H.H. 1970. Community Ordering and Niche Width. Science 170:1335. Shugart, H.H. and B.C. Patten. 1972. Niche quantification and the concept of niche pattern. Systems Analysis and Simulation in Ecology, Vol. II. Shugart, H.H. and B.G. Blaylock. 1973. The Niche-Variation Hypothesis: An Experimental Study with Drosophila Populations. The American Naturalist 107(956):575-579. Shugart, H.H. and D.C. West. 1977. Development of an Appalachian deciduous forest succession model and its application to assessment of the impact of the Chestnut blight. J. of Environ. Mgmt. 5:161-179. Shugart, H.H. and D.C. West. 1979. Size and Pattern of Simulated Forest Stands. Forest Sci. 25(1):120-122. Shugart, H.H. and D.C. West. 1980. Forest Succession Models. BioScience 30(5):308-313. Shugart, H.H. and I.R. Novle. 1981. A computer model of succession and fire response of the high-altitiude Eucalyptus forest of the Brindabella Range, Australian Capital Territory. Australian J. of Ecology 6:149-164. Shugart, H.H. and J.M. Hett. 1973. Succession: Similarities of Species Turnover Shugart, H.H., T.R. Crow and J.M. Hett. 1973. Forest succession models: a rationale and methodology for modelung forest succession over large regions. Forest Science 19(3):203-212. Shugart, H.H.. M.S. Hopkins, I.P. Burgess, and A.T. Matlock. 1980. The development of a succession model for subtropical rain forest and its application to assess the effects of timber harvest at Wiangaree State Forest, New South Wales. J. of Environ. Mgmt. 11:243-265. Shull, A.M. and A.R. Tipton. 1987. Effective population size of bison on the Wichita Mountains Wildlife Refuge. Conservation Biology 1(1):35-41. Shulman, M.J. 1985. Recruitment of coral reef fishes: effects of distribution of predators and shelter. Ecology 66(3):1056- 1066. Shulman, M.J., J.C. Ogden et al. 1983. Priority Effects in the Recruitment of Juvenile Coral Reef Fishes. Ecology 64 :1508- 1513. Shure, D.J. 1970. Ecological Relationships of Small Mammals in a New Jersey Barrier Beach Habitat. J. of Mamm. 51(2):267-278. Shure, D.J. 1970. Ecological Relationships of Small Mammals in a New Jersey Barrier Beach Habitat. J. of Mammalogy 51(2):267- 278. Shure, D.J. 1970. Ecological relationships of small mammals in a New Jersey barrier beach habitat. Journal of Mammology. 51(2):267-278. |Mammal Populations Coastal Insular Shure, D.J. 1971. Insecticide Effects on Early Succession in an Old Field Ecosystem. Ecology 52(2):271-279. Shure, D.J. 1971. Tidal Flooding Dynamics: Its influence on small mammals in barrier beach marshes. American Midland Naturalist 85(1):36-44. |Mammal Populations Coastal Insular Silander, J.A. and J. Antovics. 1982. Analysis of interspecific interactions in a coastal plant community - a perturbation approach. Nature 298:557-560. Silverman, F.P., D.R. Young and P.S. Nobel. 1988. Effects of applied NaCl on Opuntia humifusa. Physiologia Plantarum 72:343-348. Silvertown, J.W. 1981. Seed size, life span, and germination date as coadapted features of plant life history. Am. Nat. 118:860-864. Simberloff, D. 1976. Experimental zoogeography of islands: effects of island size. Ecology 57(4):629-642. |equilibrium model Simberloff, D. 1976. Species turnover and equilibrium island biogeography. Sci. 194:572-578. Simberloff, D. 1976. Trophic structure determination and equilibrium in an arthropod community. Ecology 57:395-398. Simberloff, D. 1978. Using Island Biogeographic Distributions to Determine if Colonization is Stochastic. The American Naturalist 112(986):713-726. Simberloff, D. 1978. Using island biogeographic distributions to determine if colonization is stochastic. The American Naturalist 112(986):713-726. |community assembly Simberloff, D. 1980. The Sick Science of Ecology: Symptoms, Diagnosis and Prescription. in press, Eidema. Simberloff, D. 1983. Competition, hypothesis-testing, and other community ecological buzzwords. The American Naturalist 122(5):626-635. |scientific method Simberloff, D. 1983. When is an island community in equilibrium? Science 220:1275-1278. Simberloff, D. 1986. Calculating probabilities that cladograms match: a method of biogeographical inference. Manuscript. Simberloff, D. Population sizes of congeneric bird species on islands. The American Naturalist. Simberloff, D. and E.F. Connor. 1981. Missing species combinations. The American Naturalist 118(2):215-239. |assembly rules Simberloff, D. and L.G. Abele. 1976. Island biogeography theory and conservation practice. Science 191:285-1032. Simberloff, D. and L.G. Abele. 1982. Refuge design and island biogeographic theory: effects of fragmentation. The American Naturalist 120(1):41-50. |conservation Simberloff, D. and L.G. Abele. 1984. Conservation and obfuscation: subdivision of reserves. Oikos 42:399-401. |conservation Simberloff, D. and L.G. Abele. response to: Island biogeogrpahy and conservation: strategy and limitations. Simberloff, D. and N. Gotelli. 1984. Effects of insularisation on plant species richness in the prairie-forest ecotone. Biological Conservation 29:27-46. |conservation Simberloff, D. and N. Gotelli. Refuge design and ecological theory: Lessons for Prairie and Forest Conservation. Proc. of the 8th North American Prairie Conference. Simberloff, D. and W. Boecklen. 1981. Santa Rosalia reconsidered: Size ratios and competition. Evolution 35(6):1206-1228. Simberloff, D., K.L. Heck, E.D. McCoy and E.F. Connor. There have been no statistical tests of cladistic biogeographical hypotheses. Chapter 2. |equilibrium theory |density compensation Simberloff, D., K.L. Heck, E.D. McCoy, and E.F. Connor. There have been no statistical tests of cladistic biogeographical hypotheses. Simberloff, D.S. 1970. Taxonomic diversity of island biotas. Evolution 24:23-47. |assembly rules Simberloff, D.S. 1974. Equilibrium theory of island biogeography and ecology. |equilibrium model Simberloff, D.S. 1974. Equilibrium theory of island biogeography and ecology. 4074. Simberloff, D.S. 1976. Species turnover and equilibrium island biogeography. Science 194:572-578. Simberloff, D.S. 1976. Species turnover and equilibrium island biogeography. Science 194:572-578. |equilibrium model Simberloff, D.S. 1983. When is an island community in equilibrium? Science 220:1275-1276. Simons, E.L. 1963. Some Fallacies in the Study of Hominid Phylogeny. Science 141(3584):879-889. Simpson, E.H. 1949. Measurement of Diversity. Nature 163:688. Sims, H.P. and C.H. Buckner. 1973. The Effect of Clear Cutting and Burning of Pinus banksiana Forests on the Populations of Small Mammals in Southeastern Manitoba. The American Midland Naturalist 90(1):228-231. Sinclair, D.F. 1985. On tests of spatial randomness using mean nearest neighbor distance. Ecology 66(3):1084-1085. Skalski, J.R., D.S. Robson, and M.A. Simmons. 1983. Comparative census procedures using single mark-recapture methods. Ecology 64(4):752-760. Skeen, S. L. 1982. Whitetail facts and fallacies. Southern Outdoors Nov./Dec. '82:52-57. Skellam, J.G. The Formulation and Interpreation of Mathematical Models of Diffusionary Processes in Population Biology. Chapter 4. Skud, B. E. 1982. Dominance in Fishes: the relation between environment and abundance. Science 216:144-149. Slade, N. A. and H. Levinson. 1984. The effect of skewed distributions of vital statistics on growth of age-structured populations. Theoretical Population Biology 26,3. Slobodkin, L.B. 1965. On the present incompleteness of mathematical ecology. American Scientist 53:347-357. Slobodkin, L.B. 1968. Aspects of the Future of Ecology. Bioscience 18(1):16-23. Slobodkin, L.B., F.E. Smith, and N.G. Hairston. 1967. Regulation in Terrestrial Ecosystems, and the Implied Balance of Nature. The American Naturalist 101(918):109-124. Small, R.J. and B.J. Verts. 1983. Responses of a population of Perognathus parvus to removal trapping. J. Mamm. 64(1):139- 143. Smart, J.S. 1974. Statistical Tests of the Broken-Stick Model of Species Abundance Relations. Smiley, J.T., J.M. Horn, and N.E. Rank. 1985. Ecological effects of Salicin at three trophic levels: new problems from old adaptations. Science 229:649-650. Smith, A.T. 1974. The distribution and dispersal of Pikas: consequences of insular population structure. Ecology 55:1112-1119. |UVA publications Smith, A.T. and J.M. Vrieze. 1979. Population structure of everglades rodents: responses to a patchy environment. Journal of Mammology. 60(4):778-794. |Mammal Populations Coastal Insular Smith, C.C. 1968. The Adaptive Nature of Social Organization in the Genus of Tree Squirrels Tamiasciurus. Ecological Monographs 38:31-63. Smith, C.C. 1970. The Coevolution of Pine Squirrels (Tamiasciurus) and Conifers. Ecological Monographs 40(3):349- 371. Smith, C.C. and D. Follmer. 1972. Food Preferences of Squirrels. Ecology 53(1):82-91. Smith, C.R. and M.E. Richmond. 1972. Factors Influencing Pellet Egestion and Gastric pH in the Barn Owl. The Wilson Bulletin 84(2);179-186. Smith, D.H. 1978. Effects of Bot Fly (Cuterebra) Parasistism on Activity Patterns of Peromyscus maniculatus in the laboratory. J. of Wildlife Diseases 14:28-40. Smith, D.H. 1978. Vulnerability of Bot Fly (Cuterbra) Infected Peromyscus manuculatis to Shorttail Weasel Predation in the Laboratory. J. of Wildlife Diseases 14:40-51 Smith, D.R. 1975. Symposium on management of forest and range habitats for nongame birds. USDAFS General Technical Report WO-1. Smith, F.E. 1961. Density dependence in the Australian thrips. Ecology 42(2):403-404. Smith, G.C., D.W. Kaufman, R.M. Jones, J.B. Gentry & M.H. Smith. 1971. The Relative Effectiveness of Two Types of Snap Traps Smith, H.D., C.D. Jorgensen and H.D. Tolley. 1972. Estimation of Small Mammal Using Recapture Methods: Partitioning of Estimator Variables. Acta Theriologica 17(5):57-66. Smith, J.M. 1966. Sympatric Speciation. The American Naturalist. 100(916):637- Smith, J.M. 1968. Evolution in Sexual and Asexual Populations. The American Naturalist 102(927):469-473. Smith, J.M. 1970. The Causes of Polymorphism. Symp. zool. Lond. 26:371-383. Smith, K.G. 1977. Distribution of Summer Birds Along a Forest Moisture Gradient in an Ozark Watershed. Ecology 58:810-819. Smith, K.G. 1982. Drought-induced changes in avian community structure along a montane sere. Ecology 63(4):952-961. Smith, M.H. 1968. A Comparison of Different Methods of Capturing and Estimating Numbers of Mice. J. of Mamm. 49(3):455-462. Smith, M.H. 1971. Food as a limiting factor in the population ecology of Peromyscus polionotus (Wagner). Ann. Zool. Fennici 8:109-112. Smith, M.H. 1974. Seasonality in Mammals. Phenology and Seasonality Modeling Vol.8: ed. Helmut Lieth. Smith, M.H. and J.T. McGinnis. 1968. Relationships of Latitude, Altitude, and Body Size to Litter Size and Mean Annual Production of Offspring in Peromyscus Researches on Population Ecology, X-2. December: Kyoto, Japan Smith, M.H. and R.Blessing. 1969. Trap Response and Food Availability. J. of Mamm. 50(2):368-369. Smith, M.H., B.G. Maza, and J.G. Wiener. 1980. Social Interaction and Spatial Distribution in a Desert Rodent. J. of Mamm. 61(1):113-115. Smith, M.H., C.T. Garten, and P.R. Ramsey. 1975. Genic Heterozygosity and Population Dynamics in Small Mammals. Isozymes, IV: 85-101. Smith, M.H., J.B. Gentry and F.B. Golley. 1969. A Preliminary Report on the examination of small mammal census methods. Smith, M.H., M.N. Manlove, and J. Joule. Spatial ad Temporal Dynamics of the Genetic Organization of Small Mammal Populations, Populations of Small Mammals Under Natural Conditions. Smith, M.H., R. Blessing, J.G. Chelton, J.B. Gentry, F.B. Golley and J.T. McGinnis. 1971. Acta Theriologica 16(8):105-125. Smith, M.H., R. Blessing, J.G. Chelton, J.B. Gentry, G.B. Golley and J.T. McGinnis. 1971. Determining Density for Small Mammal Populations Using a Grid and Assessment Lines. Acta Theriologica 16(8):105-125. Smith, M.H., R.H. Gardner, J.B. Gentry, D.W. Kaufman & M.H. O'Farrell. Small Mammals:their productivity and population dynamics. International Biological Programme, Vol 5. Smith, M.H., R.K. Selander, and W.E. Johnson. 1973. Biochemical polymorphism and systematics in the genus Peromyscus. III Variation in the Florida deer mouse (Peromyscus floridanus) a pleistocene relict. J. Mamm. 54(1):1-13. Smith, M.H., R.M. Chew and J.B. Gentry. New Techniques for Baiting Snap Traps. Acta theriologica 14(19):271. Smith, R.L. (Editor). The Biologist. Special symposium issue: social organization in microtine rodents. Vol. 62(1-4). Smith, S.H. 1968. Species Succession and Fishery Exploitation in the Great Lakes. J. Fish. Res. Bd. Canada 25(4):667-693. Smith, T. M., H. H. Shugart and D. C. West. 1981. The use of multivariate statistics in studies of wildlaife habitat. USDA For. Serv. Tech. Rep. RM-87. Smith, T. M., H. H. Shugart and D. C. West. 1981. The use of multivariate statistics in studies of wildlaife habitat. USDA For. Serv. Tech. Rep. RM-87. Smith, T. M., H. H. Shugart and D. C. West. 1981. Use of forest simulation models to integrate timber harvest and nongame bird management. Transact. 46th N. A. Wildl. Nat. Res. Conf. Smith, T.S., H.H. Shugart and D.C. West. 1981. Use of Forest simulation models to integrate timber harvest and nongame bird mamagement. Trans. 46th N.A. Wildlife and natural resources conf. Snyder, N.F.R., H.A. Snyder, J.L. Lincer and R.T. Reynolds. Organichlorines, Heavy Metals, and the Biology of North American Accipiters. BioScience 23(50):300-305. Sobelman, M. 1976. Brown pelican reporduction. Science 193:96-97. Found under Anderson, D.W. Soholt, L.F. 1973. Consumption of Primary Production by a Population of Kangaroo Rats (Dipodomys merriami) in the Mojave Desert. Ecological Monographs 43:357-376. Solomon, B.P. 1983. Compensatory production in Solanum carolinense following attack by a host-specific herbivore. J. Ecol. 71:681-690. Solomon, M.E. 1949. The natural control of animal populations. J. Anim. Ecol. 18(1):1-35. Solomon, M.E. 1958. Meaning of density-dependence and related terms in population dynamics. Nature 181:1778-1781. Solomon, M.E. 1968. Logarithmic regression as a measure of population density response: comment on a report by G.W. Salt. Ecology 49:357-358. Sonleitner, F. J. 1981. Evolution and prediction. (Response to N. Eldredge) Science 212:738. Sorg, C.F. and L.J. Nelson. Net Economic Value of Elk Hunting in Idaho. USDAFS Resource Bulletin RM-12. Sork, V. 1978. A Comparison of Physiological and Behavioral Adjsutments to Water Stress in Three Species of Kangaroo Rats. The Southwestern Naturalist 23(1):95-102. Sork, V.L. and D.H. Boucher. 1977. Dispersal of Sweet Pignut Hickory in a Year of Low Fruit Production, and the Influence of Predation by a Curculionid Beetle. Oecologia 28:289-299. Soule, M. 1967. Phenetics of natural populations I. Phenetic relationships of insular populations of the side-blotched lizard. Evolution 21:584-591. Soule, M. 1970. A comment on the letter by Van Valen and Grant. Amer. Nat. 104(940):590-591. Soule, M. 1970. A comment on the letter by Van Valen and Grant. American Naturalist 104(940):590-591. Soule, M. and B.R. Stewart. 1970. The "Niche-Variation" hypothesis: a test and alternatives. The American Naturalist 104(935):85-97. Soule, M. and B.R. Stewart. 1970. The Niche-Variation Hypothesis: A Test and Alternatives. The American Naturalist 104(935):85- 97. Soule, M.E. and B.A. Wilcox. 1981. Conservation biology: an evolutionary-ecological perspective. The Wilson Bulletin 93(3):420-421. Sousa, W. P. and J. H. Connell. 1985. Further comments on the evidence for multiple stable points in natural communities. Am. Nat. 125:612-615. Sousa, W. P. and J. H. Connell. 1985. Further comments on the evidence for multiple stable points in natural communities. Am. Nat. 125:612-615. Southwick, E.E. 1984. Photosynthate allocation to floral nectar: a neglected energy investment. Ecology 65(6):1775-1779. Southwood, T. R. E. 1978. The components of diversity. in Diversity of insect faunas, Symposia of the Royal Entomological Soc. of London #9. Eds. L. A. Mound and N. Waloff. pp. 19-40. Southwood, T. R. E. 1984. Insect-plant adaptations. in Origins and development of adaptation. Pitman Books, London (Ciba Foundation symposium 102). pp. 138-151. Southwood, T. R. E. 1985. Insect communities. Antenna 9(3):108- 116. Southwood, T. R. E. 1985. Interactions of plants and animals: patterns and processes. Oikos 44:5-11. Southwood, T. R. E., V. K. Brown and P. M. Reader. 1979. The relationships of plant and insect diversities in succession. Biological J. of the Linnean Soc. 12(4):327-348. Southwood, T. R. E., V. K. Brown and P. M. Reader. 1983. Continuity of vegetation in space and time: a comparison if insects' habitat templet in different successional stages. in Res. Pop. Ecol. Suppl. 3:61-74. Southwood, T. R. E., V. K. Brown, P. M. Reader and E. E. Green. 1986. The use of differnt stages of a secondary succession by birds. Bird Study 33. Southwood, T.R.E. Plant surfaces and insects - an overview. Southwood, T.R.E., V.K. Brown, and P.M. Reader. Leaf Palatability, Life Expectancy and Herbivore Damage. Manuscript for Oecologica. Sparrowe, R.D. and H.M. Wight. 1978. Setting priorities for the endangered species program. Fortieth North American Wildlife Conference. Sparrowe, R.D. and H.M. Wight. 1978. Setting priorities for the endangered species program. Fortieth North American Wildlife Conference:142-156. Spear, R.C. and G.M. Hornberger. 1979. Eutrophication in Peel Inlet - II. Identification of Critical Uncertainties Via Generalized Sensitivity Analysis. Water Resources 14:43-49. Spencer, A.W. and D. Pettus. 1966. Habitat Preferences of Five Sympatric Species of Long-Tailes Shrews. Ecology 47(4):677- 683. Spencer, S. R. and G. N. Cameron. 1983. Behavioral dominance and its relationship to habitat patch utilization by the hispid cotton rat ( Sigmodon hispidus ). Behav. Ecol. Sociobiol. 13:27-36. Speth, J.D. and D.D. Davis. 1976. Seasonal Variability in Early Hominid Predation. Science 192:441-446. Spiller, D.A. 1984. Competition between two spider species: experimental field study. Ecology 65(3):909-919. Spiller, D.A. and T.W. Schoener. 1988. An experimental study of the effect of lizards on web-spider communities. Ecological Monographs 58(2):57-77. Spinage, C. A. 1972. African unjulate life tables. Ecology 53(4):645-652. Spitzer, P.R., R.W. Risebrough, R. Hernandez, A. Poole, D. Puleston, I.C.T. Nisbet. 1978. Productivity of Ospreys in Connecticutt-Long Island Increases as DDE Residues Decline. Science 202:333-335. Spurr, S. H. ----. Silviculture. Sci. Amer. --:76-91. Spurr, S.H. Silviculture. Stacey, P.B. 1982. Female promiscuity and male reproductive success in social birds and mammals. Am. Nat. 120(1):51-64. Stacey, P.B. and C.E. Bock. 1978. Social Plasticity in the Acorn Woodpecker. Science 202:1298-1299. Stafford, S. G. 1985. A statistics primer for foresters. J. Forestry 83(3):148-157. Stafford, S. R. and I. J. Stout. 1983. Dispersal of the cotton rat ( Sigmodon hispidus ). J. Mamm. 64(2):210-217. Stalmaster, M.V. and J.A. Gessaman. 1984. Ecological energetics and foraging behaviors of overwintering bald eagles. Ecol. Monog. 54(4):407-428. Stamp N. E. and R. D. Ohmart. 1978. Resource utilization by desert rodents in the lower Sonoran desert. Ecol. 59(4):700- 707. Stapanian, M. A., J. J. Higgins and C. C. Smith. 1982. Statistical tests for visitation patterns on grids. Ecology 63(6):1972-1974. Stebbins, G.L. 1959. The role f hybridization in evolution. Proceedings of the American Philosophical Society 103(2):231- 251. Stebler, A.M. 1970. Man and the Grizzly - Coexistence? Introduction. BioScience 20(21):1141. Steele, B. M. and S. V. Cooper. 1986. Predicting site index and height for selected tree species of northern Idaho. U. S. Dept. Agri. For. Serv. Res. Pap. INT-365. Steele, B.M. and S.V. Cooper. 1986. Predicted Site Index and Height for Selected Tree Species of Northern Idaho. USDAFS Research Paper INT-365. Steen, H.B. and T. Lindmo. 1979. Barrier island configuration. Science 204:401-404. |UVA publications Sternberg, L. and M.J. DeNiro. 1983. Isotopic composition of cellulose from C3, C4, and CAM plants growing near one another. Science 220:947-949. Stickel, L.F. 1960. Peromyscus Ranges at High and Low Population Densities. J. of Mammalogy 41(4):433-440. Stickel, L.F. 1978. Changes in a Box Turtle Population During Three Decades. Copeia 1978(2):221-225. Stickel, L.F. 1979. Population ecology of house mice in unstable habitats. J. Animal Ecology 48:871-887. |Species of interest Stickel, W.H. 1951. Occurrence and Identification of the Prairie Deer-Mouse in Central Maryland. Proceedings of the Biological Society in Washington. 64:25-32. Sticklel L.F. and O. Warbach. 1960. Small-mammal populations of a Maryland woodlot: 1949-1954. Ecology 41(2):269-286. Stiling, P. 1988. Density-dependent processes and key factors in insect populations. J. Animal Ecology 57:581-593. Stiling, P. D. and D. R. Strong. 1983. Weak competition among Spartina stem borers, by means of murder. Ecology 64(4):770- 778. | competition -- co-occurrence -- guild -- northwest Florida | salt marsh -- Spartina alterniflora -- stem-boring insects Stockrahm, D.M.B. and J.D. Harder. 1988. Lack of competition between pine and meadow voles: removal experiments in orchards. Manuscript submitted to Ecology. Stockrahm, D.M.B. and R.W. Seabloom. 1988. Comparative reproductive performance of black-tailed prairie dog populations in North Dakota. J. Mamm. 69(1):160-164. Stoecker, R.E. Competitive relations between sympatric populations of voels Microtus montanus and M. pennsylvanicus. Stoeker, R.E. Competitive Relations Between Sympatric Populations of Voles (Microtus Montanus and M. Pennsylvanicus). Chapter 31. Stone, E.L. and R. Kszystyniak. 1977. Conservation of Potassium in the Pinus resinosa Ecosystem. Science 198:192-193. Filed with Van Devender, T.R. Storm, G.L. and G.C. Sanderson. 1968. Housing and reproductive performance of an outdoor colony of voles J. of Mamm. 49(2):322-324. Stout, I.J. and R.J. Demmer. 1982. Cotton rat invasion of sand pine scrub habitat. J. Mamm. 63(2):236-242. Straney, D. O. 1978. Variance partitioning and nongeographic variation. J. Mamm. 59(1):1-11. Straus, L. G. 1985. Human paleoecology. Science 227:1028-1029. Strong, D. R. Jr. 1979. Biogeographic dynamics of insect-host plant communities. Ann. Rev. Entomol. 24:89-119. Strong, D. R., Jr. 1983. Natural variability and the manifold mechanisms of ecological communities. Am. Nat. 122(5):636- 660. Strong, D. R., Jr., L. A. Szyska and D. S. Simberloff. 1979. Tests of community-wide character displacement against null hypotheses. Evol. 33(3):897-913. Strong, D.R. 1980. Null hypotheses in ecology. Synthese 43:2710285. |scientific method Strong, D.R. Density vagueness: abiding the variance in the demography of teal populations. Chapter 15. Strong, D.R., L.A. Szyska and D.S. Simberloff. 1979. Tests of Community-Wide Character Displacement Against Null Hypotheses. Evolution 33(3):897-913 Strong, D.R., L.A. Szyska, and D.S. Simberloff. 1979. Tests of community-wide character displacement against null hypotheses. Evolution 33(3):897-913. Strong, D.R., L.E. Szyska and D.S. Simberloff. 1979. Tests of community-wide character displacement against null hypotheses. Evolution 33(3):897-913. Struhsaker, T.T. 1967. Ecology of Velvet Monkeys (Cercopithecus aethiops) in the Masai-Amboseli game reserve, Kenya. Ecology 48(6):891-904. Stuiver, M. 1978 Atmospheric Carbon Dioxide and Carbon Reservior Changes. Science 199(4326): 253-258. Stuiver, M. 1978. Atmospheric carbon dioxide and carbon resivoir changes. Science 199(4326):253-258. Sugihara, G. 1981. S = CA^z , z ~ 1/4: a reply to Connor and McCoy. Am. Nat. 117:790-793. Sullins, G.L. and B.J. Verts. 1978. Baits and baiting techniques for control of Belding's ground squirrels. J. Wildl. Mgmt. 42(4):890-896. Sullivan, T.P. 1977. Demography and dispersal in island and mainland populations of the deer mouse. Ecology 58:964-978. |Mammal Populations Coastal Insular Summer Food of 220 Short-Tailed Shrews from Ithaca, New York. Susman, R. L. and J. T. Stern. 1982. Functional morphology of Homo hablis . Science 217:931-933. Sutherland, J. P. 1974. Multiple stable points in natural communities. Am. Nat. 108(964):859-873. Sutherland, J.P. 1981. The fouling community at Beaufort, Noth Carolina: a study in stability. The American Naturalist 118(4):499-519. Sutinen, J. G. 1981. Fisheries: collapses assessed. Science 213:860-861. Sutton, H.E. 1967. Human Genetics. Annual Review of Genetics 1:1- 36. Swain, A. M. 1980. Landscape patterns and forest history in the boundary waters canoe area, Minnesota: a pollen study from Hug Lake. Ecol. 61(4):747-754. | charcoal -- fire -- forests -- influx -- lakes | landscape pattern -- Minnesota -- paleoecology -- pollen | varves Swihart, R. K. 1984. Body size, breeding season length, and life history tactics of lagomorphs. Oikos 43:282-290. Swihart, R. K. and N. A. Slade. 1985. Influence of sampling interval on estimates of home-range size. J. Wildl. Manage. 49(4):1019-1025. Swihart, R. K. and N. A. Slade. 1985. Testing for independance of observations in animal movements. Ecology 66(4):176-1184. Swihart, R. K. and N. A. Slade. 1986. The importance of statistical power when testing for independance in animal movements. Ecol. 67(1):255-258. Swihart, R. K. and N. A. Slade. 1986. The importance of statistical power when testing for independance in animal movements. Ecol. 67(1):255-258. Sauer, J. R. and N. A. Slade. 1986. Size-dependant population dynamics of Microtus ochrogaster . Am. Nat. 127(6):902-908. Swihart, R.K. and N.A. Slade. 1987. A test for independence of movements as shown by live trapping. Am. Midland Nat. 117(1):204-207. Swindel, B. F. L. F. Conde and J. E. Smith. 1983. Plant cover and biomass response to clear-cutting, site preparation, and planting in Pinus elliottii flatwoods. Csience 219:1421-1422. Swyer, R.L. and K.T. Perez. 1983. An experimental examination of ecosystem linearization. Am. Nat. 121:305-323. Szaro, R. C. and R. P. Balda. 1986. Relationships among weather, habitat structure, and Ponderosa Pine forest birds. J. Wildl. Manage. 50(2):253-260. Szaro, R.C. and M.D. Jakle. 1985. Avian Use of a Desert Riparian Island and its Adjacent Scrub Habitat. The Condor 87:511-519. Szaro, R.C. and S.C. Bekfit. 1987. Small Mammal use of a desert raparian Island and its adjacent scrub habitat. USDA FS Research Note RM-473. Taber, R. D. 1982. Western deer: a status report. Science 217:926. Table __: Summary of experimental and recent biogeographical studies of small mammal populations on islands along the U.S. Atlantic Coast. |summary Taitt, M.J. and C.J. Krebs. 1983. Predation, Cover, and Food Manipulations During a Spring Decline of Microtus Townsendii. Journal of Animal Ecology 52 :837-848. Tallamy, D.W. 1983. Equilibrium biogeography and its application to insect host-parasite systems. Am. Nat. 121:244-254. Tallmay, D. W. 1983. Equillibrium biogeography and its application to insect host-parasite systems. Am. Nat. 121(2):244-254. Tamarin, R.H. Dispersal and population regulation in rodents. Chapter 5. Tanner, J.T. 1966. Effects of population density on growth rates of animal populations. Ecology 47:733-745. Taylor, G.J. Present status and habitat survey of the Delmarva fox squirrel (Scuirus Niger Cinereus) with a discussion of reasons for its decline. Taylor, J.M., J.H. Calaby and S.C. Smith. 1983. Native Rattus, land bridges and the Australian region. J. Mamm. 64(3):463- 475. Taylor, P.R. and M.M. Littler. 1982. The roles of compensatory mortality, physical disturbance, and substrate retention in the development and organization of a sand-influenced, rocky- intertidal community. Ecology 63(1):135-146. Teipner, C.L., E.O. Garton, abd L. Nelson. 1983. Pocket gopher in forest ecosystems. USDAFS INT-154. Telfer, E.S. and J.P. Kelsall. 1984. Adaptations of some larger North American mammals for survival in snow. Ecology 65(6):1828-1834. Temerin, L.A. and J.G.H. Cant. 1983. The evolutionary divergence of old world monkeys and apes. Am. Nat. 122(3):335-351. Templeton, A. R. 1981. Evolutionary change. (Book Review) Science Nov. 1981:900-901. Templeton, A.R. 1987. Inferences on natural population structure from genetic studies Templeton, A.R. 1987. Inferences on natural population structure from genetic studies on captive mammalian populations. Chaptre 17. in, Mammalian Dispersal patterns. Tenore, K.R. and B.C. Coull. 1980. An evaluation of experimental analyses of population and community patterns in benthic marine environments. Marine Benthic Dynamics. Terborgh, J. 1973. On the notion of favorableness in plant ecology. The American Naturalist 107(956):481-501. Terbough, J. 1974. Preservation of natiral diversity: The problem of extinction prone species. Bioscience 24 (12):715-722. Terbough, J. and J. Faaborg. 1973. Turnover and ecological release in the avifauna of Mona Island, Puerto Rico. The Auk 90(4):759-779. Terbough, J. and J.M. Diamond. 1970. Niche overlap in feeding assembalges of New Guinea birds. Wilson Bulletin 82(1):29-52. |equilibrium theory |density compensation Terbough, J. and J.S. Weske. 1969. Colonization of Secondary Habitats by Peruvian Birds. Ecology 50(5):765-782. Terbough, J. and J.S. Weske. 1975. The role of competition in the distribution of Andean birds. Terbough, J.W. and J. Faaborg. 1980. Saturation of bird communities in the West Indies. The American Naturalist 116(2):178-195. |community assembly Terbough, J.W. and J. Faaborg. 1980. Saturation of bird communities in the west Indies. The American Midland Naturalist. 116(2):178-195. Terman, C.R. 1966. Population fluctuations of peromyscus maniculatus and other small mammals as revealed by the North American Census of small mammals. The American Midland Naturalist 76(2):419-426. Terman, C.R. 1968. Population dynamics. Chapter 11. in J.A. King (ed.) Biology of Peromyscus. |Species of interest Terman, C.R. 1969. WEights of selected organs of deer mice (peromyscus maniculatus bairdii) from asymptotic laboratory populations. J. of Mamm. 50(2):311-320. Terman, C.R. 1973. Recovery of reproductive function by prairie deermice (peromyscus maniculatus bairdii) from asymptotic populations. Anim. Behav. 21:443-448. Terman, C.R. 1974. Behavioral factors associated with cessation of growth of laboratory populations of prairie deermice. Researches on Population Ecology 15(2):138-147. Terman, C.R. 1974. Laboratory Studies of Population Regulation in Prairie Deermice. Paper given at the Centennial Symposium on Science and Research, Philadelphia Zoo, Nov. 11-14, 1974. Terman, C.R. 1984. Sexual maturation of male and female white- footed mice (Peromyscus leucopus noveboracensis): Influence of physical or urine contact with adults. J. Mamm. 65(1):97- 102. Terman, C.R. and J.F. Sassaman. 1967. Sex Ration in Deer Mouse Populations. J. of Mamm. 48(4):589-597. Terman, C.R. and J.F. Sassman. Sex ration in deer mouse populations. J. of Mamm. 48(4):589-597. |Species of interest Thackery, J. F. 1987. Late quaternary environmental changes inferred from small mammalian fauna, southern Africa. in Climatic change. D. Reidel Pub. Comp. 285-305 Thayer, C.W. 1985. Brachipods versus mussels: competition, predation and palatability. Science 228:1527-1528. The equilibrium theory of island biogeography. Chapter 15. |equilibrium model The habitat-unit model of island biogeography. 1982. J. of Biogeogrpahy 9:339-344. |equilibrium theory |density compensation Thierstein, H. R. 1980. Cretaceous oceanic catastrophism. Paleobio. 6(3):244-247. Thilenius, J.F. and G.R. Brown. 1987. Herded vs. unherded sheep grazing systems on an alpine range in Wyoming. USDA FS General Tech. Report RM-147. Thimann, K.V. 1987. Foster habitats. Letters. BioScience 37(1):4 Thomas, W. A. 1970. Energy turnover by dogwood Cornus florida L. trees. Oikos 21:71-75. Thomasson, J. R., M. E. Nelson and R. J. Zakrzewski. 1986. A fossil grass (Gramineae: Chloridoideae) from the Miocene with Kranz anatomy. Science 233:876-878. Thompson, D.Q. 1965. Food preferences of the meadow vole (microtus pennsylvanicus) in relation to habitat affinities. The American Midland Naturalist 74(1):76-85. Thompson, H. R. 1956. Distribution of distance to the Nth neighbor in a population of randomly distributed individuals. Ecology 37(2):391-394. Thompson, J.D. and K.A. Rusterholz. 1982. Overlap summary indices and the detection of community structure. Ecology 63(2):274- 277. Thompson, J.N. 1981. Elaiosomes and fleshy fruits: phenology and selection pressures for ant-dispersed seeds. Am. Nat. 117:104-108. Thompson, S. D. 1982. Structure and species competition of desert heteromyd rodent species assemblages: effects of a simple habitat manipulation. Ecology 63(5):1313-1321. | community structure -- Dipodomys merriammi | habitat manipulation -- heteromyd rodents | Perognathus longimembris -- risk of predation Thompson, S.D. 1982. Microhabitat utilization and foraging behavior of bipedal and quadrupedal heteromyid rodents. Ecology 63(5):1303-1312. Thornton, I.W.B. 1967. The measurement of isolation on archipelagos, and its relation to insular faunal size and endemism. Evolution 21:842-849. Tilman, D. and R.L. Kiesling. 1984. Freshwater algal ecology: taxonomic trade-offs in the temperature dependence of nutrient competitive abilities. Am. Soc. Microbiology 314- 319. Timm, R.M. and B.L. Clauson. Coevolution: Mammalia. In , 1988 McGraw-Hill Yearbook of Science and Technology, McGraw-Hill Book Co., New York. pp. 212-214. Tinbergen, N. 1968. On War and Peace in Animals and Man. Science 160:1411-1418. Tinbergen, N. 1974. Ethology and Stress Diseases. Science 185:20- 26. Tinkle, D.W. 1965. Population structure and effective size of a lizard population. Evolution 19:569-573. Tinkle, D.W., H.M. Wilbur, and S.G. Tilley. 1970. Evolutionary strategies in lizard reproduction. Evolution 24:55-74. Titman, D. 1976. Ecological CompetitionTitus, K. and J.A. Mosher. 1984. Chance-corrected classification for use in discriminant analysis: Ecological Applications. The American Midland Naturlist 111(1):1-7. Titman, D. 1976. Ecological competition between algae: Experimental confirmation of resource-based competition theory. Science 192:463-465. Toft, C.A. and P.J. Shea. 1983. Detecting Community-wide patterns: Estimating power strengthens statistical inference. The American Midland Naturalist 122(5):618-625. Toft, C.A. and P.J. Shea. 1983. Detecting community-wide patterns: Estimating power strengthens statistical inference. The American Naturalist 122(5):618-625. Toft, C.A. and P.J. Shea. 1983. Detecting community-wide patterns: estimating power strengthens statistical inference. The American Naturalist 122(5):618-625. |island experiments |non-mammals Toft, C.A. and T.W. Schoener. 1983. Abundance and diversity of orb spiders on 106 Bahamian islands: biogeography at an intermediate trophic level. Oikos 41:411-426. |community assembly Tosi, J.A. 1964. Climatic Control of Terrestrial Ecosystems: A Report on the Holdridge Model. Economic Geography 40(2):173- 181. Travis, J. and R.E. Ricklefs. 1983. A morphological comparison of island and mainland assembalges of neotropical birds. Oikos 41:434-441. |community assembly Trenbath, B.R. 1976. Plant interactions in mixed crop communities. .. 129-169, in, Multiple Cropping. Triska, F.J. 1984. Role of wood debris in modifying channel geomorphology and riparian areas of a large lowland river under pristine conditions: A historical case. Triska, F.J.< J.R. Sedell, K. Cromack, S.V. Gregory and F.M. McCorsin. 1984. Nitrogen budget for a small coniferous forest stream. Ecological Monographs 54(1):119-140. Troendle, C.A. and R.M. King. 1985. The effect of timber harvest on the fool creek watershed, 30 years later. Water Resources Research 21(12):1915-1922. Trojan, P. and B. Wocjiechowska. 1969. Ecological model and tables of the daily costs of maintenance (DEB) of Microtus arvalis (PALL.). Ekologia Polska - Seria A 17(17):314-342. Turner, M. D. and D. Rabinowitz. 1983. Factors affecting frequency distributions of plant mass: the absence of dominance and suppression in competing monocultures of Festuca paradoxa . Ecol. 64(3):469-475. | competition -- dominance -- Festuca paradoxa | mass distributions -- monocultures -- prarie grass | resource depletion -- skewing -- suppression Tuttle, M.D. and M.J. Ryan. 1981. Bat predation and the evolution of frog vocalization in the neotropics. Science 214:677-678. Tweeten, L. 1983. The economics of small farms. Science 219:1037- 1042. Udvardy, M.F.D. 1959. Notes on the ecological concepts of habitat, Biotope and niche. Ecology 40(4):725-728. Uhl, C. and C.F. Jordan. 1984. Succession and nutrient dynamics following forest cutting and burning in Amazonia. Ecology 65(5):1476-1490. Uhl, C>, K> Clark, N> Dezzeo and P. Maquirino. 1988. Vegetation dynamics in amazonian treefall gaps. Ecology 69(3):751-763. Unders 1985. Patterns in helminth communities: why are birds and fish different? Parasitology 93:205-215. University of Michigan. 1985. Conservation biology: A science whose time has come. Endangered Species Technical Bulletin Reprint Vol 2(11):1-12. University of Texas 1967. The Bull Roarer: Newsletter of the U. of Texas. Utida, S. Population fluctuation, an experimental and theoretical approach. Valentine, J.W. 1970. Resource supply and Species diversity patterns. Valentine, J.W. and C.A. Campbell. 1975. Genetic Regulation and the Fossil Record. American Scientist 63:673-680. Valentine, J.W. and C.A. Campbell. 1975. Genetic regulation and the fossil record. American Scientist 63:673-680. Ableson, P. H. 1983. Acid rain. Science 221(4606):---. Van Ballenberghe, V. 1973. A wolf pack kills another wolf. The American Midland Naturalist 90(2):490-493. Van Ballenberghe, V. A wolf pack kills another wolf. The American Midland Naturalist 90(2):490-493. Van Devender, T. R. and W. G. Spaulding. 1979. Development of vegetation and climate in the southwestern United States. Science 204:701-710. Van Devender, T.R. 1977. Holocene woodlands in the Southwestern deserts. Science 198:189-192. Van Devender, T.R. and W.G. Spaulding. 1979. Development of vegetation and climate in the Southwestern United States. Science 204:701-710. Van Dyne, G.M. 1966. Use of a vacuum-clipper for harvesting herbage. Ecology 49(4):624-626. Van Dyne, G.M. Application adn integration of multiple linear regression and linear programming in renewable resource analyses. The J. of Range Management 19(6):356-362. Van Haverbeke, D. F. and C. W. Comer. 1985. Effects of treatment and seed source on germination of eastern redcedar seed. USDA Forest Service Research Paper RM-263. Van Hook, R.I. 1971. Energy and Nutrient Dynamics of Spider and Orthopteran Populations in Grassland Ecosystem. Ecological Monographs 41:1-26. Van Hook, R.I. 1971. Energy and nutrient dynamics of Spider and Orthopteran populations in a grassland ecosystem. Ecological Monographs 41:1-26. Van Valen, L. 1965. Morphological variation and width of ecological niche. The American Naturalist XCIX(908):377-390. Van Valen, L. 1974. Predation and species diversity. J. theor. Biol. 44:19-21. Van Valen, L. and P.R. Grant. 1970. Variation and niche width reexamined. American Naturalist 104(940):589-590. Van Vleck, D.B. 1968. Movements of Microtus pennsylvanicus in relation to depopulated areas. J, of Mamm. 49(1):92-103. Van Vleck, D.B. 1969. Standardization of microtus home range calculation. J. of Mamm. 50(1):69-80. Van Voris, P., R.V. O'Neill, W.R. Emanuel and H.H. Shugart. 1980. Functional Complexity and Ecosystem Stability. Ecology 61(6):1352-1360. Vance, R.R. 1972. Competition and mechanism of coexistence in three sympatric species of intertidal hermit crabs. Ecology 53(6):1062-1074 Vance, R.R. 1972. The role of shell adequacy in behavioral interactions involving hermit crabs. Ecology 53(6):1075-1083. Vance, R.R. 1984. Interference Competition and the Coexistence of Two Competitors on a Single Limiting Resource. Ecology 65 (5):1349-1357. Vandermeer, J.H. 1970. The community matrix and the number of species in a community. Am. Nat. 104:73-83. Vandermeer, J.H. 1970. The community matrix and the number of species in a community. The American Naturalist 104(935):73- 83. Vandermeer, J.H. 1975. Interspecific competition: A new approach to the classical theory. Science 188:253-255. Varley, G.C. 1949. Population changes in German forest pests. J. Animal Ecol. 18(1):117-122. Varley, G.C. nad G.R. Gradwell. 1960. Key factors in population studies. J. Animal Ecol. 29:399-401. Vermeij, G. J., D. E. Schindel and E. Zipser. 1981. Predation through geological time: evidence from gastrapod shell repair. Science 214:1024-1026. Verner, J. 1965. Selection for sex ratio. The American Naturalist XCIX(908):419-421. Verner, J. and M.F. Willson. 1966. The influence of habitats on mating systems of North American Passerine birds. Ecology 47:143-147. Verts, B.J. and D.B. Costain. 1988. Changes in sex ratios of Spermophilus beldingi in Oregon. J. Mamm. 69(1):186-190. Vessey, S.H. and L.E. Mitchell. 1978. Immigration by white-footed mice (Peromyscus leucopus): Absence of females. Ohio J. Sci. 78(5):282-283. |Species of interest Vezina, A.F. 1985. Empurucal relationships between predator and prey size among terrestrial vertebrate predators. Oecologia 67:555-565. Victor, B.C. 1983. Recruitment and population dynamics of a coral reef fish. Science 219:419-420. Virginia Commission of Game and Inland Fisheries. "Virginia's Endangered Species". Booklet published 1985. Virginia Commission of Game and Inland Fisheries. 1983. Non-Game Update. Volume 1. Virginia Commission of Game and Inland Fisheries. Year Two: Virginia's Non-Game Wildlife and Endangered Species Program. Report. Virginia Division of Forestry. 1985. A desirable forestry future for Virginia. Strategic Plan: 1985-1990. Virginia Division of Forestry. 1985. Virginia's Forests its Common Wealth. Economic Study. Vitousek, P. 1982. Nutrient cycling and nutrient use efficiency. Am. Nat. 119(4):553-572. Vitousek, P. M. and P. A. Matson. 1984. Mechanisms of nitrogen retention in forest ecosystems: a field experiment. Science 225:51-52. Vitt, L.J. and R.A. Seigel. 1985. Life history traits of lizards and snakes. Am. Nat. 125:480-484. Vogt, K. A., C. C. Grier, C. E. Meier and R. L. Edmonds. 1982. Mycorrhizal role in net primary production and nutrient cycling in Abies amabilis ecosystems in western Washington. Ecol. 63(2):370-380. | Abies amabilis -- belowground and aboveground production | belowground biomass -- ectomycorrhizal fungal sheaths | conifer fine roots -- sporocarps and sclerotia | nutrient cycling -- sub-alpine forests -- western Washington Voth, A. and H.C. Black. 1973. A histologic technique for determining feeding habits of small herbivores. J. Wildlife Mgmt. 37(2):223-231. Vrba, E. S. 1983. Macroevolutionary trends: new perspectives on the roles of adaptation and incidental effect. Science 221:387-389. Vuilleumier, B.S. 1971. Pleistocene changes in the fauna and flora of South America. Science 173(3999):771-780. Vuilleumier, F. and D. Simberloff. 1980. Ecology vs. History as Determinants of Patchy and Insular Distributions in High Andean Birds. Evolutionary Biology 12:235-379. Waddington K. D. 1979. Divergence in inflorescence height: an evolutionary response to pollinator fidelity. Oecologia 40:43-50. Waddington, K. D. 1981. Factors influencing pollen flow in bumblebee-pollinated Delphinium virescens. Oikos 37:153-159. Waddington, K. D. 1983. Pollen flow and optimal outcrossing distance. Am. Nat. 122(1):147-151. Waide, R.B. and D.P. Reagan. 1983. Competition between West Indian anoles and birds. The American Naturalist 121(1):133- 138. |community assembly Walker, S. H. and D. B. Duncan. 1967. Estimation of the probability of an event as a function of several independant variables. Biometrika 54(1 & 2)1:167-179. Walkowa, W. 1981. Structure, Dynamics and productivity of mouse populations: a review of studies conducted at the institute of ecology, Polish academy of sciences. |Species of interest Wallin, L. 1971. Spatial pattern of trappability of two populations of small mammals. Oikos 22:221-224. Walsh, J. 1982. ACLU 2, Creationists 0. Science 218:1099-1100. | creationism Walsh, J. 1982. ACLU 2, Creationists 0. Science 218:1099-1100. | creationism Walters, C. J. and J. E. Gross. 1972. J. Wildl. Manage. 36(1):119-134. Walters, C.J. 1975. Optimal harvest strategies for salmon in relation to environmental variability and uncertain production parameters. J. of Fisheries Research Board of Canada 32(10):1777-1784. Waner, R.R. and P.L. Chesson. 1985. Coexistence mediated by recruitment fluctuations: a field guide to the storage effect. Am. Nat. 125:769-787. Ward, G. M., T. M. Sutherland and J. M. Sutherland. 1980. Animals as an energy source in third world agriculture. Science 208:570-574. (Filed with Bongaarts, J.) Ward, G. M., T. M. Sutherland and J. M. Sutherland. 1980. Animals as an energy source in third world agriculture. Science 208:570-574. (Filed with Bongaarts, J.) Waring, R. H. and J. F. Franklin. 1979. Evergreen coniferous forests of the Pacific Northwest. Science 204:1380-1386. Waring, R.H. Forest: Fresh perspectives from ecosystems analysis. Proc. 40th Ann. Biol. Coll. Oregon State University. Waring, R.H. and J.F. Franklin. 1979. Evergreen coniferous forests of the Pacific Northwest. Waring, R.H. and J.F. Franklin. 1979. Evergreen coniferous forest of the Pacific northwest. Science 204:1380-1386. Waring, R.H., A.J.S. McDonald, S. Larsson, T. Ericsson, A. Wiren, E. AArwidsson, A. Ericsson, T. Lohammer. 1985. Differences in chemical composition of plants grown at constant relative growth rates with stable mineral nutrition. Oecologia 66:157- 160. Warner, R.R. and T.P. Hughes. 1988. The population dynamics of reef fishes. Washburn, J.O. 1984. The gypsy moth and its parasites in North America: a community in equilibrium? Am. Nat. 124:288-292. Washburn, S.L. and F.C. Howell. 1960. Human Evolution and Culture. Evolution After Darwin II, The Evolution of Man, The University of Chicago Press: pp. 33-56. Washburn, S.L. and I. DeVore. 1961. The social life of baboons. Scientific American, June 1961. Watkinson, A. R. and J. L. Harper. 1978. The demography of a sand dune annual: Vulpia fasciculata . J. Ecol. 66:15-33. Watkinson, A. R. and J. L. Harper. 1978. The demography of a sand dune annual: Vulpia fasciculata . J. Ecol. 66:15-33. Watson, A. and D. Jenkins. Experiments on population control by territorial behavior in red grouse. Watson, A. and G.R. Miller. Territory size and agression in a fluctuating red grouse population. Watson, J.D. 1963. Involvement of RNA in the Synthesis of Proteins. Science 140(3562):17-25. Watson, J.D. and F.H.C. Crick. 1953. Genetical Implications of the structure of deoxyribonucleic acid. Nature 171(4361):964- 967. Watson, J.D. and F.H.C. Crick. 1953. Molecular structure of nucleic acids. Nature 171(4356):737-738. Watts, C.H.S. 1970. Correction for bias in movements of small animals as revealed by trapping. J. of Mammalogy 51(1):194- 196. Watts, T. and W. Conley. Extinction probabilities in a remnant population of Ovis canadensis mexicana. Acta Theriologica 26:393-405. Way, A. B. 1981. Evolution and prediction. (Response to N. Eldredge) Science 212:737-738. Weaver, J. R. Escano, D. Mattson, T. Puchlerz, and D. Despain. A cumulative effects model for Grizzly bear management in the Yellowstone Ecosysyem. Webb, D.J. 1974. The statistics of relative abundance and diversity. J. theor. Biol. 43:277-291. Webb, T. 1986. Vegetational Change in eastern North America from 18,000 to 500 yr. B.P. Paper prepared for Symposium on: "New Approaches to Biogeography". Webb, W.L. 1965. Small mammal populations on islands. Ecology 46(4):479-488. Webb, W.L., W.K. Lauenroth, S.R. Szarek, abd R.S. Kinerson. 1983. Primary production and abiotic controls in forests, grasslands, and desert ecosystems in the United States. Ecology 64(1):134-151. Webster, J.R. 1983. The role of benthic macroinvertebrates in detritus dynamics of streams: a computer simulation. Ecological Monographs 53(4):383-404. Wecker, S.C. 1964. Habitat Selection. Scientific American, October. Wecker, S.C. 1964. Habitat selection. Scientific American: October. Wegner, J.F. and G. Merriam. 1979. Movements by birds and small mammals between a wood and adjoining farmland habitats. Blackwell Scientific Publications. Weiner, J. 1985. Size hierarchies in experimental populations of annual plants. Ecology 66(3):743-752. Weiner, J. 1985. Size hierarchies in experimental populations of annual plants. Ecology 66(3):743-752. Weiner, J. and O.T. Solbrig. 1984. The meaning and measurement of size hierarchies in plant populations. Oecologia 61:334-336. Weiner, J.G., D.W. Kaufman, G.A. Kaufman, J.B. Gentry, M.H. Smith and P.R. Ramsey. Chemical Composition of Rodents: Use of Whole Body Concentrations for Estimation of Standing Crops of Elements. The Southwestern Naturalist 22(1):77-88. Weins, J.A. 1966. On group selection and Wynne-Edwards hypothesis. Am. Sci. 54:273-287. Weinstein, M.S. 1976. Hares, Lynx, and Trappers. Am. Nat. Welling, C.H., R.L. Pederson and A.G. van der Valk. 1988. Recruitment from the seed bank and the development of zonation of emergent vegetation during a drawdown in a prairie wetland. J. Ecology 76:483-496. Wellington, W.G. 1960. Qualitative changes in natural populations during changes in abundance. Can. J. Zool. 38:289-314. Wells, P.V. and C.D. Jorgensen. 1964. Pleistocene Wood Rat Middens and Climatic Change in Mohave Desert: A record of Juniper Woodlands. Science 143:1171-1173. Werner, E. E. 1980. Niche theory in fisheries ecology. Transactions of the American Fisheries Society 109:254-260. Werner, E.E. 1977. Species Packing and Niche Complementarity in three sunfishes. The American Naturalist 111(979):553-578. Werner, E.E. 1980. Niche Theory in Fisheries Ecology. Transactions of the American Fisheries Society 109:254-260. Werner, E.E. and D.J. Hall. 1976. Niche Shifts in Sunfishes: Experimental Evidence and Significance. Science 191:404-406. Werner, E.E. and D.J. Hall. 1977. Competition and Habitat Shift in Two Sunfishes (Centrarchidae). Ecology 58:869-876. Werner, E.E. and D.J. Hall. 1977. Density and competition among sunfish: some alternatives. Science 195:94-95. Werner, E.E. and D.J. Hall. 1977. Density and competition among sunfishes: Some alternatives. Science 195:94-95. Werner, E.E., G.G. Mittelbach, D.J. Hall and J.F. Gilliam. 1983. Experimental tests of optimal habitat use in fish: the role of relative habitat profitability. Ecology 64(6):1525-1539. Werner, E.E., J.F. Gilliam, D.J. Hall, and G.G. Mittelbach. 1983. An experimental test of the effects of predation risk on habitat use in fish. Ecology 64(6):1540-1548. Werner, P A. and W. J. Platt. 1976. Ecological relationships of co-occurring goldenrods ( solidago : compositae). Am. Mid. Nat. 110(976):959-971. Werner, P A. and W. J. Platt. 1976. Ecological relationships of co-occurring goldenrods ( solidago : compositae). Am. Mid. Nat. 110(976):959-971. Werner, W.E. 1956. Mammals of the thousand islands region, New York. J. Mamm. 37(2):395-406. West, D. C., S. B. McLaughlin and H. H. Shugart. 1980. Simulated forest response to chronic air pollution stress. J. Environ. Qual. 9(1):43-49. West, D. C., S. B. McLaughlin and H. H. Shugart. 1980. Simulated forest response to chronic air pollution stress. J. Environ. Qual. 9(1):43-49. West, D.C., H.H. Shugart, and J.W. Ranney. 1981. Population structure of forests over a large area. Forest Sci. 27(4):701-710. Westman, W.E. 1978. Measuring the Inertia and Resilience of Ecosystems. BioScience 28(11):705-710. Westoby, M. 1983. An ecological reconstruction. (Book Review) Science 220:494-496. Wetzel, R.L. 1986. LTER Proposal. Personal correspondence. |UVA publications Wetzler, R.E. 1984. Recolonization rate variabilities among and within experimentally defaunated bahamian islands. Report submitted to Science. |assembly rules Wheelwright, N.T. 1985. Fruit size, gape width, and the diets of fruit-eating birds. Ecology 66(3):808-818. When is an Island in equilibrium? |equilibrium model Whitaker, J. O., Jr. 1963. Food, habitat and parasites of the woodland jumping mouse in central New York. J. Mamm. 44(3):316-321. White, C. P. 1985. Values of wetlands to endangered species within the Chesapeake Bay watershed: Maryland and Virginia coastal plain. Wetlands of the Chesapeake proc.: 105-120. White, C.L. Geography and the World's population. The Facts of Population Growth. White, C.P. 1985. Values of Wetlands to endangered species within the chesapeake bay watershed: Maryland and Virginia Coastal Plain. Proceedings of Wetlands of the Chesapeake conference, April 9-11, 1985: Easton, MD. White, G.C., D.R. Anderson, K.P. Burnham, D.L. Otis. 1982. Capture-Recapture and Removal Methods for Sampling Closed Populations. Los Alamos National Laboratory Report: LA-8787- NERP. White, L. 1967. The historical roots of our ecologic crisis. Science 155(3767):1203-1207. White, M.J.D. 1968. Models of Speciation. Science 159:1065-1069. White, T.C.R. 1969. An index to measure weather-induced stress of trees associated with outbreaks of psyllids in Australia. Ecology 50(5):905-909. White, T.C.R. 1978. The importance of a relative shortage of food in animal ecology. Oecologia 33:71-86. Whitehead, D.R. 1965. Prehistoric Maize in Southeastern Virginia. Science 150:881-884. Whitehead, D.R. and C.E. Jones. 1969. Small islands and the equilibrium theory of insular biogeography. Evolution 25:171- 179. Whitham, T.G. 1978. Habitat selection by Pemphigus aphids in reponse to resource limitation and competition. Ecology 59(6):1164-1176. Whittaker, R.H. 1970. The Biochemical Ecology of Higher Plants. Chemical Ecology. Academic Press: New York. Whittaker, R.H. 1973. Handbook of vegetational science. Part V: Ordination and classification of vegetation. Whittaker, R.H. 1977. Evolution of species diversity in land communities. Whittaker, R.H. Dominance and diversity in land plant communities. Whittaker, R.H. and G.M. Woodwell. Evolution of natural communities. in, Ecosystem Structure and Function. Whittaker, R.H. and P.P. Feeny. 1971. Allelochemics: Chemical interactions between species. Science 171(3973):757-770. Whittaker, R.H., S.A. Levin and R.B. Root. 1973. Niche, Habitat and Ecotope. The American Naturalist 107(955):321-338. Whittaker, R.H., W.A. Niering, and M.D. Crisp. 1979. Structure, Pattern and Diversity of a Mallee Community in New South Wales. Vegetatio 39(2):65-76. Whittam, T.S. and D. Siegel-Causey. 1981. Species incidence functions and Alaskan seabird colonies. J. of Biogeography 8:421-425. |assembly rules Whittam, T.S. and D. Siegel-Causey. 1981. Species interactions and community structure in Alaskan seabird colonies. Ecology 62(6):1515-1524. |assembly rules Wiegert, R.G. 1962. The selection of an optimum quadrant size for sampling the standing crop of grasses and forbes. Ecol. 43(1):125-129. Wiegert, R.G. 1972. Population dynamics of cotton rats ( Sigmodon hispidus ) and meadow voles ( Microtus pennsylvanicus ) in field enclosures in South Carolina. Bull. Georgia Acad. Sci. 30:103-110. Wiegert, R.G. 1974. A general mathematical representation of ecological flux processes: Description and use in ecosystem models. Proceedings of the 6th Annual S.E. Systems Symp. Wiegert, R.G. 1975. Mathematical Representation of Ecological Interactions. in, Ecosystem Analysis and Prediction, Proc. of SIAM-SIMS, Alta, Utah. S.A. Levin, ed. Philadelphia Society Ind. and Appl. Math. Wiegert, R.G. and D.F. Owen. 1971. Trophic structure, available resources and population density in terrestrial vs. aquatic ecosystems. J. Theoretical Biol. 30:69-81. Wiegert, R.G. and J.T. McGinnis. 1975. Annual production and disappearance of detritus on three south Carolina old fields. Ecology 56(1):129-140. Wiemeyer, S.N., J.M. Scott, et al. 1988. Environmental contaminants in California condors. J. Wildl. Mgmt. 52(2):238-247. Wiener, J.G. 1975. Nutrient cycles, nutrient limitation and vertebrate populations. The Biologist 57(3):104-124. Wiens, J.A. 1966. On group selection and wynne-edwards hypothesis. American Scientist 54(3):273-287. Wiens, J.A. 1967. An instrument for measuring light intensities in dense vegetation. Ecology 48(6):1006-1008. Wiens, J.A. 1969. An approach to the study of ecological relationships among grassland birds. Ornithological Monographs No. 8. Wiens, J.A. 1973. Pattern and Process in Grassland Bird Communities. Ecological Monographs 43:237-270. Wiens, J.A. 1974. Habitat Heterogeneity and Avian Community Structure in North American Grasslands. The American Midland Naturalist 91(1):195-213. Wiens, J.A. 1977. On competition and variable environments. American Scientist 65:590-597. |competition |dabate |evidence |reviews Wiens, J.A. 1981. Single-sample surveys of communities: are the revealed patterns real? The American Naturalist 117:90-98. |equilibrium theory |density compensation Wiens, J.A. Avian community ecology: an iconoclastic view. Manuscript. |competition |dabate |evidence |reviews Wiens, J.A. Ecosystem structure and function. Oregon State University Press. Wiens, J.A. On competition and variable environments. Amer. Sci. 65:590-597. |competition |dabate |evidence |reviews Wiens, J.A. On understanding a non-equilibrium world: myth and reality in community patterns and process. Chapter 25. |scientific method Wiens, J.A. and G.S. Innis. 1973. Estimation of energy flow in bird communities. II. A simulation model of activity budgets and population bioenergetics. Proceedings of 1973 Summer Computer Simulation Conference, Montreal, Canada pp. 739-752. Wiens, J.A. and J.T. Rotenberry. 1980. Patterns of morphology and ecology in grassland and shrubsteppe bird populations. Ecological Monographs 50(3):287-308. Wiens, J.A. and J.T. Rotenberry. 1981. Habitat associations and community structure of birds in shrubsteppe environments. Ecological Monographs 51(1):21-41. Wiens, J.A. and J.T. Rotenberry. 1981. Habitat associations and community structure of birds in shrubsteppe environments. Ecological Monographs 51(1):21-41. Wiens, J.A. and J.T. Rotenberry. 1981. Morphological size ratios and competition in ecological communities. The American Naturalist 117:992-999. Wiens, J.A., J.F. Addicott, T.J. Case, and J. Diamond. Overview: The importance of spatial and temporal scale in ecological investigations. Chapter 8. Wilbur, H.M. 1972. Competition, predation and the structure of the Ambystoma-Rana Sylvatica Community. Ecology 53(1):3-21. Wilbur, H.M. and J. Travis. An experimental approach to understanding pattern in natural communities. Chapter 8. |scientific method Wilbur, H.M. and J.P. Collins. 1973. Ecological Aspects of Amphibian Metamorphosis. Science 182:1305-1314. Wilbur, H.M., D.W. Tinkle, and J.P. Collins. Environmental certainty, trophic level, and resource availability in life history evolution. The American Naturalist 108(964):805-817. Wilcox, B.A. 1985. Conservation strategy: the effects of fragmentation on extinction. Am. Nat. 125:879-887. Wiley, R.H. 1975. Multidimensional variation in an avian display: Implications for social communication. Science 190:482-484. Wilhm, J.L. 1970. Effect of sample size on Shannon's formula. The Southwestern Naturalist 14(4):441-445. Wilkins, K.T. 1988. Prediction of direction of chewing from cranial and dental characters in Thomomys pocket gophers. J. Mamm. 69(1):46-56. Williams, B.G. and F.F. Banyikwa. 1981. Comments on Abrams' test of Pianka's niche overlap hypothesis. Am. Nat. 117(5):774- 778. Williams, B.K. 1982. A simple demonstration of the relationship between classification and canonical variates analysis. The American Statistician 35(4):363-365. Williams, B.K. 1983. Some observations on the use of discriminant analysis in ecology. Ecology 64(5):1283-1291. Williams, G.J. 1974. Photosynthetic adaptation to temperature in C3 and C4 grasses. Plant Physiol. 54:709-711. Williams, G.R. 1981. Aspects of avian island biogeography in New Zealand. J. of Biogeography 8:439-456. |equilibrium theory |density compensation Williams, L.R. and G.N. Cameron. 1984. Demography of dispersal in Attwater;s pocket gopher (Geomys attwater). J. Mamm. 65(1):67-75. Williamson, G.B. 1975. Pattern and Seral Composition in an Old- Growth Beech-Maple Forest. Ecology 56(3):727-731. Williamson, M. 1972. The relation of principal component analysis to the analysis of variance. Int. J. Math. Educ. Sci. Technol. 3:35-42. Williamson, M. 1972. The relation of principal component analysis to the analysis of variance. Int. J. Math. Educ. Sci. Technol. 3:35-42. Williamson, M. 1983. The land-bird community of Stockholm: ordination and turnover. Oikos 41:378-384. |community assembly Willis, E.O. 1984. Conservation, subdivision of reserves and the anti-dismemberment hypothesis. Oikos 42:396-398. |conservation Wills, C. 1982. Evolution by metaphor. Science 218:1109-1110. | creationism Wills, C. 1982. Evolution by metaphor. Science 218:1109-1110. | creationism Willson, M.F. 1969. Avian niche size and morphological variation. The American Naturalist 103(933):531-542. Willson, M.F. 1974. Avian Community organization and habitat structure. Ecology 55:1017-1029. Willson, M.F. 1981. On the evolution of complex life cycles in plants: a review and an ecological perspective. Ann. Missouri Bot. Gard. 68:275-300. Wilson, B.K. and J.G. Hallett. The analysis of competition systems: some further considerations. Manuscript. Wilson, D. S. 1983. The effect of population structure on the evolution of mutualism: a field test involving burying beetlesand their phoretic mites. Am. Nat. 121(6):851-870. Wilson, D.S. 1976. Evolution on the level of communities. Science 192:1358-1360. Wilson, E. O. 1985. Invasion and extinction in the West Indian ant fauna: evidence from the Dominican Amber. Science 229:265-267. Wilson, E.O. 1985. The sociogenesis of insect colonies. Science 228:1489-1495. Wilson, E.O. The species equilibrium. pp. 38-47. |equilibrium model Wilson, M.L., G.H. Adler and A. Spielman. 1985. Correlation between abundance of deer and that of the deer tick, Ixodes dammini. Winkworth, R.E. and D.W. Goodall. 1962. A crosswire sighting tube for point quadrant analysis. Ecology 43(2):342-343. Winterhalder, B.P. 1980. Canadian fur bearer cycles and Cree- Ojibwa hunting and trapping practices. Am. Nat. 115(6):870- 879. Winterhalder, B.P. 1980. Canadian fur bearer cycles and cree- ojibwa hunting and trapping practices. The American Naturalist 115(6):870-879. Wolf, L.L. and F.G. Stiles. 1972. Energetics of Foraging: Rate and Efficiency of Nectar Extraction by Hummingbirds. Science 176:1351-1352. Wolfe, J.L. 1968. Average distance between successive captures as a home range index for Peromyscus leucopus. J. of Mammalogy 49(2):342-343. Wolff, J.O. 1980. Social Organization of the Taiga Vole (Microtus xanthognathus). The Biologist 62(1-4):34-45. Wolff, J.O. and R.D. Dueser. Noncompetitve coexistence between Peromyscus species and Clethrionomys gapperi. Manuscript. Wolff, J.O., M.H. Freeberg and R.D. Dueser. 1983. Interspecific territorality in two sympatric species of Peromyscus (Rodentia: Cricetidae). Behav. Ecol. Sociobiol 12:237-242. |UVA publications Wolff, J.O., M.H. Freeberg and R.D. Dueser. 1983. Interspecific territoriality in two sympatric species of Peromyscus ( Rodentia : Cricetidae ). Behav. Ecol. Sociobiol. 12:237-242. Wood, J.M. 1974. Biological cycles for toxic elements in the environment. Science 183:1049-1052. Wood, J.W., P.E. Smouse and J.C. Long. 1985. Sex-specifc dispersal patterns in two human populations of highland New Guinea. Am. Nat. 125(6):747-768. Wood, T., F.H. Bormann, G.K. Voight. 1984. Phosphorus cycling in a northern hardwood forest: biological and chemical control. Science 223:391-393. Wood, T.K. and S.I. Guttman. 1983. Enchenopa binotata complex: sympatric speciation? Science 220:310-312. Woodmansee, R.G. 1978. Additions and losses of nitrogen in grassland ecosystems. BioSci. 28(7):448-453. Woodwell, G.M. 1963. The Ecological effects of radiation. Scientific American, June Woodwell, G.M. 1967. Toxic substances and ecological cycles. Scientific American 216(3):24-31. Woodwell, G.M. 1978. The carbon dioxide question. Sci. Amer. 238(1):34-43. Woodwell, G.M. 1978. The carbon dioxide question. Scientific American 238(1):34-43. Woodwell, G.M. and R.H. Whittaker. 1968. Primary production in terrestrial ecosystems. Am. Zool. 8:19-30. Woodwell, G.M., J.E. Hobbie, R.A. Houghton, J.M. Melillo, B. Moore, B.J. Peterson, and G.R. Shaver. 1983. Global deforestation: contribution to atmospheric carbon dioxide. Science 222:1081-1086. Woodwell, G.M., P.P. Craig snd H. A. Johnsomn. 1967. DDT residue in an east coast estuary: A case of biological concentration of a persistent insecticide. Science 156:821-824. Woodwell, G.M., P.P. Craig, and H.A. Johnson. 1971. DDT in the Biosphere: Where does it go? Science 174:1101-1110. Woodwell, G.M., R.H. Whittaker, W. A. Reiners, G. E. Likens, C. C. Delwiche and D. B. Botkin. 1978. The biota and the world carbon budget. Science 199:141-146. Woodwell, G.M., R.H. Whittaker, W.A. Reiners, G.E. Likens, C.C. Delwiche, D.B. Botkin. 1978. The Biota and the World Carbon Budget. Science 199:141-145. Woolbright, L.L. 1983. Sexual selection and size dimorphism in Anuran amphibia. Am. Nat. 121:110-119. Woolf, C.M. and F.C. Dukepoo. 1969. Hopi indians, inbreeding, and albinism. Science 164:30-37. Woolfenden, G.E. and J.W. Fitapatrick. 1978. Reply to Selander and Brown. BioScience 29(12):751-752. Wratten, S.D., P. Goddard, and P.J. Edwards. 1981. British trees and insects: the role of palatability. Am. Nat. 118:916-919. Wright, E.J. 1988. A History of the Eastern Shore from Articles published in the Philosophical Transactions of the Royal Society of London. 1665-1850. III. A Continuation of Mr. John Clayton's Account of Virginia of the Beasts of Virginia. (Refers to Fox Squirrels). Wright, H.E. 1974. Landscape development, forest fires, and wilderness management. Science 186(4163):487-495. Wright, J. 1980. Density compensation in island avifaunas. Oecologia 45:385-389. |UVA publications Wright, S. 1949. Population structure in evolution. Proc. Amer. Philosophical Society. 93(6):471-478. Wright, S.J. 1981. Extinction-mediated competition: the Anolis lizards and insectivorous birds of the West Indies. The American Naturalist 117(2):181-192. |community assembly Wright, S.J. 1981. Intra-archipelago vertebrate distributions: the slope of the species-area relation. The American Naturalist 118(5):726-748. |equilibrium theory |density compensation Wright, S.J. and C.C. Biehl. 1982. Island biogeographic distributions: testing for random, regular, and aggregated patterns of species occurrence. The American Naturalist 119(3):345-357. |community assembly Wright, S.J. and C.C. Biehl. Empty sites and the analysis of presence-absence data. The American Naturalist 122(6):833- 834. |equilibrium theory |density compensation Wright, S.J. and S.P. Hubbell. 1983. Stochastic extinction and reserve size: a focal species approach. Oikos 41:466-476. |conservation Wright, T. 1986. Survey sampling: a useful tool for scientific investigation. Oak Ridge Nat. Lab. Rev. 4:32-41. Wright, T. and E. Lundelius, Jr. 1963. Post-pleistocene raccoons from Central Texas and their Zoogeographic Significance. The Pearce-Sellards Series, The University of Texas 2:1-21. Wuenscher, J.E. 1969. Niche Specification and Competition Modeling. J. Theoret. Biol. 25:436-443. Wurster, C.F. 1968. DDT reduces photosynthesis by marine phytoplankton. Science 159:1474-1475. Wurster, C.F. and D.H. Wurster. 1965. DDT spray and bird mortality. Science 149:326. Wurster, C.F. and Wingate. 1968. DDT residues and declining reproduced the Bermuda petrel. Science 159:979-981. Wynne-Edwards, V.C. 1955. Low Reproductive Rates in Birds, especially Sea Birds. Acta XI. Congress International Ornith. Wynne-Edwards, V.C. 1959. The control of population-density through social behavior: A hypothesis. Ibis 101:436-441. Wynne-Edwards, V.C. 1965. Self-regulating systems in populations of animals. Science 147:1543-1548. Wywialowski, A.P. and L.C. Stoddart. 1988. Estimation of jack rabbit density: methodology makes a difference. J. Wildl. Mgmt. 52(1):57-59. Yahner, R.H. 1983. Population dynamics of small mammals in farmstead shelterbelts. J. Mamm. 64(3):380-386. Yeaton, R.I. 1974. An ecological analysis of chaparral and pine forest bird communities on santa Cruz Island and mainland California. Ecology 55:959-973. Yoshiyama, R.M. and J. Roughgarden. 1977. Species packing in two dimensions. The American Naturalist 111(977):107-121. Young, B. L. and I. J. Stout. 1986. Effects of extra food on small rodents in a south temperate zone habitat: demographic responses. Can. J. Zool. 64:1211-1217. Young, D.R. 1985. Crown architecture, light interpretation, and stomatal conductance patterns for sympatric deciduous and evergreen species in a forest understory. Can. J. Bot. 63:2425-2429. Young, D.R. 1987. Daily and seasonal variations in the water relations of the understory tree, Asimina triloba. Acta Oecologica 8(22):59-68. Young, D.R. and J.B. Yavitt. 1987. Differences in leaf structure, chlorophyll, and nutrients for the understory tree Asimina tribola. Amer. J. of Botany 74(10):1487-1491. Zammuto, R.M. and J.S. Millar. 1985. A consideration of bet- hedgeing in Spermophilus columbianus. J. Mamm. 66(4):652-660. Zammuto, R.M. and J.S. Millar. 1985. A consideration of bet- hedging in Spermophilus columbianus. Journal of Mammology. 66(4):652-660. |Mammal Populations Coastal Insular Zammuto, R.M. and J.S. Millar. 1985. A consideration of bet- hedging on Spermophilus columbianus. J. Mamm. 66(4):652-660. Zegers, D.A., and A.J. Antipas. Tree use by Peromyscus leucopus in a sugar maple forest. Zimmerman, E.G. 1965. A comparison of habitat and food of two species of microtus. J. of Mammalogy 48(4):605-612. Zongyong, Z. and J.H. Brown. A method for distinguishing death rate from dispersal rate in mark-recapture studies. submitted to J. of Mamm. Zvelebil, M. 1986. Postglacial foraging in the forests of Europe. Sci. Amer. 254(5):104-115. de Beer, G. 1971. Some general biological principals illustrated by the evolution of man. Oxford Biology Readers. ter Braak, C.J.F. 1983. Principal components biplots and alpha and beta diversity. Ecology 64(3):454-462. |mammal experiments Crowell, Lomolino